OrgPlus 7 User Guide

OrgPlus 7 User Guide 

Release 7.0.0 

The material presented in this publication is copyright-protected © 2000-2007 by HumanConcepts and may 

not be reproduced in any form, by any method for any purpose without the prior written consent of 

HumanConcepts. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. It is against the law to 

copy the software, except in accordance with the terms of the licensing agreement. OrgPlus® is a registered 

trademark of HumanConcepts. All other trademarks acknowledged.

OrgPlus User Guide 

ii


Program License Agreement 

PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING DESKTOP SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") 

CAREFULLY. THIS AGREEMENT FORMS A LEGALLY BINDING AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU, THE 

INDIVIDUAL OR ENTITY THAT DOWNLOADED OR INSTALLED THE SOFTWARE ("CUSTOMER") 

AND HUMANCONCEPTS LLC ("HUMANCONCEPTS"). BY CLICKING THE "I ACCEPT THE TERMS OF 

THIS LICENSE" BUTTON DURING SOFTWARE INSTALLATION OR BY USING THE SOFTWARE 

PROVIDED WITH THIS AGREEMENT, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS 

AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS 

AGREEMENT, YOU SHOULD NOT INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE, AND YOU SHOULD 

PROMPTLY DESTROY ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE THAT YOU DOWNLOADED OR COPIED. 

1 Grant of License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, HumanConcepts grants to 

Customer a non-exclusive license to install the object code version of the software provided with this 

Agreement (the "Software"), on a single computer, and to use the Software on that computer, to create 

organizational charts relating to your organization. Customer agrees that it shall not use the Software in 

any other manner. Customer shall not install the Software on a network server; allow any other 

computer, terminal or device to access or use the Software; or install or use the Software concurrently 

on more than one computer except as expressly authorized by the level of license you purchased. 

Customer shall not copy the Software except to make one copy for backup purposes. Customer shall not 

sublicense its rights under this Agreement, rent or lease the Software, or give anyone else access to the 

Software. 

2 Maximum Number of Employees Charted Depends Upon License Key. Customer acknowledges 

that HumanConcepts distributes several versions of the Software and that the version of the Software to 

which Customer has acquired a license key is intended to allow Customer to access certain features. The 

OrgPlus Express Software limits the number of boxes that can be added to a single chart. The OrgPlus 

Professional Software is limited to charting the maximum number of employees indicated in 

HumanConcepts’ price list at the time you purchased the applicable license key. Customer agrees not to 

use the OrgPlus Professional Software to chart more than the total maximum number of employees 

applicable to the particular license key you purchased. Customer agrees that if it uses the OrgPlus 

Professional Software to chart more than such total maximum number of employees, (a) Customer will 

pay to HumanConcepts it’s then-current license fee for the version of the Software that would permit 

Customer to chart that number of employees (less the fee already paid pursuant to this Agreement), 

and (b) if Customer does not pay such additional fee to HumanConcepts within fifteen (15) days of 

demand, HumanConcepts may terminate your license to use the Software without refunding any license 

fees. 

3 Copyright. Customer acknowledges that HumanConcepts or its licensors own the copyright and all 

other intellectual property rights relating to the Software, and that no title to the Software or such 

intellectual property rights is transferred to Customer. Customer will not acquire any rights to the 

Software except the limited license to use the Software as expressly set forth above, and 

HumanConcepts and its licensors retain all other rights. Customer agrees not to alter or remove the 

copyright notice, or any other notices of proprietary rights, that appear on and in the Software. In the 

event HumanConcepts provides services to Customer, including without limitation support or installation 

services, all right, title and interest in the work product of the services shall vest exclusively in 

HumanConcepts. 


iii


4 Restrictions; Reverse Engineering; Modification. Customer agrees not to reverse engineer, 

decompile, or disassemble the Software in whole or in part, or otherwise reconstruct or discover any 

source code to the Software, or attempt to do so, except and only to the extent that such activity 

cannot be restricted under applicable law. Customer agrees not to translate or modify the Software in 

any way or create derivative works of the Software, or attempt to do so. Customer agrees not to use 

the Software on a service bureau, application service provider, or time sharing basis. Customer shall not 

use any license key with the Software other than the key provided by HumanConcepts to Customer. 

5 Transfer of License. Customer may not assign or transfer its rights or obligations under this 

Agreement, except that Customer may assign the Agreement to a successor to its business that results 

from a sale of substantially all of Customer’s assets, merger, or similar transaction, provided that the 

assignee agrees in writing to be bound by this Agreement and provided that Customer transfers all 

copies of the Software and related documentation to the third party or destroys any copies not 

transferred. HumanConcepts may assign or novate this Agreement freely without notice to Customer. 

6 Reporting and Privacy Policy. The Software automatically reports information such as Customer’s 

Software license key and Software version number, without notice. This information may be associated 

with personally identifiable information acquired by HumanConcepts. By using the Software you consent 

to the collection of such information. The information and this Agreement are subject to the terms and 

conditions of the HumanConcepts’ privacy policy located at http://www.humanconcepts.com/privacypolicy/ 

("Privacy Policy"). The terms and conditions of the Privacy Policy are incorporated herein by 

reference, and Customer hereby agrees to such terms. HumanConcepts reserves the right to modify the 

terms of the Privacy Policy from time to time, and Customer’s continued use of the Service shall indicate 

its agreement to such changes. 

7 Term of License. The license granted by this Agreement shall continue until terminated, as provided 

in this Agreement. Customer may terminate the license at any time. HumanConcepts may terminate the 

license (a) if Customer fails to comply with this Agreement, (b) if Customer does not pay the full license 

fee when that fee is due, or (c) Customer does not pay any additional license fees that may become due 

pursuant to Section 2 of this Agreement. Customer agrees, upon any termination of the license, to 

destroy the Software and all copies thereof in any form. If the Agreement is terminated, the sections 

related to copyright, liability, disclaimer of warranty, and fees shall remain in effect, in addition to other 

sections that by their terms are intended to survive. Termination shall not result in a return of fees. 

8 Limited Warranty on CD. If the Software was delivered to you on a CD, HumanConcepts warrants 

that the CD will be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for 30 days after 

purchase. During the 30-day period, Customer may return a defective CD to HumanConcepts with proof 

of purchase, and it will be replaced without charge, unless the disk is damaged by accident or misuse. 

REPLACEMENT OF A DISK IS CUSTOMER’S SOLE REMEDY PURSUANT TO THIS WARRANTY. 

9 DISCLAIMER OF OTHER WARRANTIES. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, EXCEPT 

AS EXPRESSLY STATED HEREIN, THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT 

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. HUMANCONCEPTS, AND ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS, HEREBY 

DISCLAIM ALL ADDITIONAL WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR 

OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, 

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HUMANCONCEPTS DOES 

NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR INTERRUPTION. 

iv 

Program License Agreement


10 Limitation of Liability. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL 

HUMANCONCEPTS (OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS) BE LIABLE TO CUSTOMER OR ANY OTHER 

PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, 

INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS 

OF DATA, OR COST OF COVER, WHETHER ALLEGED AS A BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORTIOUS 

CONDUCT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION NEGLIGENCE, ARISING OUT OF OR 

RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT EVEN IF HUMANCONCEPTS (OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS) HAS 

BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL HUMANCONCEPTS’ (OR 

ITS LICENSORS OR SUPPLIERS) AGGREGATE LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH 

THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE LICENSE FEES PAID BY CUSTOMER TO HUMANCONCEPTS DURING 

THE ONE-YEAR PERIOD PRECEDING THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY, AND IF THE 

SOFTWARE WAS PROVIDED TO CUSTOMER FREE OF CHARGE, IN NO EVENT SHALL SUCH AGGREGATE 

LIABILITY EXCEED FIVE DOLLARS (US$5.00). IN THE EVENT OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF ANY 

SERVICES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION SUPPORT, IN NO EVENT WILL HUMANCONCEPTS’ 

AGGREGATE LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE 

FEES PAID BY CUSTOMER TO HUMANCONCEPTS FOR THE EFFECTED SERVICES FOR THAT QUARTER. 

CUSTOMER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR BACKING UP ALL DATA ASSOCIATED WITH ITS USE OF THE 

SOFTWARE, AND HUMANCONCEPTS (AND ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE 

FOR ANY LOST DATA OR ERRORS IN DATA CAUSED BY THE SOFTWARE. 

11 Support Agreement. Customer acknowledges that HumanConcepts shall not be obligated to provide 

support or maintenance related to Customer’s use of the Software. In the event HumanConcepts in its 

discretion provides support and/or maintenance to the Customer, such support and/or maintenance 

shall be provided pursuant to HumanConcepts’ then-current current support terms. 


v


12 General Provisions. 

a) Severability. In the event any provision of this Agreement is determined to be invalid 

or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent permitted, and 

the Parties agree that the other provisions of this Agreement shall not be affected and shall 

continue to be enforced. The Parties agree that this Agreement is the entire agreement 

between Customer and HumanConcepts relating to its subject matter, and it supersedes 

any prior agreements, representations, or communications, whether written or oral, 

relating to that subject matter. 

b) Choice of Law and Venue. This Agreement shall be governed by the internal laws of 

the State of California, without respect to its conflicts of law rules. The Parties agree that 

this Agreement shall not be governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for 

the International Sale of Goods. The Parties agree that any suit or proceeding arising out of 

or relating to this Agreement will be brought only in the US District Court for the Northern 

District of California or the California Superior Court for Marin County, and each shall 

submit to the exclusive personal and subject matter jurisdiction and venue of such courts. 

c) Export. Customer acknowledges that United States (including without limitation US 

Export Administration Regulations) and foreign laws prohibit the export/re-export or 

transfer of products and technical data of US origin, including software, and Customer 

agrees not to export or re-export the Software or related technology without the 

appropriate US and foreign government clearance. 

d) Waiver. No term or provision hereof will be considered waived by either Party, and no 

breach excused by either party, unless such waiver or consent is in writing signed by both 

Parties. No consent by either party to, or waiver of, a breach by either party, whether 

express or implied, will constitute a consent to, waiver of, or excuse of any other, different, 

or subsequent breach by either Party. 

e) Force Majeure. Neither Party will be liable for any failure or delay in performance 

under this Agreement which might be due, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, to any 

contingency, delay, failure, or cause of, any nature beyond the reasonable control of such 

party, including, without limitation, fire, explosion, earthquake, storm, flood, strike, war, 

insurrection, riot, act of God, epidemic, government action, network outage, or acts or 

failures to act on the part of any third party. In the event of the happening of such a 

cause, the party whose performance is so affected will give prompt, written notice to the 

other Party, stating the period of time the same is expected to continue. 

f) Notices. Any notice provided for or permitted under this Agreement will be treated as 

having been given when (a) delivered personally, (b) sent by confirmed telex or telecopy, 

(c) sent by commercial overnight courier with written verification of receipt, or (d) mailed 

postage prepaid by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested, to the party to be 

notified. Notices to HumanConcepts shall be sent to its then-current principal place of 

business and notices to Customer shall be sent to Customer’s address appearing in 

HumanConcepts’ records, or to such other place of which the other party has been notified 

in accordance with the provisions of this section. Any notices will be treated as having been 

received upon the earlier of actual receipt or five (5) days after posting. 

g) Relationship of Parties. There is no relationship of agency, partnership, joint venture, 

employment or franchise between the parties. Neither party has the authority to bind the 

other or to incur any obligation on its behalf. No other party except HumanConcepts and 

Customer shall be construed as a third party beneficiary to this Agreement or in privity to 

enforce the provisions of this Agreement at law or in equity. 

vi 

Program License Agreement


About This Guide 

This guide provides an in-depth description of how to use OrgPlus 7. This guide is 

intended for new and experienced users. It includes both step-by-step tutorials and 

a detailed reference to all functionality. 

Chapter 1, Introduction, provides an overview of OrgPlus. 

Chapter 2, Installation and Registration, describes how to install and register 

OrgPlus on your PC. 

Chapter 3, Tutorials, provides step-by-steps lessons on how to use OrgPlus. 

Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting, provides an introduction to 

OrgPlus functionality. 

Chapter 5, Working with Charts: Navigation and Visualization, provides 

further charting instruction and explains how to navigate within your charts and 

define their visual appearance. 

Chapter 6, Working with Charts: Utilities, provides detailed description and 

instructions for using the tools available in OrgPlus. 

Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting, describes advanced 

OrgPlus charting techniques. 

Chapter 8, OrgPlus Panels, describes the OrgPlus panels designed to help you 

navigate, search and analyze your organizational charts. 

Chapter 9, Importing and Exporting Data, describes how to build charts using 

data imported from external sources such as Excel spreadsheets or relational 

databases. 

Chapter 10, Publishing your Chart, describes how to publish charts to standard 

desktop and web formats such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft PowerPoint, Adobe PDF, 

and HTML. Charts can also be published to the OrgPlus web browser plug-in. 

Chapter 11, Automation, explains how to automate some of the tasks you perform 

with OrgPlus. 

Appendix A, Window Structure and Command Reference, describes the 

OrgPlus main window and provides an overview for all menu and toolbar options. 

Appendix B, Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts, describes keyboard and mouse 

shortcuts. 

Appendix C, Tips and Tricks, reviews time saving functions and techniques. 

Appendix D, Troubleshooting, presents possible solutions should you encounter 

problems using OrgPlus. 

About This Guide 

vii


Appendix E, Off-line Registration Process, describes how to register OrgPlus by 

email, by fax or by phone. 

Appendix F, Command Line Reference, discusses how to use OrgPlus from the 

command prompt, which enables you to build scripts and complex automation tasks. 

Appendix G, Glossary, provides definitions of terms used in this guide. 

Additional documentation can also be found at our website: www.orgplus.com. 

Typographic Conventions 

The following typographic conventions appear in this guide: 

• Names of keyboard keys are enclosed by angle brackets (), (for example, 

Press ). Press + means to simultaneously hold down the 

key on the keyboard and press the letter ). 

• Buttons and tabs on the screen are shown in bold (for example, Click OK). 

• Information that you enter appears in bold face, (for example, Type A:\setup). 

• Sub-menu instructions are separated by a pipe (|), (for example, Show | 

Hidden Boxes means to select the Show menu item and select the Hidden 

Boxes sub-menu item). 

• Sections that describe functionality available to OrgPlus Express users are 

marked with this icon . 

OrgPlus Desktop Products 

Whether you work in a small company or large institution, OrgPlus is the easiest and 

most powerful way to chart and manage the structure of your organization. The 

OrgPlus family of products is designed to meet the needs of a variety of different 

types of users. 

OrgPlus Standard 

OrgPlus Standard allows users to manually create professional organizational charts 

of any size and includes intelligent tools for easy drag-and-drop scenario planning. 

OrgPlus Professional 

OrgPlus Professional includes features that are not available in OrgPlus Standard. 

These features allow you hook OrgPlus Professional into an external data source and 

then automatically distribute organizational chart to your company. The key features 

in OrgPlus Professional are: 

• Import: The ability to import data from external files or databases. 

viii 

Typographic Conventions


• Publish: The ability to publish charts to other formats including PDF, 

PowerPoint, Word, HTML and the OrgPlus Web Browser Plug-in. 

• Automation: The ability to schedule data refresh and chart publishing to 

automate the distribution and maintenance of charts. 

OrgPlus Express 

OrgPlus Express is a basic organizational charting application that does not include 

many of the powerful features found in OrgPlus Standard and Professional. 

Consequently not all the sections in this guide are applicable to OrgPlus Express 

users. The sections in this guide that are applicable to OrgPlus Express users are 

indicated by the OrgPlus Express icon . 

OrgPlus Reader 

OrgPlus Reader is a free application that allows anyone to open, view and print 

OrgPlus documents. OrgPlus Reader is a read-only version of OrgPlus that allows you 

to share charts with other people in your organization. OrgPlus Reader is 

downloadable from our website (http://www.orgplus.com). 

OrgPlus Enterprise Products 

HumanConcepts also offers products intended for enterprise customers. Contact 

sales@orgplus.com for more information. 

OrgPlus Enterprise 

OrgPlus Enterprise is a web-based solution for organizational charting. Any person in 

your organization can access organizational information using nothing more than a 

web browser. OrgPlus Enterprise solves the deployment, security, visualization and 

distribution issues associated with enterprise level organizational charting and is 

designed to integrate into your existing enterprise infrastructure. 

OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted 

OrgPlus Enterprise is available as a hosted solution. OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted 

provides the industry's leading enterprise-class organizational charting solution, 

without the cost of installing, upgrading, and maintaining a server in-house. Using 

our secure server, OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted enables organizations of all sizes to 

instantly create, view, share, and manage organizational charts. 

OrgPlus Enterprise Products 

ix


x 

OrgPlus Enterprise Products


Table of Contents 

Chapter 1, Introduction............................................................................. 1-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. 1-1 

About OrgPlus ...................................................................................................... 1-2 

The OrgPlus Solution ............................................................................................. 1-3 

OrgPlus Features .................................................................................................. 1-6 

OrgPlus 7 Highlights ............................................................................................ 1-21 

Chapter 2, Installation and Registration ................................................... 2-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. 2-1 

System Requirements............................................................................................ 2-2 

Standard vs. Professional ....................................................................................... 2-3 

OrgPlus Express.................................................................................................... 2-3 

Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-3 

Registration ......................................................................................................... 2-6 

Starting OrgPlus ................................................................................................. 2-11 

Customer Support............................................................................................... 2-13 

Chapter 3, Tutorials................................................................................... 3-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-2 

Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts ............................................................................. 3-2 

Tutorial 2: Formatting and Printing Charts ................................................................ 3-9 

Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles.................................................... 3-16 

Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts ...................................................................... 3-27 

Tutorial 5: Creating Charts from External Data ........................................................ 3-31 

Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts................................................................................. 3-38 

Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting........................................ 4-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. 4-1 

Opening Projects................................................................................................... 4-2 

Creating Projects .................................................................................................. 4-2 

Saving and Closing Projects.................................................................................... 4-4 

Adding and Deleting Boxes ..................................................................................... 4-6 

Selecting Objects .................................................................................................. 4-7 

Moving Objects................................................................................................... 4-12 

Entering Field Information .................................................................................... 4-15 


xi


Defining and Displaying Fields............................................................................... 4-17 

Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures .................................................. 4-35 

Formatting Charts ............................................................................................... 4-49 

Applying Chart Styles .......................................................................................... 4-54 

Quick Chart Panel ............................................................................................... 4-58 

Using Cut/Copy/Paste.......................................................................................... 4-65 

Printing ............................................................................................................. 4-66 

Chapter 5, Working with Charts: Navigation and Visualization.................. 5-1 

Viewing Charts ..................................................................................................... 5-1 

Hiding Boxes and Lines .......................................................................................... 5-5 

Basic Visualization Techniques ................................................................................ 5-6 

Working with Groups ............................................................................................. 5-9 

Chapter 6, Working with Charts: Utilities .................................................. 6-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. 6-1 

Using Grids and Rulers........................................................................................... 6-2 

Working with the Photo Manager ............................................................................. 6-2 

Comparing Charts ................................................................................................. 6-5 

Sorting Boxes....................................................................................................... 6-8 

Using Find and Replace .......................................................................................... 6-9 

Spell Check ........................................................................................................ 6-13 

Inserting Comments............................................................................................ 6-14 

Setting OrgPlus Options ....................................................................................... 6-15 

Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting................................. 7-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. 7-2 

Using the Master Page ........................................................................................... 7-2 

Adding Headers and Footers ................................................................................... 7-4 

Adding AutoText Elements...................................................................................... 7-5 

Adding Free Floating Objects .................................................................................. 7-6 

Adding Hyperlinks to Objects ................................................................................ 7-12 

Adding Auxiliary Lines.......................................................................................... 7-12 

Adding Legends .................................................................................................. 7-13 

Creating and Modifying Templates ......................................................................... 7-17 

Using Templates ................................................................................................. 7-19 

Defining Dynamic Fields....................................................................................... 7-22 

xii 

Table of Contents


Using Formulas................................................................................................... 7-29 

Using Constants.................................................................................................. 7-31 

Working with Sub-charts...................................................................................... 7-33 

Working with Multiple Charts ................................................................................ 7-39 

Advanced Chart Layout ........................................................................................ 7-42 

Multi-record Boxes .............................................................................................. 7-45 

Conditional Formatting......................................................................................... 7-47 

Chart Rules ........................................................................................................ 7-51 

Creating Off-page References ............................................................................... 7-54 

Chapter 8, OrgPlus Panels......................................................................... 8-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. 8-1 

Working with Reports ............................................................................................ 8-2 

Working with Directories ...................................................................................... 8-12 

Working with Profiles........................................................................................... 8-20 

Working with Trees ............................................................................................. 8-31 

Searching Charts ................................................................................................ 8-34 

Working with Comments ...................................................................................... 8-40 

Chapter 9, Importing and Exporting Data.................................................. 9-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. 9-1 

Importing Data..................................................................................................... 9-2 

Advanced Import ................................................................................................ 9-25 

Refreshing Data.................................................................................................. 9-42 

Exporting Data ................................................................................................... 9-47 

Push Data .......................................................................................................... 9-50 

Consolidation ..................................................................................................... 9-51 

Chapter 10, Publishing your Chart........................................................... 10-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 10-1 

Publishing .......................................................................................................... 10-2 

E-mailing a Chart File ........................................................................................ 10-13 

Chapter 11, Automation .......................................................................... 11-1 

Overview ........................................................................................................... 11-1 

Republishing ...................................................................................................... 11-2 

Scheduling Tasks ................................................................................................ 11-3 

OrgPlus Enterprise .............................................................................................. 11-9 


xiii


Appendix A, Window Structure and Command Reference.......................... A-1 

Main Window........................................................................................................A-2 

Menu Bar.............................................................................................................A-3 

Toolbars ............................................................................................................ A-15 

Panels ............................................................................................................... A-24 

Chart Selection Tabs ........................................................................................... A-30 

Status Bar ......................................................................................................... A-32 

Appendix B, Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts ............................................. B-1 

Using Right-Click Menus.........................................................................................B-1 

Using Keyboard Shortcuts ......................................................................................B-2 

Using the Function and Control Keys........................................................................B-6 

Appendix C, Tips and Tricks....................................................................... C-1 

Extra-Wide Manager Boxes.....................................................................................C-2 

Modified Co-manager Style.....................................................................................C-3 

Modified List Style.................................................................................................C-4 

Multiple Topmost Boxes .........................................................................................C-5 

Multiple People in a Box - Employees Listed by Function .............................................C-6 

Multiple Charts on a Page.......................................................................................C-7 

Repositioning Boxes within the Same Level...............................................................C-8 

Staggering Boxes on the Same Level .......................................................................C-8 

Appendix D, Troubleshooting ....................................................................D-1 

Overview .............................................................................................................D-1 

Installation ..........................................................................................................D-2 

Printing ...............................................................................................................D-2 

Using OrgPlus with Other Applications ......................................................................D-5 

Calculations .........................................................................................................D-6 

Disk Space...........................................................................................................D-7 

Memory & Resources .............................................................................................D-7 

Appendix E, Off-line Registration .............................................................. E-1 

Registering by Email.............................................................................................. E-2 

Registering by Fax ................................................................................................ E-2 

Registering by Phone............................................................................................. E-3 

Appendix F, Command Line Reference ...................................................... F-1 

Overview ............................................................................................................. F-1 

xiv 

Table of Contents


Appendix G, Glossary ................................................................................G-1 

Index .........................................................................................................I-1 


xv


xvi 

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 

Introduction 

➣ In this chapter… 

Overview page 1-1 

About OrgPlus page 1-2 

The OrgPlus Solution page 1-3 

OrgPlus Features page 1-6 

OrgPlus 7 Highlights Page 1-21 

Overview 

OrgPlus is the industry leader in organizational charting software. For over a decade, 

OrgPlus has been used for managing organizational charts and supporting critical 

business decisions. 

With over 30 new features OrgPlus 7 is the most powerful organizational charting 

tool available. 

1-1


About OrgPlus 

Whether you work in a small company or large institution, OrgPlus is the easiest way 

to chart and manage the structure of your organization. OrgPlus helps you create 

professional looking organization charts quickly and easily. You can also use OrgPlus 

to create almost any tree diagram, such as a work breakdown or a parts explosion. 

OrgPlus has become an essential management tool for millions of professionals 

throughout the world. Over 400 of the Fortune 500 have selected OrgPlus to meet 

their charting needs. 

OrgPlus is designed from the ground up to help you create and manage hierarchical 

charts. OrgPlus gives you: 

• High performance handling of large data sets 

• Sophisticated formatting 

• Drawing tools that enable you to add pictures and annotations 

• Data visualization tools, such as reports and directories 

• Sophisticated printing, exporting and publishing features 

• Easy navigation of complex charts 

• Robust data import from external sources, such as Excel, ODBC, OLE DB, SQL 

Server, Oracle, PeopleSoft, SAP, and LDAP (Active Directory) 

Sample charts, included with the OrgPlus installation, illustrate interesting ways in 

which OrgPlus can be used. 

1-2 About OrgPlus

Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

The OrgPlus Solution 

OrgPlus is designed to handle each step in the organizational charting process. 

OrgPlus handles data import from external systems and automates distribution of 

data to standard desktop formats (Microsoft PowerPoint or Word), to the web, or to 

hard copy. OrgPlus can even be used to feed updated data back into business 

systems. 

The following diagram illustrates how OrgPlus can be used in the HR environment. 

OrgPlus empowers organizations to create reliable business processes around the 

discipline of managing and communicating organizational structure and change. The 

benefits of OrgPlus are as follows: 

Communicate Organizational Information to Managers 

Human Resource or IT departments can create organizational charts automatically 

from HR databases and distribute them to management. This process is automated 

using OrgPlus Professional. Charts may contain sensitive information such as salary, 

gender, tenure and other information needed for decision-making purposes. 

The OrgPlus Solution 1-3


Communicate Organizational Information to Employees 

OrgPlus Professional is used for communicating organizational charts and corporate 

directories to the company intranet or shared network. OrgPlus Professional creates 

pre-defined charts directly from an HR database, either on a scheduled basis, or 

whenever initiated by a chart administrator. 

Sensitive information can be distributed securely to managers using existing network 

security. 

Non-sensitive information is presented in both an organizational chart format and as 

a corporate directory that can be shared across the organization. Charts are 

communicated to employees by publishing them for web or shared-network viewing. 

Employees with OrgPlus Standard or Professional can select specific chart branches 

and save to the OPX file format, where they can be used for planning or publishing 

to MS-Word, PowerPoint, or HTML or PDF formats. Organizational chart or corporate 

directory information can also be exported to Excel. 

OrgPlus is the ideal way to distribute corporate information. Posting charts to the 

web, your corporate intranet or a shared network drive makes them a company-wide 

information source that connects every employee. 

Organizational Planning and What If Scenario Analysis 

Managers select the charts published by HR or IT specific to their departments and 

use them as a baseline for planning, budgets and scenarios. Managers may need to 

communicate and solicit feedback from their employees to build a future plan. They 

use OrgPlus Professional or OrgPlus Standard. They then provide scenarios back to 

executive management for approval. This may take multiple iterations, and OrgPlus 

integrates with MS-Excel to easily translate organizational chart data into budgets, 

and with MS-Word and PowerPoint software for communicating. 

1-4 The OrgPlus Solution

Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

OrgPlus has built-in tools for performing spreadsheet functions, such as rollup 

summaries of salaries and headcount. When boxes include salary information, 

moving an employee between departments automatically updates budget totals. 

Analysis Tool 

By adding additional information such as office asset allocations, you can use 

OrgPlus to help you with asset management. 

The OrgPlus Solution 1-5


OrgPlus Features 

OrgPlus has many powerful features including: 

Fast Chart Creation 

You can import data from a 

database, spreadsheet, or start 

from scratch using OrgPlus' 

intelligent drawing tools. 

OrgPlus completely automates 

chart creation. 

Powerful Chart Formatting 

Compare Charts 

Master Page 

With OrgPlus, your charts keep pace with your changing organization. You can 

rearrange boxes by cutting and pasting, or dragging and dropping. You can 

rearrange the information within boxes manually, or save time by applying 

pre-defined templates. OrgPlus automatically preserves uniform sizing and spacing, 

and shows you an accurate print preview. 

OrgPlus allows you to compare two charts. After comparison, OrgPlus generates a 

report containing the differences between the two charts. 

The Master Page feature enables you to define a transparent background page that 

is used for all the chart pages (similar to the feature available in Microsoft 

PowerPoint). The master page can include, for example, a corporate logo or 

photographs, and elements such as page numbers and the date the chart was last 

updated. 

1-6 OrgPlus Features

Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

Sophisticated Box Layout 

Data fields including pictures and photos can be rearranged and formatted within a 

box to meet almost any design or reporting requirements. OrgPlus also allows you to 

set the background color and border style for any cell within a box. Field labels in 

boxes can be placed anywhere in a box (above, below, left, or right of the 

corresponding field). OrgPlus also allows you to create fixed size boxes and fixed size 

columns within boxes. 

Multi-Record Boxes 

You can create boxes that contain more then one record. For example, the entire 

sales team for an organization can be represented in a single box: 

OrgPlus Features 1-7


Mapped Fields 

Mapped fields allow you to map from one value to another value. For example, USA 

= www.mycompany.com/flags/usflag.jpg. 

Value Maps to Result 

US 

/images/usflag.jpg 

CA 

/images/caflag.jpg 

NL 

/images/nlflag.jpg 

CN 

/images/cnflag.jpg 

Symbols Library 

The My Charts folder contains a library of images that you can use in your charts. 

The image library is located in the My Documents/My Charts/Symbols folder on 

your computer. 


Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

Hotspots 

OrgPlus enables you to define any area within a box as a hotspot. When a user moves the 

cursor over a hotspot a profile is dynamically displayed. 

Quick Chart Creator 

The fastest way to get started with 

OrgPlus is to use the Quick Chart 

panel. The Quick Chart feature 

provides all the controls you need to 

create basic organizational charts in 

one easy to use panel. 



Templates 

Legends 

Templates provide a pre-defined starting point for setting up the look and feel of 

new or existing charts. 

OrgPlus supplies a variety of design, box and branch templates that can be used to 

quickly create professional looking charts. 

You can add legends to your charts. Each legend contains one or more color coded 

legend entries to help end users understand your charts. 

OrgUnit Charts 

Create a chart of Org Units (or departments) from the hierarchy shown in the subcharts 

panel. 


Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

Optimized Charts 

Charts can be optimized to fit on one or 

more pages, making charts easier to read, 

copy, and distribute. OrgPlus can 

automatically create compact charts by 

arranging boxes in the most space-efficient 

manner. 

Chart Orientation 

OrgPlus supports inverted charts and charts that are oriented left to right and right 

to left. 



Multi-column Chart Styles 

OrgPlus supports multiple subordinate rows under a single manager including the 

ability to maintain banding of employees within rows. 

Chart Style Rules 

Consolidation 

Chart Style Rules enable you to change chart branch styles based on you own rules. 

For example, any box containing an employee with the word Assistant in their title 

can automatically be reformatted to an assistant style. 

Style Rules also enable you to group and demote boxes based on user defined rules. 

Some organizations want to combine multiple organizational charts into a single 

chart. One common scenario is that each division within a company is responsible for 

maintaining their own organizational chart using OrgPlus. Using the consolidation 

feature, each division’s chart can be combined into a single master chart. 

Note: This feature is available only in OrgPlus Professional. 

Conditional Formatting 

Conditional formatting enables you to dynamically apply formatting to a subset of a 

chart that meets a set of user-defined criteria. After importing data, conditional 

formats can be applied to a chart to format any boxes meeting the criteria. For 

example, any box containing an employee who has more than 10 vacation days 

could have a thick red border. 


Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

Free Form Tool 

OrgPlus automatically positions chart boxes based on the selected branch style. 

From time to time, automatic positioning of chart boxes may not meet your charting 

requirements. The free form tool 

your chart. 

allows you to arbitrarily position boxes within 

Sub-charting 

OrgPlus includes sub-charting as an integral part of the charting process. Previewing 

and checking sub-charts prior to publishing ensures that published charts are always 

right the first time. 

Dotted Line reporting 

Groups 

In many companies, a single individual may appear in an organizational chart 

multiple times. Individuals of this type have dotted line reporting relationships to one 

or more managers. OrgPlus enables you to easily navigate through all occurrences of 

a dotted line report. 

The Groups feature enables you to define a subset of a chart that meets a set of 

user-defined criteria. All boxes that do not belong to this subset (or group) are then 

shaded when this group is selected. This enhances both chart presentation and 

analysis. For example, a group of all sales people who have met sales goals can 

easily be visualized. 

Conditional Formulas 

You can specify which boxes are to be included or excluded from a calculation by 

using a conditional formula. For example, you can specify the inclusion of only 

permanent (versus temporary) employees in a calculation. 



Managing Large Amounts of Complex Data 

Large charts can be subdivided into sub-charts. For example, an organization with 

ten divisions can be presented as eleven sub-charts – one for the executive team, 

and one for each division. 

This picture shows a chart before and after sub-charting, and how sub-charts are 

navigated. 

Importing Data from External Sources 

OrgPlus ensures that you are always working with the latest information. OrgPlus 

connects directly to your existing databases using an LDAP, SQL Server, ODBC or 

Oracle Connection Wizard, or to a spreadsheet or text file. Data can be refreshed at 

any time, either manually or on a scheduled basis. 

Orphan Management 

OLE DB Support 

If your data does not contain hierarchy information or your data contains a large 

number of unassigned positions, OrgPlus makes orphan management easy by 

allowing you to drag and drop employee records into your charts or sub-charts. 

OrgPlus supports data import from any OLE DB compatible data source. 

Note: This feature is available only in OrgPlus Professional. 

Direct Access to SAP 

OrgPlus allows you to import data directly from SAP using the SAP HR-OCI 

(Organizational Charting Interface). SAP HR-OCI guarantees compatibility with all 

future versions of SAP and does not require you to load custom software into your 

SAP environment. 

Note: SAP integration requires purchase of the OrgPlus SAP HR-OCI adapter. 


Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

Data Synchronization 

OrgPlus can refresh data from an underlying data source, such as an Excel 

spreadsheet, LDAP or relational database. No matter how an organization changes, 

OrgPlus can maintain chart formatting and publishing parameters. 



Advanced Search 

Perform advanced search functions. The Search Panel displays a tabular list all 

records based on a user defined query. The search panel is useful for finding any set 

of employees, data mining and succession planning. 

Reports 

OrgPlus enables you to create both static and dynamic reports from your underlying 

data. Reports can include summaries and allow you to sort and group data as 

required. Navigating through the chart dynamically updates the report based on 

current cursor position. 

Constants (what-if analysis) 

OrgPlus allows you to define constants that you can use in formulas, conditional 

formats and chart rules. Changing the value of a constant will update every chart 

element that references that constant. For example, you can define a conditional 

format that sets the color of a box based upon whether an employee was hired 

before or after a specific date. If you reference a constant called “cutoff date” in the 

conditional format, you can now easily visualize the impact of changing the “cutoff 

date” to different values. 


Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

Multiple Charts per Project and Matrix Reporting 

Directories 

OrgPlus projects can now contain multiple charts – similar to the Microsoft Excel 

workbook and worksheet concept. Each chart within a project can show a unique 

view that displays different data fields, contains different formatting, and may even 

contain a different hierarchy. For example, in an organization that uses matrix 

reporting, each chart within a project may contain a different project team with its 

own unique hierarchy. 

Directories provide a tabular list of information for a selected box and its 

descendants. Clicking a box in the chart displays a directory. Conversely, selecting 

an entry in a directory locates the corresponding box in the chart. You can use the 

directory to send an email or you can update data in the directory (in the same way 

that you edit data in a spreadsheet). 



Profiles 

The Profile View is a great place to show additional information about a box without 

cluttering the organizational chart, for example, an employee photo or additional 

contact information such as mobile phone or pager numbers can be shown in a 

profile. 

Find by Photo and Photo Manager 

The Find by Photo feature enables 

you to find any employee by 

browsing photo thumbnails. 

Selecting a photo displays the 

corresponding box in the chart. 

Photo Manager intelligently 

inserts photos into chart boxes. 

With Photo Manager, the process 

of managing photos in a chart is 

almost effortless. 


Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

XML Support 

Developers can generate XML files that can be loaded directly into OrgViewer. Please 

contact op.support@orgplus.com for a detailed specification. 

Publishing to and Integration with Microsoft Office 

OrgPlus is the only organizational charting program that works seamlessly with 

Microsoft products, such as PowerPoint and Word. Charts can also be embedded in 

Microsoft products. Embedded charts can be edited via a double click and/or set to 

automatically update whenever the underlying chart is updated in OrgPlus. 

Microsoft Office Toolbar 

You can create OrgPlus charts in Microsoft Office applications (Word, Excel, 

PowerPoint and Visio). The OrgPlus toolbar in Microsoft Office applications enables 

you to create and edit charts directly in Office documents. 

Automation 

You can set the Import and Publish processes to run automatically according to a 

schedule. For example, you can automatically refresh the data every Friday and 

publish updated charts to established locations on Monday morning. 



Web Integration 

Posting your charts to the web, your corporate intranet or a shared network drive 

helps to reduce the involvement of your IT department. 

Once posted, your 

charts become a 

company-wide 

information source that 

connects every 

employee. Anyone with 

network or intranet 

access rights can easily 

view, search and print 

published charts using 

OrgPlus Plug-in. If you 

prefer, you can publish 

your charts directly to 

HTML. 

Localization 

508 Compliance 

OrgPlus is Unicode enabled; data from almost any language can be imported into 

OrgPlus. 

OrgPlus desktop products are 508 compliant (U.S. Government standard for 

designing software to meet the needs of people with disabilities). 

OrgPlus Enterprise Integration 

The automation features of OrgPlus and Push Data functionality make it easy push 

charts to OrgPlus Enterprise. See Chapter 11, Automation for more details. 


Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

OrgPlus 7 Highlights 

Microsoft Vista and Office 2007 Compatibility 

Add Comments 

OrgPlus 7 is fully compatible with Microsoft’s latest operating 

system, Vista, and Microsoft Office 2007. In fact, OrgPlus 7 

has earned the Certified for Windows Vista logo. The 

Certified for Windows Vista logo is a compatibility designation 

for applications and devices that have passed a rigorous 

testing program on computers running Windows Vista. 

Annotate your organization charts with comments. Comments are useful when 

collaborating with other OrgPlus users. OrgPlus 7 Reader also supports viewing of 

comments. 

Enhanced HTML Publishing 

OrgPlus 7 HTML publishing has been significantly improved. Now with more 

sophisticated toolbars and panels, sharing your organization charts on the web is 

easier than ever. HTML publishing includes better printing quality and even 

optionally allows users to download an OrgPlus project file directly from any HTML 

page. 

OrgPlus 7 Highlights 1-21


Tree Panel 

The new tree panel is a fast and easy way to change your organizational structure or 

edit chart data. Quickly add, delete, and edit records. Move records across 

departments with ease. 

Automatic E-mail Distribution 

OrgPlus 7 can automatically email up-to-date published organization charts (PDF, 

PowerPoint and Word) to a designated list of email recipients on a scheduled basis or 

at the push of a button. Define different distribution lists per organization chart file, 

and keep everyone up to date on the latest organization structure additions, 

changes, and open positions. 

1-22 OrgPlus 7 Highlights

Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

Improved Profiles 

You can now edit data directly in profiles. You can also navigate from box to box 

using next and previous buttons. In addition, you can apply conditional formats to 

fields within profiles to highlight or hide fields as necessary. Conditional formatting in 

profiles allows you to dynamically format your data to bring attention to certain 

employee information based on specific conditions. For example, a significantly 

improved rating can be indicated by a gold star. 

Composite Profiles 

Combine multiple profile views into a single, multi-tab profile view to provide 

detailed information about any box. You can also conditionally show or hide any 

individual profile tabs based on the selected box. For example, show benefits detail 

only for permanent employees. 

Enhanced Chart Printing 

OrgPlus 7 printing is better than ever. You now have more control over how master 

page elements are scaled when printing charts. Make logos and titles the perfect size 

no matter how much your chart is scaled up or down to fit on a page. Use rulers to 

save formatting time when outputting to large format printers and plotters. 

Improved Templates and Sample Charts 

OrgPlus 7 contains new sample charts and chart templates to help you create 

professional looking charts quickly and easily. 



Off-page References 

You can now include hyperlinks in your chart that allow you to navigate from any 

box to another box, sub-chart, chart tab or even to an entirely separate OrgPlus 

project file. 

Sub-chart Arrow Labels 

You can label sub-chart arrows with names or numbers to make navigation easier 

and improve the value of printed and published charts. 

Improved Duplicate Reporting Management 

You can now include a list of alternate (matrix or dotted-line) managers directly in 

chart boxes. In addition, OrgPlus 7 also allows you to easily navigate directly to a 

specific occurrence of an employee that appears multiple times in a chart. 

Improved Conditional Formats 

With OrgPlus 7 you can define conditional formatting at a more granular level. For 

example, you can base the box border style on one condition and the border color on 

another condition. 

Automatic Legends 

OrgPlus 7 can now automatically create legends from any sub-set of defined 

conditional formats. 


Introduction 

CHAPTER 1 

Improved Picture Formatting 

OrgPlus 7 gives you more control over picture scaling and even allows you to add 

borders and shadows to pictures in chart boxes. 

Improved Hotspots 

Rulers and Grids 

OrgPlus 7 improves hotspot interaction. You can edit the data directly in a hotspot. 

You can also configure a hotspot for an entire box or for just a field in the box. 

You can turn on the rulers and grid display to more accurately place free-floating 

objects such as pictures, shapes, and text in your chart. Rulers allow you to more 

accurately position chart elements for printed output especially to large format 

printers and plotters. 

Improved Orphan Handling 

Enhanced Groups 

OrgPlus 7 makes handling orphan records (records that have no or missing reporting 

relationship), easier than ever. Simply drag your orphan records into the chart and 

OrgPlus maintains their positioning. 

OrgPlus 7 now supports creating groups based off of formula calculations. For 

example, create a group of all managers with 5 or more direct subordinates. 

Improved Formatting for Number Fields 

You now have greater control over the formatting of number fields with the ability to 

specify any number of leading zeros. 

Word Wrap Enhancements 

Shared Conditions 

OrgPlus now gives you more control over text wrapping and truncation 

Define conditions once and use them in conditional formats, chart rules, groups and 

profiles. 



Group Peers 

You can group peers automatically during data import. For example, peers can be 

grouped by title, job code or location. 


Chapter 2 

Installation and Registration 



System Requirements page 2-2 

Standard vs. Professional page 2-3 

OrgPlus Express page 2-3 

Installation page 2-3 

Installation Options page 2-5 

Starting OrgPlus page 2-11 

Customer Support page 2-13 

Overview 

This chapter covers installing, registering, and starting OrgPlus. 

If you did not download OrgPlus, your package should contain: 

• OrgPlus CD 

• OrgPlus User Guide (this book) 

• Product Registration Card 

2-1


System Requirements 

Your system must meet the following requirements for OrgPlus to operate properly. 

Processor: 

• A modern processor (at least 500MHz) 

Minimum Memory: 

• For Windows 2000/XP: 256MB 

• For Windows Vista: 512MB (1GB recommended) 

Minimum Hard Disk Space: 

• 80MB of free disk space 

CD-ROM or DVD Drive: 

• Required to install from CD-ROM 

Operating System: 

• Windows 2000 (SP4) 

• Windows XP (SP2) 

• Windows Vista 

Environment: 

• Administrator rights required to install OrgPlus 

• Internet connection recommended for product activation 

Minimum Graphics Requirements: 

• 1024X768 resolution (1280 x 1024 recommended) 

Microsoft Office: 

• Office 2000 (SP3) 

• Office XP (SP3) 

• Office 2003 (SP2) 

• Office 2007 

Internet Browser: 

• Internet Explorer 6 

• Internet Explorer 7 

2-2 System Requirements


CHAPTER 2 

Standard vs. Professional 

OrgPlus Professional includes features that are not available in OrgPlus Standard. 

The following functions are available only with an OrgPlus Professional license: 

• Import: The ability to import data from external files or databases. 

• Publish: The ability to publish charts to other formats including PDF, 

PowerPoint, Word, HTML, and OrgPlus Plug-in. 

• Automation: The ability to schedule data refresh and chart publishing to 

automate chart distribution. 

The maximum number of records that can be imported into OrgPlus is determined by 

the license purchased. 


OrgPlus Express is intended for users who need to create single page charts within 

Microsoft Office applications (Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Visio). OrgPlus Express is 

the clear choice for users dissatisfied with the limited organizational charting 

capabilities that Microsoft Office applications offer. 

OrgPlus Express can be used only from within Microsoft Office applications and has a 

limited set of features. Users who have more sophisticated charting needs or who 

need to create larger charts should consider OrgPlus Standard or Professional. 

Installation 

In order to use OrgPlus you must install it on your hard disk. You cannot run OrgPlus 

directly from your original OrgPlus CD. You can copy the OrgPlus setup file to a 

network drive, if you intend to install on multiple computers. 

After installing OrgPlus, you must register and unlock the application before you can 

start using it. 

Standard vs. Professional 2-3


➣ To install OrgPlus from the CD: 

1 Insert the OrgPlus CD into your CD-ROM drive. 

If the installation does not start automatically, click Run in the Windows Start 

menu and enter D:\OrgPlus\Setup (where D is the letter of your CD-ROM 

drive) and then press the Enter key to display the OrgPlus Setup dialog box. 

2 Click Next and follow the instructions displayed in each dialog box presented by 

the installer. Proceed through each step, then click Finish to complete the 

installation. 

You have now installed OrgPlus on your system. Store the original OrgPlus CD in a 

safe place in case you have to reinstall. 

➣ To install OrgPlus from a network: 

1 If you have an OrgPlus CD, copy the CD to a directory on your server. 

2 Navigate to the folder containing OrgPlus and double-click the setup.exe file. 

3 Follow the installation instructions described in the previous procedure. 

2-4 Installation


CHAPTER 2 

Installation Options 

By default, the OrgPlus installation process adds the OrgPlus Toolbar to your 

Microsoft Office applications—Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Visio—enabling you to create 

OrgPlus charts from within Microsoft Office applications. You can turn this feature off 

during installation by turning off the Enable OrgPlus Toolbar in MS Office 

Applications checkbox. 

Installation 2-5


Registration 

When you first launch OrgPlus, you will be prompted to register: 

If you purchased your copy of OrgPlus from HumanConcepts, proceed to the section, 

If you purchased OrgPlus directly from HumanConcepts on page 2-6. 

If you purchased your copy of OrgPlus from any other Vendor and have Internet 

connectivity, you are prompted to register online. Proceed to the section If you 

purchased OrgPlus from any other Vendor on page 2-8. 

If you do not have Internet connectivity, you can register by email, fax, or phone. 

For more information on these registration options, see Appendix E, Offline 

Registration. 

Registered users receive product update notifications and other important OrgPlus 

announcements. 

Frequently Asked Questions about Registration on page 2-10 provides solutions to 

problems you may experience while registering OrgPlus. 

If you purchased OrgPlus directly from HumanConcepts 

This section describes how to unlock OrgPlus using the Unlock Code that is included 

on the invoice sent to the email address you provided when you ordered OrgPlus. 

2-6 Registration


CHAPTER 2 

➣ To unlock OrgPlus: 

1 Double-click the OrgPlus icon on your desktop to display the 

Unlock/Register OrgPlus dialog box. 

2 Enter your Unlock Code in the Unlock/Product Code field. 

3 Enter your email address in the Email field. 

4 Click Next. If you entered the code correctly, you will be informed that you have 

successfully unlocked OrgPlus. Click Close to begin using OrgPlus. 

Note: If you do not enter the same email address entered at the time of 

purchase, you are prompted to enter registration information. You are also 

prompted to enter a password for your HumanConcepts account. 

Registration 2-7


If you purchased OrgPlus from any other Vendor 

This section describes the online registration process for OrgPlus when purchased 

from a vendor other than HumanConcepts. The Product Code is located on the 

Registration Information card. 

OrgPlus may not be able to access the Internet (for example, if you are behind a 

firewall). If this happens, see Appendix E, Offline Registration. 

➣ To register and unlock OrgPlus: 

1 Double-click the OrgPlus icon on your desktop to display the 

Unlock/Register OrgPlus dialog box. 

2-8 Registration


CHAPTER 2 

2 Enter your Product Code in the Unlock/Product Code field. 

3 Enter your email address in the Email field. 

4 Click Next. 

5 You are prompted to enter a password for your HumanConcepts account. Enter 

and confirm the password then click OK. 

6 Click Next. 

7 Enter the requested registration information and click Next after you complete 

each page. Fields marked with an asterisk * are required. 

8 After receiving your registration information, we will e-mail you an Unlock Code. 

After you receive the e-mail, click Close to display the Enter Your Unlock 

Code dialog box. 

9 Enter the Unlock Code (from the e-mail) and click Next. If you entered the code 

correctly, you will be informed that you have successfully unlocked OrgPlus. Click 

Close to begin using OrgPlus. 

Registration 2-9


Frequently Asked Questions about Registration 

• What is a Product Code or an Unlock Code? 

The Product Code tells HumanConcepts which version of the software you 

purchased. The Unlock Code is used to unlock the software for use. If you 

purchased directly from HumanConcepts, you do not need a Product Code. 

• Where is my Product Code? 

If you purchased directly from HumanConcepts, you do not have or need a 

Product Code. If you purchased from any other vendor, your Product Code is 

located on a sticker on the front of the Registration Information Card. 

• Where is my Unlock Code? 

When you purchase directly from HumanConcepts, your Unlock Code is noted on 

your invoice (a link to your invoice can be found in the order confirmation email). 

If you purchased OrgPlus through a third-party, the Unlock Code will be sent to 

you via email when you register OrgPlus. 

• I thought I already registered. Why don’t you have my information? 

Our registration system uses your email address to locate your information. If 

you have changed email addresses or you registered more than two years ago, 

you will need to re-register. 

• I received a message that I cannot connect to the OrgPlus server. 

The most common reason for this is due to a corporate firewall. You can register 

via email by selecting Register by email in the Registration Options dialog box. 

As a last resort you can contact support for assistance at 

www.orgplus.com/support/. 

• I faxed in my registration information. I haven’t had a response. 

Please allow 2 business days for responses to fax registration requests. 

• Our company procurement agent bought the software. I don’t have the 

Unlock Code or the Product Code. 

You need to obtain the Unlock Code from the individual whose email address was 

used during the ordering process. If your company purchased OrgPlus from a 

third-party dealer, the Product Code is located on the Registration Information 

Card. 

2-10 Registration


CHAPTER 2 

• My Unlock Code or Product Code doesn’t work. 

Please contact support for assistance at www.orgplus.com/support/. 

Starting OrgPlus 

➣ In this section… 

Launching OrgPlus page 2-11 

Learning OrgPlus page 2-11 

OrgPlus Help page 2-12 

Launching OrgPlus 

➣ To start OrgPlus and begin working on a chart: 

• Select All Programs | HumanConcepts | OrgPlus 7 from the windows Start 

menu. 

Or 

Double-click the OrgPlus icon 

on your desktop. 

Learning OrgPlus 

We recommend the following approach: 

• Go through Chapter 3, Tutorials. Each tutorial takes about 20 minutes. 

• Use Appendix A, Window Structure and Command Reference, to familiarize 

yourself with the OrgPlus menus and toolbars. 

• Look at some of the sample charts by selecting Welcome to OrgPlus from the 

Help menu. 

• Start making charts! For more information see Chapter 4, Working with Charts: 

Basic Charting. 

• Use the online resource center at www.orgplus.com/support/. 

Starting OrgPlus 2-11


OrgPlus Help 

Use the Help menu to access the following help options: 

Help Menu Item 

Index 

Keyboard 

Commands 

Using Help 

Welcome to OrgPlus 

Resource Center 

OrgPlus Guided Tour 

OrgPlus Tutorials 

Upgrade Your 

OrgPlus 


Hosted Support 

System Info 


Description 

Display the Help Index. (F1) 

Display a list of hot keys and their functions. 

Display information about menu commands and toolbar 

buttons. 

Display instructions for using the Help system. 

Display the Welcome panel, which provides access to 

sample files and useful links for first time users. 

Display online documentation to help with evaluation, 

installation, training, and support. 

Display an online guided tour. 

Display online tutorials. 

Access the online store. 

Access online technical support. 

Display information about your computer system. This 

information helps us provide you with technical support. 

Display information about which version of OrgPlus you 

are using. 

2-12 Starting OrgPlus


CHAPTER 2 

Customer Support 


Technical Support Checklist page 2-13 

Electronic Support page 2-14 

Standard 90-Day Technical Support from HumanConcepts page 2-14 

Online Store page 2-15 

Technical Support Checklist 

For the fastest response to your technical questions, complete the following checklist 

before you contact HumanConcepts Technical Support: 

• Before calling, please check the User Guide. 

• Be ready to tell the technician what you’ve tried. Record the exact sequence of 

events that created the problem. Make sure that you can reproduce the problem 

by following the same series of steps. Know the results of any steps you have 

undertaken to solve the problem. 

• Record the exact wording of any error messages. 

• Be sure to give your name and return email address or fax number if you prefer 

a reply via email or fax. 

• If you are phoning, make sure you have access to your computer. 

• Be ready to supply the product name and version. (Select About OrgPlus from 

the Help menu.) 

• Be ready to supply the system information. (Select System Info from the Help 

menu.) 

Customer Support 2-13


Electronic Support 

Electronic support is available 24 hours a day, free of charge, on the 

HumanConcepts Web site. You can access the Web site in the following ways: 

• From the OrgPlus main window: Select OrgPlus Online Support from the Help 

menu. 

• Via the Web browser at: www.orgplus.com/support/. 

Links to a variety of self-service tools and product support options are offered to 

assist you with OrgPlus, including: 

• Frequently Asked Questions 

• Product Support Forums 

• Knowledge Base 

• Software Installation Instructions 

• Quick Start Guide 

• On-line Registration 

• Customer Support 

Standard 90-Day Technical Support from HumanConcepts 

You can obtain no-charge technical support in North America for 90 days after 

purchase via a phone call. If you are located outside the North America please visit 

our Web site for country-specific contact information. 

Technical Support hours are from 8:30 a.m. to 8:30 p.m. Eastern Time, Monday 

through Friday, excluding holidays. 

All calls after the 90-day period are on a pay basis. A variety of support plans are 

available. 

Service Via 

World Wide Web 

Mailing Address 

Address/number 

www.orgplus.com/support/ 

HumanConcepts 

3 Harbor Drive, Suite 200 

Sausalito, CA 94965 USA 

Phone Number 1-415–332-3030 

Fax Number 1-415–332-1010 

2-14 Customer Support


CHAPTER 2 

Online Store 

Our online store is open 24 hours a day/7 days a week. You can contact our sales 

team from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Pacific Time (GMT – 8.00), Monday through Friday, 

excluding holidays. 

Service Via 

Address/number 

Sales 1-415–332-3030 

(Please call this number for pricing, product information or 

replacement disks.) 

Sales Inquiries 

Online Store 

General Information 

sales@orgplus.com 

store.orgplus.com 

www.orgplus.com 

Customer Support 2-15


2-16 Customer Support

Chapter 3 

Tutorials 



Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts page 3-2 

Tutorial 2: Formatting and Printing Charts page 3-9 

Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles page 3-16 

Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts page 3-27 

Tutorial 5: Creating Charts from External Data page 3-31 

Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts page 3-38 

3-1


Overview 

This chapter provides step-by-step tutorials that show you how to create charts, 

starting with a very basic chart and then building up to the more complex charts. 

Three versions of the desktop product are available: 

• OrgPlus Express 

• OrgPlus Standard 

• OrgPlus Professional 

Tutorials 1 and 2 are intended for use with all OrgPlus desktop products. Tutorials 3 

and 4 are for use only with OrgPlus Standard and Professional. Tutorials 5 and 6 

show you how to use the more advanced features of OrgPlus that are available only 

in OrgPlus Professional. 

General Note: 

For ease of explanation, the procedure steps are numbered consecutively within 

each tutorial, continuing to increment from procedure to procedure. 

Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts 

In this tutorial you will learn how to create a chart. 

➣ In this tutorial… 

Creating New Charts page 3-2 

Entering Field Information page 3-4 

Adding and Deleting Boxes page 3-5 

Changing Branch Styles page 3-7 

Saving your Work page 3-8 

Tip: You can press the key at any time for application help. 

Creating New Charts 

Charts can be created directly in OrgPlus or from within Microsoft Office products 

(Word, Visio, Excel and PowerPoint). OrgPlus Express users can create charts ONLY 

from within Microsoft Office products. If you are an OrgPlus Express user or you 

want to create charts within an Microsoft Office application please start this tutorial 

with step 4 on page 3-3. 

3-2 Overview

Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

1 If OrgPlus is not already running, double-click the OrgPlus 7 icon on your 

desktop or from the Windows Start menu select: 

All Programs | HumanConcepts | OrgPlus 7 

2 Select New from the File menu to display the New Project dialog box. 

3 Select Blank from the list of templates and click OK. You can also try selecting 

one of the other chart templates. 

The OrgPlus main window displays a blank chart. 

Continue with step 6 in the section Entering Field Information on page 3-4. 

4 Alternately, to create a chart in a Microsoft Office application, launch Microsoft 

Word (or any other Microsoft Office application) and click the New Chart icon 

on the toolbar. 

Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts 3-3


The Microsoft Office application (in this tutorial – Microsoft Word) opens and 

displays a new chart. 

Note: In Microsoft Office 2003 and earlier, the OrgPlus toolbar appears 

automatically if you selected that option at installation. To display the OrgPlus 

toolbar icons in Microsoft Office 2007, select the Add-Ins Tab. 

5 Double-click the chart to edit it in OrgPlus. 

Entering Field Information 

When you start a new project in OrgPlus, a single box appears on the screen. You 

will now enter some information into it. 

6 Click the Select tool . 

7 Select the topmost box. 

8 Click the box again to edit the contents. Click if it is not already 

highlighted and type Chris Phillips. 

 

3-4 Tutorial 1: Creating Basic Charts

Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

9 Click and type President and CEO. 

 

Tip: Use the key to advance to the next field. 

Adding and Deleting Boxes 

To add boxes to your chart, select the type of box you want to add from the Insert 

toolbar (on the left), then click any existing box. There are five types of boxes: 

Subordinate 

Left Co-Worker 

Right Co-Worker 

Manager 

Assistant 

Adding Assistants 

10 Select the Assistant tool , then select the box containing Chris Philips to add 

an assistant. 



Adding Subordinates 

11 Select the Subordinate tool and select the box containing Chris Philips to 

add a subordinate. 


13 Select the box you just created. 

14 Click the box again to edit the contents. Click if it is not already 

highlighted and type Lynn Brewer. 

15 Click and type CFO. 

16 Select the Right co-worker tool , and then click four times on the box 

containing Lynn Brewer. Four co-worker boxes are added. 

Tips: 

• The Left co-worker tool adds boxes to the left of the selected box. 

• The Manager tool creates a Manager box directly above the selected box. 

Deleting Boxes 



Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

18 Select one of the subordinate boxes that you just created. 

19 Press to delete the selected box.. 

Adding More Boxes 

20 Add subordinates using the Subordinate tool , as shown in the following 

diagram. 

Changing Branch Styles 

You may want to change the branch style for aesthetic or space reasons. OrgPlus 

offers a large variety of branch styles, which can be applied to any branch in your 

chart or the entire chart. 

21 Make sure the Select tool is selected. 

22 Select Lynn Brewer’s subordinates by double-clicking on one of the boxes 

containing Lynn’s subordinates. 

23 Click the Styles button at the bottom of the window. 



24 Select (one column vertical style). 

The boxes under Lynn Brewer are reformatted as shown below: 

Select other sets of subordinates by double clicking them and then change their 

styles to match the diagram below. 

Remember to use the Styles button 

subordinates has been selected. 

to change the style once a set of 

25 Optionally you can enter the names and titles as shown above. 

Saving your Work 

You should save your work periodically. 

26 Select Save from the File menu. 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

If your chart is embedded in a Microsoft Office document, click the Save 

at the top of the Microsoft Office application. 

icon 

If you have never saved the current chart before, a Save As dialog box appears. 

Enter a file name and click Save. 

Congratulations! You have completed Tutorial 1. 

Tutorial 2: Formatting and Printing Charts 

In this tutorial, you will learn how to create the following chart. To create this chart 

you will have to define an additional field (beyond name and title) and you will also 

need to use box and chart formatting options. 


Opening Existing Chart page 3-10 

Formatting Boxes page 3-10 

Adding Fields page 3-12 

Displaying Fields page 3-13 

Adding Chart Titles page 3-15 

Printing Charts page 3-15 

Tutorial 2: Formatting and Printing Charts 3-9


Opening Existing Chart 

To save time open an existing unformatted chart. 

Charts can be edited directly in OrgPlus or from within Microsoft Office products 

(Word, Visio, Excel, and PowerPoint). 

1 Select Open from the File menu to display the Open dialog box. 

2 Select the file Tutorial2.opx and then click Open. 

Note: If you do not see the My Charts directory, click the My Documents icon 

on the left side of the dialog box and then double-click the My Charts folder. 

Continue with step 3 in the section Formatting Boxes on page 3-10. 

Formatting Boxes 

You can format any box in a chart. 

3 Using the Select tool, select the box containing Chris Philips. 

4 Select Box Properties from the Format menu. 

3-10 Tutorial 2: Formatting and Printing Charts

Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

5 Make sure the Color and Lines tab is selected. Select the Fill Color and 

Border Style shown below, and then click OK. 

6 Select the executive team by double-clicking on any of the Level 2 boxes. 




8 Make sure the Color and Lines tab is selected. Select the Box Shape, Color 

and Border style as shown below, and then click OK. 

9 Now, try to set the format for Corinne Spear to match the format shown below. 

Adding Fields 

You can add additional fields to your charts at any time. In this exercise you will add 

an Org Unit field. 

10 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu. 

11 Click Add to add a new field. 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

12 Type Org Unit. 

13 Click OK. You will be prompted to add the new field to all boxes. 

14 Click No. You want to only display the new field in the boxes representing the 

executive team. 

Displaying Fields 

In order to show the Org Unit field in the executive team’s boxes, you will use the 

Layout tab in the Box Properties dialog box. 

15 Select the executive team by double-clicking on any of the Level 2 boxes. 



16 Click the Box Layout tool or select Box Properties from the Format menu 

and then select the Box Layout tab. 

17 Drag the Org Unit field to just below the Title field. Wait until you see the 

symbol before releasing the mouse button. 

 

Note: If you want to remove a field from a box, drag the field out of the box 

(shown in the Box Layout tab) and back into the field list. 

18 Select the Line tool . 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

19 Position the cursor between the Title and Org Unit rows. The cursor changes to 

a symbol. Click to place the line. 

 

20 Click OK. Notice that the Org Unit field is added to the selected boxes. 

21 Type the Org Unit field in each box as follows: 

Adding Chart Titles 

Each chart contains a Title area. 

22 Highlight the chart title, Tutorial 2. 

23 Use the Text toolbar to set font, font size, font style, and font color. Select the 

settings shown below. 

Printing Charts 

You must have a configured local or network printer in order to perform this step. 

24 Select Print from the File menu to display the Print dialog box. 

25 Click OK to print. 

Note: OrgPlus Express users can only print from within Microsoft Office 

applications. 




Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles 

In this tutorial you will learn how to create and use directories, reports and profiles. 


Opening Charts page 3-16 

Working with Directories page 3-16 

Working with Reports page 3-20 

Working with Profiles page 3-23 

Opening Charts 

To save time you will open an existing chart. 

1 Select Open from the File menu. 

2 Select the file Tutorial3.opx, and click Open. 



Working with Directories 

First you have to create a directory. 

3 Select Directory from the View menu. 

4 Click the link Click here to create a Directory to display the Directory Settings 

dialog box. 

3-16 Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles

Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

Note: For this tutorial you are going to use the default Directory formatting. 

5 Type Contact Info into the Directory name field. 

Tutorial 3: Using Directories, Reports and Profiles 3-17


6 By default OrgPlus includes all fields when you create a new directory. In this 

exercise you are going to create a directory that does not include salary and 

employee type information. Select Salary and click Remove. Then select 

Employee Type and click Remove. 

7 Click OK. 

Displaying Directories 

You can use a directory to display chart information in a tabular format. 


9 Select the box containing Chris Philips. 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

The Directory panel displays a directory containing Chris Philips and all his 

subordinates. Click other boxes in the chart to dynamically update the directory. 

Editing Chart Contents using the Directory 

You can edit chart data using the directory. 

10 Select the box containing Chris Philips. Notice that the corresponding directory 

entry is also selected. 

 



11 Now locate the row in the directory containing Sue Watkins. Click the cell 

containing Sue Watkins, and type Tom Wilson. 

 

Notice that the corresponding box in the chart is also changed. 

Working with Reports 

The following exercises will show you how to create reports. 

12 Select Reports from the View menu. 

13 Click the link Click here to create a Report to display the Report Settings dialog 

box. 

14 Type Salary Report into the Report name field. 

15 Select Name and click the Add button. 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

16 Select Title and click the Add button. 

17 Select Salary and click the Add button. 

18 Select the Report Summary tab and then select the Salary checkbox. This will 

add a salary total to your report. 



19 Click OK. 

Displaying Reports 

You can now create a dynamic report based by selecting boxes. 

20 Select the box containing Becci Seuberling. The Salary Report for Becci's team 

appears in the Reports panel. Click other boxes in the chart to see other 

dynamic reports. 

Exporting Report Data 

You can export a report to a spreadsheet. 

21 Select the box containing Becci Seuberling, then click the Export to Excel 

button . 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

OrgPlus creates an Excel spreadsheet containing the report information. 

Working with Profiles 

The following exercises show you how to create and display a profile. 

22 Select Profile from the View menu. 



23 Click the link Click here to create a Profile to display the Profile Settings dialog 

box. 

24 Type Employee Detail into the Profile Name field. 

25 Select Salary and click Remove. 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

26 Select Employee Type and click Remove. 

27 Click OK. 



Using Profiles 

This exercise shows how to display additional information about a selected box using 

the profile you just created. 

28 Select any box in the chart. Notice that the Profile panel displays employee 

detail for that box. 



Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts 

In this tutorial you will learn how to divide a large chart into sub-charts. 

As you can see from the following picture, sub-charts provide a mechanism that 

makes it easier to distribute and visualize large amounts of data. 



Creating Sub-charts page 3-28 

Navigating within Sub-charts page 3-29 

Inserting or Removing Sub-chart Breaks page 3-30 




2 Select the file Tutorial4.opx and click Open. 



Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts 3-27


Creating Sub-charts 

You will now divide the chart into sub-charts. 

3 Select Sub-chart | Create Sub-charts from the Insert menu to display the 

Create Sub-charts dialog box. 

4 Select Using Field and select Department from the drop-down list. 

5 Select From Field and select Department from the drop-down list. 

6 Click OK. 

OrgPlus displays the first page of the chart showing only the executive team. 

Notice the sub-chart navigation arrows at the bottom of each second-level box. 

3-28 Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts

Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

Navigating within Sub-charts 

You can navigate within the sub-charts using sub-chart navigation arrows or the 

Sub-charts panel. 

7 Navigate up or down your chart hierarchy by clicking on any sub-chart arrow ( 

or ). 

Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts 3-29


8 Select Sub-charts from the View menu to display the Sub-charts panel. Click 

any entry in the Sub-charts panel to display the corresponding sub-chart. 

Inserting or Removing Sub-chart Breaks 

You can also insert or remove sub-charts manually. 

9 Select the Finance sub-chart from the Sub-charts panel. 

10 Select the box containing Aaron Lyon. 

3-30 Tutorial 4: Working with Sub-Charts

Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

11 Select Sub-chart | Insert Sub-chart Break from the Insert menu. Notice that 

Aaron Lyon's team now appears in a separate sub-chart. 

 

12 To remove the sub-chart break you just created, select the box containing Aaron 

Lyon. 

13 Select the Sub-chart | Remove Sub-chart Break menu Insert. Notice that 

Aaron Lyon’s team is now recombined with its parent sub-chart. 


Tutorial 5: Creating Charts from External Data 

In this tutorial, you will learn how to: 

• Build a new chart from data imported from an external source. In this tutorial 

you will use a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. 

• Apply a template to a chart to achieve a professional look. 

• Refresh (re-import) a chart data from an external data source. Refreshing allows 

you to keep a chart in sync with its underlying external data source. 

In this tutorial you will use the spreadsheet, Tutorial5.xls. 


Using the Import Wizard page 3-32 

Applying Templates page 3-36 

Saving Imported Charts page 3-37 

Refreshing Charts page 3-37 

Tutorial 5: Creating Charts from External Data 3-31


Using the Import Wizard 

In this exercise you will build a chart from imported data. 

1 Select Import Data from the File menu to display the Select Data Source 

dialog box. 

Note: If you do not see the My Charts directory, click the Human Concepts 

icon in the left margin, then select the Documents file folder then the 

My Documents icon. 

2 Select the Tutorial5.xls file and click Open. 

3-32 Tutorial 5: Creating Charts from External Data

Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

OrgPlus displays the Import Wizard – XLS Sheet Selection dialog. 

This dialog box allows you to select a worksheet within the Excel file (Sheet1, 

Sheet2, or Sheet3) and to specify whether the first row of data contains column 

names or data records. 



3 Click Next to display the Import Wizard - Data Settings dialog box. 

This dialog box enables you to define settings associated with each field in your 

import file. You can choose whether to include or exclude a field from your chart 

(gray columns are excluded). You can rename a field, or specify field settings 

such as whether a field represents a hyperlink. 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

4 Click Next to display the Import Wizard - Verify Hierarchy dialog box. 

This dialog box allows you to verify that your chart hierarchy will be created 

properly. 

In order to build a chart from imported data, OrgPlus requires two fields: a 

Position field, which uniquely identifies each box, and a Reports To field, which 

tells OrgPlus to whom the box reports. 

OrgPlus automatically identifies the fields to be used as Position and Reports 

To. However, you can use this window to verify that the correct fields have been 

chosen and that there are no errors in the source data. 

5 Click Finish to complete the data import. 

6 You will be prompted to sub-chart. Click No. 



OrgPlus displays the chart you have created: 

Applying Templates 

You can automatically format your chart using one of the included templates. 

7 If the templates panel is not displayed, select Templates from the View menu. 

8 Drag any design template into the chart. OrgPlus immediately applies the 

template formatting to the chart. 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

Saving Imported Charts 

You must save your chart after importing. 

9 Select Save from the File menu to display the Save As dialog box. 

10 Enter the file name myImportedChart then click Save. 

Refreshing Charts 

Any chart that was generated from an external data source using the Import wizard 

can be refreshed (re-imported) from the original source. 

Note: You will need Microsoft Excel installed on your computer to complete this 

exercise. 

11 Use Microsoft Excel to open Tutorial5.xls. The file is located in the My 

Document/My Charts folder. 

12 In this worksheet, delete the row containing Tina Nomura. (Click row 5, as 

indicated, and select Delete from the Edit Menu). 

13 Now save and close the spreadsheet. (Select Save from the File menu and then 

Close from the File menu.) 

14 In OrgPlus, select Refresh Data from the Data menu. You will be prompted to 

continue. Click Yes. 

15 When the refresh is complete, you will be prompted to view a log of the changes. 

Click No. 



A look at the newly refreshed chart confirms that the change was made. (The 

box containing Tina Nomura was removed from the chart.) 


Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts 

OrgPlus enables you to publish your chart to Microsoft PowerPoint, Microsoft Word, 

HTML, Adobe PDF, directly to a printer, or to our OrgPlus browser Plug-in. In this 

tutorial you will learn how to publish to OrgPlus Plug-in and PowerPoint. 



Publishing to the OrgPlus page 3-39 

Publishing to PowerPoint page 3-41 




2 Select the file Tutorial6.opx and click Open. 

3-38 Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts

Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 



Publishing to the OrgPlus Plug-in 

The OrgPlus Plug-in is a free browser Plug-in, which enables anyone with a network 

or intranet to easily view, search and print published charts. 

3 Select Publish To | OrgPlus Plug-in from the File menu. 

OrgPlus displays the Publish Option Page dialog box. 

In this exercise, the default options are not changed. You can try republishing 

with different options. 

Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts 3-39


4 Click Next on each page and click Finish on the last page. OrgPlus generates 

and opens the Plug-in file for viewing. 


Tutorials 

CHAPTER 3 

Publishing to PowerPoint 

OrgPlus is the only organizational charting program that works seamlessly with 

Microsoft products such as PowerPoint or Word. You can embed charts in Microsoft 

products and edit them by double-clicking. You can also configure them to update 

automatically whenever you update the underlying chart in OrgPlus. 

1 Select Publish To| PowerPoint from the File menu. 

OrgPlus displays the Publish Option Page dialog box. 

In this exercise, the options are not changed. You can try republishing with 

different options. 

Tutorial 6: Publishing Charts 3-41


2 Click Next on each page and then Finish on the last page. 



Chapter 4 

Working with Charts: Basic Charting 


Overview Page 4-1 

Opening Projects Page 4-2 

Creating Projects Page 4-2 

Saving and Closing Projects Page 4-4 

Adding and Deleting Boxes Page 4-6 

Selecting Objects Page 4-7 

Moving Objects Page 4-12 

Entering Field Information Page 4-15 

Defining and Displaying Fields Page 4-17 

Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures Page 4-35 

Formatting Charts Page 4-49 

Applying Chart Styles Page 4-53 

Quick Chart Panel Page 4-58 

Using Cut/Copy/Paste Page 4-65 

Printing Page 4-66 

Overview 

This chapter provides detailed descriptions of basic chart operations. After reviewing 

this chapter you will be able to create a new chart, open a chart, save a chart, select 

and move chart elements, and use cut, copy, and paste change your charts. 

Functionality is described in progressive steps. For example, you will learn how to 

add boxes to a chart, how to add and remove fields in those boxes, and how to 

format those boxes. 

4-1


Opening Projects 

This section describes how to open an existing project for viewing or editing. 

➣ To open an existing project: 


2 Choose a file and click Open to display its contents in an OrgPlus window. 

Opening Projects from Earlier Versions in OrgPlus 7 

OrgPlus 7 has backwards compatibility with earlier versions of OrgPlus. When you 

open a project saved in an earlier version, OrgPlus 7 automatically converts it to an 

OrgPlus 7 file. OrgPlus 7 saves files in versions 5, 6, or 7, but it open projects 

created with versions earlier than version 4. 

Creating Projects 

This section describes how to create a new project and begins with a brief overview 

of key concepts that you must understand in order to create a new project. This is 

followed by a detailed description of chart creation techniques. 


Understanding Projects, Charts, and Templates page 4-2 

Creating New Projects page 4-3 

Understanding Projects, Charts, and Templates 

The following is a brief overview of some of the concepts used in OrgPlus. 

About Projects and Charts 

An OrgPlus project contains one or more charts stored on disk as a single file. 

Multiple charts per project allow you to create different views of the same data. For 

example, one chart within a project could show the current structure of an 

organization while another chart could display the proposed structure of an 

organization. 

About Templates 

A template defines all the formatting parameters for a chart. Applying a template 

sets the formats for chart elements, such as boxes and lines. Using templates saves 

you the effort of formatting each individual chart element. Using templates in 

OrgPlus is similar to using templates in Microsoft PowerPoint or Word. 

4-2 Opening Projects


CHAPTER 4 

About the File Formats Used by OrgPlus 

The following file types are used by OrgPlus 7: 

Extension 

.opx 

.opxt 

.ovx 

Description 

OrgPlus 7 Project File 

OrgPlus 7 Template File 

OrgPlus 7 Plug-in (browser Plug-in file) 

The following file types can be opened in OrgPlus 7: 

Extension 

.opx 

.opxt 

.ovx 

Description 

OrgPlus 4/5/6 Project Files 

OrgPlus 5/6 Template Files 

OrgPlus 6 Plug-in Files 

Note: OrgPlus 7 files cannot be opened using an older version of OrgPlus. 

Creating New Projects 

When you create a new project, you can select a template or just create a blank 

project. 

➣ To create a new project: 

1 Select New from the File menu to display the New Project dialog box. 

2 Choose a template. The Preview pane of the dialog box displays an example of 

the selected template. 

Creating Projects 4-3


Note: Click the New from file… button to browse for OrgPlus files or templates 

that are not shown in the New Project dialog box. 

3 Click OK to create a new project using the selected template. 

Note: You can also click the Create Blank Project button 

project. 

to create a new 

Saving and Closing Projects 

This section describes how to save and close projects. 


Saving Your Work page 4-4 

Closing Projects page 4-6 

Saving Your Work 

You should periodically save your work. 

➣ To save changes: 

• At any time, select Save from the File menu. 

Note: If you have not previously saved the current chart, a Save As dialog 

box is displayed. Enter the file name and then click Save. 

4-4 Saving and Closing Projects


CHAPTER 4 

➣ To save a copy of your project: 

1 Select Save As from the File menu. The Save As dialog box is displayed. 

2 Navigate to the folder where you want to save your file. 

3 Enter the file name in the File Name field. 

4 Click Save. The file is saved. 

Note: You can save your chart in various file formats. Select Save As from the 

File menu and use the Save as type drop-down list. The following options are 

available: 

• OrgPlus 7 File 

• OrgPlus 7 Template File 





• OrgPlus XML 

• HTML Document 

• JPEG File 

• TIFF File 

• GIF File 

• PNG File 

• Windows Bitmap 

• Windows Metafile 

• Windows Enhanced Metafile 

Note: Saving an OrgPlus 7 file as an OrgPlus 6, OrgPlus 5, or XML file may 

result in loss of elements associated with new application features such as 

comments and e-mail categories. 

Note: You can save a sub-set of your project. Select Save As from the File 

menu and use the Save what drop-down list. Select from the following 

options: 

• Project (default): Saves the entire project. 

• Chart: Saves only the current chart, as identified by the Chart tab. 

• Sub-chart: Saves only the currently displayed sub-chart. 

• Selection: Saves only the selected elements from the currently 

displayed chart (for example, selected boxes). 

Saving and Closing Projects 4-5


Closing Projects 

This section describes how to close the current project. 

➣ To close projects: 

• Select Close from the File menu. If any changes were made to the project 

since it was last saved, you are prompted to save before closing. 

Adding and Deleting Boxes 

Boxes are the building blocks of a chart. OrgPlus automatically draws the connecting 

lines between boxes. 


Adding Boxes page 4-6 

Deleting Boxes page 4-7 

Adding Boxes 

Use one of the insert box tools to add boxes to your chart. 

➣ To add a new box: 

1 Choose one of the following insert box tools. 

Manager: Adds a manager above the selected box. 

Assistant: Adds an assistant below the selected box. 

Subordinate: Adds a subordinate below the selected box. 

Peer - Left Co-worker: Adds a co-worker to the left of the selected 

box. 

Peer - Right Co-worker: Adds a co-worker to the right of the selected 

box. 

2 Move the mouse pointer over the box to which the new box is to be attached. 

Notice that the mouse pointer changes to indicate how the new box will be 

attached. 

3 Click the box. 

4-6 Adding and Deleting Boxes


CHAPTER 4 

 

Deleting Boxes 

Note: You can add multiple boxes to a chart by clicking an insert box tool 

multiple times and then adding boxes as described above. 

You can delete unwanted boxes. 

➣ To delete a box: 


2 Move the mouse pointer over the box you want to delete. 

3 Click the box. 

4 Press . 

Selecting Objects 

This section describes how to select objects. You can select sets of objects or fields. 

You can apply changes to your selected set. For example, you can change the border 

style for all selected boxes. 


Selecting Boxes page 4-8 

Selecting Connecting Lines page 4-7 

Selecting All Objects of the Same Type page 4-9 

Selecting Fields page 4-9 

Selecting Levels page 4-10 

Selecting Objects 4-7


Selecting Boxes 

This section describes how to select boxes. You must select boxes before you can 

change their formatting or content. 

➣ To select boxes: 

• Click an individual box. Use the or keys to select multiple 

boxes. 

Or 

• Use Select, Select Fields, Select Levels, or Find from the Edit menu. 

Or 

• Use the mouse to drag a rectangle around all the boxes you want to select. 

Note: Right-click any box and choose Select Boxes with Similar Formatting from 

the context menu to quickly select all boxes on the page that have the same format. 

Selecting Connecting Lines 

OrgPlus automatically draws the connecting lines between boxes. You can select 

connecting lines in order to apply formatting, or to hide or show lines between 

specific boxes. 

➣ To select connecting lines: 

• Click individual lines to select. Use the or keys to select 

multiple lines. 

Or 

• Select Select | All Connecting Lines from the Edit menu to select all 

connecting lines in the chart. 

Or 

• Select Select | All Hidden Connecting Lines from the Edit menu to select 

all hidden connecting lines in the chart. 

Or 

• Use the mouse to drag a rectangle around all the desired connecting lines. 

4-8 Selecting Objects


CHAPTER 4 

Selecting All Objects of the Same Type 

You can select the following sets of objects: 

• All: Selects all objects. 

• All Assistants: Selects all assistant boxes. 

• All Co-managers: Selects all boxes that share the same subordinates. 

• All Managers: Selects all boxes to which subordinate or assistant boxes are 

attached. 

• All Non-managers: Selects all non-manager boxes. 

• Direct Reports: Select the boxes at the level immediately below the selected 

box. 

• Peers: Selects the boxes at the same level as the selected position, which 

report to the same manager. 

• Branch: Selects all boxes that are descendants of the selected box, as well as 

that box. 

• Lowest Level: Selects all boxes that are on the lowest displayed level. 

• All Locked Boxes: Selects all boxes that are marked as locked. 

• All Hidden Boxes: Selects all boxes that are hidden. 

• All Connecting Lines: Select all connecting lines between boxes. 

• All Hidden Connecting Lines: Selects all the hidden connecting lines. 

• All Free Floating Objects: Selects all the free floating objects. 

• All Anchored Objects: Selects all the free floating objects that are anchored 

to boxes. 

• All Multi-record boxes: Select all boxes that are marked as multi-record 

boxes. 

➣ To select a set of objects: 

• Choose Select | from the Edit menu. 

Selecting Fields 

OrgPlus enables you to select boxes and fields. 

➣ To select fields in all boxes: 

1 Choose Select Fields from the Edit menu to display the Select Fields dialog box. 



2 Select by clicking the checkboxes to the left of the fields or use the Check All 

button to select all fields. 

3 Click OK to highlight the selected fields in the chart, as shown in the following 

example. Any formatting changes you make, such as font style or size, apply to 

the all the selected fields. 

➣ To select any field in the boxes: 

• Click the Select Field tool then select fields by clicking within boxes. 

Fields become highlighted as you select them. Use the or 

keys to make multiple selections. 

Selecting Levels 

You can select all the boxes on a level. 

➣ To select boxes on a level: 

1 Choose Select Levels from the Edit menu to display the Levels to Select dialog 

box. 

4-10 Selecting Objects


CHAPTER 4 

2 Select levels by selecting the checkbox to the left of each level or use the Check 

All button to select all levels. 

3 Click OK to select the boxes on the specified levels. In the following example, 

Level 2 is selected. 



Moving Objects 

This section describes the various methods of moving objects. 


Moving Boxes by Dragging and Dropping page 4-12 

Moving Free Objects by Dragging and Dropping page 4-13 

Free Dragging Boxes Page 4-13 

Moving Boxes by Dragging and Dropping 

You can drag selected boxes to new locations in the chart. When you move a box, all 

its descendant boxes and any associated anchored objects move with it. OrgPlus 

automatically reformats the chart. 

➣ To move chart boxes: 

1 Click the box you want to move and drag it over another box. 

2 As you drag the pointer over other boxes, the mouse pointer changes to indicate 

how the selected box will be moved 

• A Left arrow-head indicates that the box is to be placed on the left of the 

box you are over. 

• A Right arrow-head indicates that the box is to be placed on the right of the 

box you are over. 

• A Subordinate box (as shown in the example below) indicates that the box 

is to be placed below the box you are over. 

3 When you are satisfied with the position of the box release the mouse button. The 

box is placed in its new position. 

4-12 Moving Objects


CHAPTER 4 

The following example shows the changes to the chart when Lisa de Jong and 

her subordinate are moved to Tina Nomura's team. 

 

Moving Free Objects by Dragging and Dropping 

You can drag any free object to a new position in the chart. 

➣ To move free floating objects: 

1 Click the object you want to move and drag it to its new position. Release the 

mouse button. 

2 The object is moved to the new position. 

Free Dragging Boxes 

OrgPlus automatically positions chart boxes based on the selected branch style. 

From time to time, automatic positioning of chart boxes may not meet your charting 

requirements. The free form tool 

your chart. 

allows you to arbitrarily position boxes within 

Moving Objects 4-13


➣ To use the free form tool: 

1 Select the Free Form tool . 

2 Click and drag any chart box to a new location. 

To force a box to be horizontal or vertical constrained, hold down while 

dragging the box. 

3 To control a box’s connection to the chart, right-click a box and select an option 

from the Connect menu item: 

See examples of these options in the table below. 

Top: 

Left: 

Bottom: 

Right: 

4-14 Moving Objects


CHAPTER 4 

4 Optionally, you can flip the connecting lines. Right-click a box and select the Flip 

Connecting Lines menu item. 

Before Flip 

After Flip 

5 Make sure to click the Select tool to exit free form mode. 

Note: To return a box to its original position right-click that box and select Snap to 

Chart. 

Entering Field Information 

Once you have created a box, you must enter information into it. 

➣ To enter information into box fields: 

1 Choose the Select tool . 

2 Click a box to select it. 

3 Click a field (for example, Name or Title) and then type the information, as 

required. 

 

 

4 Press to advance to the next field. 

 

Entering Field Information 4-15


Optimizing Files 

You can optimize your chart files before sharing with other users. 

One easy way to share charts is with OrgPlus Reader. OrgPlus Reader is a free 

Windows application that enables you to view, search, and print charts generated 

with OrgPlus Standard, OrgPlus Professional, and OrgPlus Enterprise. 

➣ To optimize your chart: 

1 Select Save As from the File menu. 

2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save your file. 

3 Enter a file name in the File Name field. 

4 Click the Settings button to display the Save As Settings dialog box. 

5 Select from the following options: 

• Embed Referenced Pictures: This option embeds all referenced pictures 

into the saved file which allows you to share your chart with users that do 

not have access to your intranet or local computer hard drive. 

• Convert Formulas to Values: Converting formulas to values not only 

enhances performance but ensures that formula results are maintained even 

if you save only a sub-set of your chart (Save what drop-down list). 

• Exclude unused fields: This option reduces field size. 

• Remove reference to data source: This option removes any references to 

the data source used to import the data into your chart. 

6 Click Save. 

4-16 Entering Field Information


CHAPTER 4 

Defining and Displaying Fields 

This section describes how to define fields and display them in boxes. 


Adding and Deleting Fields page 4-17 

Displaying Fields in Boxes page 4-28 

Inserting Pictures into Boxes page 4-30 

Modifying Box Layout page 4-31 

Adding and Deleting Fields 

This section describes how to define and delete fields. 

A box can contain any number of fields. A field represents information, such as name 

title, phone number, and so on. 


Adding Fields page 4-17 

Defining Field Properties page 4-19 

Adding Predefined Fields page 4-23 

Deleting Fields page 4-24 

Handling Duplicate Records Page 4-24 

Mapped Fields Page 4-27 

Adding Fields 

This section describes how to add fields. 

➣ To add fields: 


OrgPlus displays the Define Fields dialog box. 

Defining and Displaying Fields 4-17


2 Click Add to add a field. 

3 Enter a name in the new empty field in the Name column. 

4 Click the Type column to display and choose from a drop-down list of field types: 

• Text 

• Date 

• Picture 

4-18 Defining and Displaying Fields


CHAPTER 4 

• Number 

• Formula 

5 If the field type is Text, Number, or Formula, you can also specify a Category. 

Click the Category column to display and choose from a drop-down list of 

categories. 

• For fields of type Text, select the applicable category, such as Title, 

Person’s Name, Zip Code, and so on. 

• For fields of type Number or Formula, select the applicable category, such 

as Number, Money, or Percentage. 

6 Select Hyperlinked if you want the field to be a hyperlink. For example, an e-mail 

address or web page. 

7 Click the Format button to specify how a field is displayed. Not all field 

types have formatting options. 

8 Click the Formula button to define a formula for a field. 

9 Click OK. OrgPlus asks if you want to apply the newly created field(s) to all chart 

boxes. Click Yes to add. If you click No you can then selectively add fields later. 

Defining Field Properties 

OrgPlus offers a number of options for formatting fields. 

➣ To format Name fields: 



2 Select the name field that you want to format and then click the Format button 

. 



OrgPlus displays the Name Formats dialog box. 

3 Choose a format and click OK. 

➣ To format Number fields: 

1 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu to 

display the Define Fields dialog box. 

2 Select the number field that you want to format and click the Format button 

. OrgPlus displays a dialog box based on the Category of the field 

(Number, Percentage, or Money). 



CHAPTER 4 

3 Define the format from the following options: 

• Decimal Separator: Select the character to be used to represent the 

decimal point. 

• Decimal Digits: Specify the number of digits to be shown to the right of the 

decimal point. 

• Thousand: Specify the number of digits that are delimited between each 

thousands separator. 

• Thousand Separator: Specify the character to be used as a thousand’s 

separator. 

• Negative Order: Specify the format of negative numbers. 

• Trailing Zero: Specify the number of zeros to the right of the decimal point. 

• Custom Format: Select a number of leading zeros from the drop-down list. 

• Zero before decimal: Place a zero before a fractional amount (0.01 vs 

.01). 

• Positive Order: Select how to format currency amounts ($1.1 or $1,1 or 

1.1 $ or 1.1$). (This option is available only when the Money category is 

selected.) 

• Money Symbol: Select a currency symbol (for example, "$"). (This option is 

available only when the Money category is selected.) 

4 Click OK to save your settings. 

➣ To format Date fields: 





2 Select the field that you want to format and click the Format button to 

display the Date Format dialog box. 

3 Choose a format and click OK. 

➣ To format E-mail fields: 



2 Select an E-mail field and click the Format button to display the E-mail 

Format dialog box. 

3 Select from the drop-down list to specify the primary e-mail address. 

4 Click OK. 



CHAPTER 4 

Note: You must apply the E-mail category to the e-mail field to use the E-mail 

Group feature. See Using Groups for E-mail Distribution in Chapter 5. You can define 

more than one e-mail field, and designate a specific e-mail field as the primary one 

used for E-mail Distribution, E-mail Group, etc. 

Adding Predefined Fields 

Predefined fields make adding new fields to your chart a one step process. When you 

add a predefined field, all parameters (Type, Format, Category, and so on) are 

automatically configured. 

➣ To add Predefined fields: 



2 Click Predefined to display the Select Fields dialog box. 

3 Choose a field and click Add. Repeat this step to add additional fields. 

4 Click Close. 

5 Click OK. OrgPlus asks if you want to add the new field(s) to all chart boxes. 

6 Click Yes to add, or click No if you want to selectively add fields later. 



Deleting Fields 

You can delete any field. Deleting a field removes the field from any boxes in which 

it is displayed. 

➣ To delete fields: 



2 Select the field that you want to delete. 

3 Click Delete. A warning message asks you to confirm that you want to 

permanently delete the field. Click Yes to delete or No to cancel the action. 

Handling Duplicate Records 

Your organizational charts may contain people who report to more than one 

manager. An employee reporting to more than one manager typically has a dotted 

line reporting relationship to the secondary manager. The chart below contains an 

employee who appears in more than one box in an organizational chart: 

Note: Any person who appears more than once in your organizational chart has an 

icon in lower right corner of their box. Click this icon to navigate to the next 

occurrence of that person. 

➣ To identify dotted line reports in your chart 

1 Select the Duplicates… button in the Define Fields dialog box to display the 

Identify Duplicates dialog box. 



CHAPTER 4 

2 Click the Identify duplicate records checkbox. 

3 Use the Key drop-down menu to select the key field for identifying your duplicate 

records. 

4 Select the Automatically Update checkbox if you want the icon in chart boxes 

when manual edits are made to a chart. 

5 Select the Show Alternate Managers checkbox to show information about 

alternate managers. Alternate manager information can be shown using one of two 

methods. 

▪ As Callout – Displays the duplicates icon in charts. When you click the 

icon, a callout displays the alternate managers to whom the employee 

reports. 

▪ 

As part of box – Displays the alternate manager information inside the box. 



6 If alternate manager information is shown, you can specify which fields are 

displayed using the Field 1 and Field 2 drop-down lists. 

7 If you are displaying alternate manager information inside the box, use the 

Format... button to specify the formatting of in-box text. 

8 Click OK. 



CHAPTER 4 

Mapped Fields 

This section explains how to create mapped fields. 

You can use mapped fields to map field values to pictures. For example: 

Value Maps to Result 

US 

France 

Germany 

\symbols\us_flag.png 

\symbols\fr_flag.png 

\symbols\de_flag.png 

In fact, OrgPlus includes a directory of images that you can include in your charts. 

The image directory is located in the Symbols folder in your My Charts directory. 

The My Charts directory is located in your My Documents folder. 

➣ To create a mapped field 

1 Select the Add Mapped Field… button in the Define Fields dialog box. 

2 Name the field and specify its Type and Category. 

3 Click the Options button to display the Mapping dialog box. 

4 Click the Map Using: drop-down list to select the field you are mapping. 



5 Click the Add button to define each mapping pair. For example, you can map US 

to Flag_USA and CA to Flag_Canada. Use the Delete button to delete mapping 

pairs. 

6 Use the Default checkbox to specify the default mapping. The default mapping is 

used if a matching value cannot be found. 

7 Click OK. 

Note: You can import a list of mapping pairs using the Import button. 

Displaying Fields in Boxes 

You have complete control over which fields are displayed in any box. You can also 

add static text and picture objects to boxes. 

Adding or Removing Fields from Boxes 

This section describes how to add or remove fields from boxes. 

➣ To add or remove fields: 

1 With your chart open, select the box(es) to which you want to add fields. 

2 Click the Edit Box Layout tool or select Box Properties from the Format 

menu. OrgPlus displays the Box Properties dialog box. 



CHAPTER 4 

3 Click the Layout tab to display the layout of the selected box(es): 

4 To add a field, select the field in the left pane and drag it to the right into the Box 

Layout area. You can place a field anywhere in the box. 

• To add a static text box, select the Text Box field and drag it into the Box 

Layout area. Click the text box and type to set the contents. 

• To add a static picture, select the Picture field and drag it into the Box 

Layout area. Double-click the added picture to select a file (or a reference to 

a file). 

• To remove a field, select a field from the Box Layout area and drag it to the 

Available Fields area. 

• You can reposition a field within the box by selecting a field and dragging it 

to a new location. 

• You can set the format of a field or text box by selecting the field and then 

clicking the Cell Format… button. Options include font selection, alignment, 

shadow and borders and shading. 

5 Click OK to update the selected boxes. 



Note: If you want your box changes to apply to the entire chart, select Entire chart 

in the Apply to area. If you want your changes to the box to apply to the active subchart, 

select Active sub-chart in the Apply to area. Otherwise your changes are 

only applied to the Selected box(es). 

Inserting Pictures into Boxes 

This section explains how to manually insert pictures into a box. You can also insert 

pictures into boxes automatically using Photo Manager. For more information refer to 

Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting. 

A box must contain a Picture field before you can insert a picture into it. For more 

information refer to Adding and Deleting Fields on page 4-17. 

Note: You can also add a static picture to any box or group of boxes. The difference 

between a static picture and picture field is that the static picture is shared among 

all boxes with the same layout; a picture field can contain a different picture in each 

box. 

➣ To insert a picture field into a box: 

1 Select a box containing a Picture field. 

2 Right-click the Picture field and choose Select Picture from the context menu to 

display the Select Picture dialog box. 

3 Choose a picture and click Open to add the picture to the box. 

Note: Click the down-arrow on the right of the Open button and select Open as 

Link to link the picture in your chart. Linked pictures are not included in chart 

files; only a reference to the picture is included. 



CHAPTER 4 

4 Format the picture as required. For more information see on page 4-47. 

Modifying Box Layout 

OrgPlus enables you to modify the layout of fields in boxes. 


Editing Box Layout page 4-31 

Adding Columns page 4-32 

Merging Cells Page 4-33 

Adding Labels to Fields Page 4-33 

Adding Lines Page 4-34 

Adding Hotspots Page 4-34 

Adjusting Margins Page 4-35 

Editing Box Layout 

You can edit the layout of boxes in your chart. 

➣ To edit box layout: 

1 With your chart open, select a set of boxes. 

2 Select Box Properties from the Format menu to display the Box Properties 

dialog box. 

3 Click the Layout tab. 

4 Modify the layout of your boxes by following the instructions detailed in following 

sections: 

• Adding Columns, page 4-32 

• Merging Cells, page 4-32 

• Adding Labels to Fields, page 4-33 

• Adding Lines, page 4-34 



• Adding Hotspots, page 4-34 

• Adjusting Margins, page 4-35 

Adding Columns 

You can create boxes that contain multiple columns. 

➣ To add columns: 

1 Select Layout Options… button. 

2 Select the number of columns using the Number of Columns selector. 

Note: By default columns are automatically sized (Autosize is selected). When 

using automatic sizing in conjunction with vertical branch styles, you may want 

to select the Include Peers checkbox. 

If you select the Fixed radio button, you can use the Show Columns checkbox 

to enable visual column size adjustment in the Box Layout dialog box. 

Note: If boxes are set to a fixed size, you can also determine whether cells 

truncate longer contents. See Fixed Size Boxes on page 4-37. 

3 Click OK. You can now place fields in any cell in the Box Layout area. 



CHAPTER 4 

Merging Cells 

You can merge two cells that are in different columns to achieve certain box layouts. 

➣ To merge cells: 

1 Select two or more adjoining cells. 

2 Select the Cell Format… button. 

3 Click the Options tab in the Cell Format dialog box. 

4 Select the Merge Cells checkbox. 

5 Click OK. 

Adding Labels to Fields 

You can display a label with any field (Name: Smith, Joy). 

➣ To display or hide a label: 

1 Choose a field in the Box Layout area. 

2 Select the Cell Format… button. 

3 Click the Options tab in the Cell Format dialog box. 

4 Check or uncheck the Show Label checkbox. 

5 Click OK. 

Note: In the options dialog, you can also change the character used as the label 

separator. You can even modify a label name if needed. 

Note: You can also use a Text Box to display a field label. A text box can be 

positioned above, below, left or right or any field. To make a Text Box into a Label: 

• Add a Text Box 

• Select Cell Format… 

• Select the Options tab 

• Select the Field Label checkbox 



Adding Lines 

You can draw horizontal or vertical lines between fields. Two line formats are 

available. One that extends to the border of the box and one that leaves a gap 

between the end of the line and the border. 

➣ To draw lines between rows or columns in the box: 

1 Choose a Line tool ( or ). 

2 Position the cursor between a row or column (the cursor is represented by the 

symbol for horizontal lines and by the 

place the line in the box 

➣ To change the line type: 

symbol for vertical lines), and click to 

• Select a line tool and click the line you want to change. 

➣ To change the line type or remove a line: 

• Click an existing line with the line tool. 

Adding Hotspots 

You can make any displayed field a hotspot. When you move the mouse cursor over 

a hotspot, OrgPlus highlights the hotspot field and displays the profile assigned to 

the box. 

You can edit chart information by modifying the profile fields, and you can follow any 

hyperlink in the profile. For example, if you edit a field in the profile that also 

appears in the box, OrgPlus changes that field in the box to match your edits. 

Clicking a hyperlinked e-mail address in the profile launches your e-mail application. 

➣ To create or clear a hotspot: 

1 Choose a field in the Box Layout area. 

2 Click the Hotspots… button. 



CHAPTER 4 

3 Check the Make Hotspot checkbox in the Hotspot Properties dialog. 

4 Select a profile using the Hotspot Profile selector. 

5 Specify whether you want the hotspot to apply to the selected field or the entire 

box. 

6 Click OK. 

Note: See the Profiles section in Chapter 8 for more information on creating profiles. 

Adjusting Margins 

➣ To adjust margins: 

1 Select the Layout Options… button. 

2 In the Margins area, adjust the Left, Right, Top, and/or Bottom margins, as 

required. 

3 To enable visual margin adjustment in the Box Layout dialog box, select the Show 

Margins checkbox. 

4 Click OK. 

Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures 

This section describes how to apply formatting to elements in your chart. 


Formatting Boxes page 4-36 

Formatting Lines page 4-41 

Formatting Text page 4-44 

Formatting Fields Page 4-47 

Formatting Pictures page 4-48 

Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures 4-35


Formatting Boxes 

You can format any box whether it is a free-floating object or part of a chart. 


Resizing Boxes page 4-36 

Defining Box Shape, Color and Lines page 4-39 

Defining Box Shadows page 4-40 

Resizing Boxes 

This section describes how to define the minimum requirements for sizing boxes. 

➣ To resize a box: 

1 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. 

2 Click any one of the eight resizing handles on a selected box and drag to the resize 

the boxes. 

Note: When you enable automatic width resizing, you cannot resize a box smaller 

than the fields contained within it. See Fixed Size Boxes on page 4-37 for more 

information on controlling box size. 

➣ To manually resize a box: 

1 With your chart open, select one or more boxes. You can drag the control points 

on the selected box to resize or enter a specific size in inches (as detailed in the 

following steps). 

2 Select Box Properties from the Format menu. The Box Properties dialog box is 

displayed. 

3 Click the Box Sizing tab. 

4-36 Formatting Boxes, Lines, Text, Fields, and Pictures


CHAPTER 4 

4 Clear Auto Width then enter the default width and/or height. 

5 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box. 

Fixed Size Boxes 

If the length of any field within a box exceeds the Default Width, the box is 

automatically resized to accommodate the longest field. You can control box sizing 

by enabling word wrap or by forcing the box to a fixed width. If you force a box to a 

fixed width, longer fields within the box will be truncated. When using word wrap, 

you can set a limit on the number of lines the text can wrap to. 



➣ To enable word wrap: 


Note: You can also enable word wrap for a single field within any box. 

2 Select Font… from the Format menu to display the Font Properties dialog box. 

3 Select the Alignment tab. 

4 Select the Word Wrap checkbox. 

5 Use the Limit drop-down list to specify the maximum number of lines that can be 

used when wrapping text. 

6 Click OK. 

➣ To set a box to a fixed width: 



3 Select the Box Sizing tab. 

4 Make sure the Auto Size checkbox is unchecked. Select the Fixed Width 

checkbox. 



CHAPTER 4 

5 Click OK. 

Note: You can specify whether a field is truncated using ellipses by selecting the 

Truncate text for fixed size boxes checkbox in the Options tab in the Cell 

Format… dialog (Box Layout tab in Box Properties dialog). 

Defining Box Shape, Color and Lines 

This section explains how to define the box shape, background color, line style and 

color, and shadow style of boxes or free floating objects 

➣ To format colors and lines: 


Note: Right-click any box and choose Select Boxes with Similar Formatting 

from the context menu to quickly select all boxes on the page that have the 

same format. 

2 Select Box Properties from the Format menu to display the Box Properties 

dialog box. 

3 Click the Color and Lines tab. 



4 Define any of the following: 

• Fill area: 

▪ 

▪ 

Box shape: Select a box shape. 

Color: Select a background color. 

• Border area: 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

Color: Select the border line color. 

Dashed: Select the line type. 

Border Style: Select the border style. 


Defining Box Shadows 

You can define the shadow style of boxes or free-floating objects. 

➣ To format the shadow style: 


2 Select Box Properties on from Format menu to display the Box Properties 

dialog box. 



CHAPTER 4 

3 Click the Shadow tab. 

• Define the following: 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

Shadow Style: Select the shadow style. 

Direction: Select a shadow direction (enabled only when a shadow is 

selected). 

Shadow Color: Select a shadow color (enabled only when a shadow is 

selected). 

Highlight Color: Select the shadow highlight color (enabled only for 

certain shadow styles). 

Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset: Select the horizontal and 

vertical depth of the shadow. 




Formatting Lines 

You can format any line whether it is an auxiliary line, a free-floating object, or a 

connecting line between boxes in a chart. 

An auxiliary line is a line that you can draw between any two boxes in your chart to 

indicate a reporting relationship between them. 

➣ To format connecting lines: 

1 With your chart open, select one or more lines. 

2 Select Line Properties from the Format menu to display the Line Properties dialog 

box. 

3 Click the Color and Lines tab. 


▪ 

Line area: 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

Color: Select the line color. 


Line Weight: Select the line thickness. 

Note: You can also specify a custom line thickness using the 

button in the Line Weight drop-down list. 



CHAPTER 4 

▪ 

Arrows area: 

▪ 

Style: Select an arrow style. 

4 Click the Shadow tab. 


▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

Shadow Style: Select a shadow style. 


selected). 


selected). 








Formatting Text 

You can format any text in your chart whether it is a field in a box or a free-floating 

text object. 

➣ To format text: 

1 Select any text or any box containing text. 

2 Select Font from the Format menu to display the Font Properties dialog box. 

3 Make sure the Font tab is selected. 

4 Define the font, font style, and size of the text. You can also select the Font Color 

and opt to Underline or Strike-Out the text. 

5 Under Apply to: select a radio button to specify how to apply your formatting. 

Note: You can make your formatting choices apply automatically to all new 

instances of the applicable fields by selecting the Default for new objects 

checkbox. 

Note: You can click the Apply button at any time to apply you changes to the 

chart. The dialog will remain open. 



CHAPTER 4 

6 Select the Shadow tab. 


▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 



selected). 


selected). 



7 Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset: Select the horizontal and vertical depth 

of the shadow. 

8 Select the Alignment tab. 



9 Define the Horizontal and Vertical Alignment. 

10 Select the Word Wrap checkbox if you want to wrap the text within a box rather 

than extend the box to accommodate the text. You can limit the number of lines 

text will wrap by using the Limit: drop-down. 

11 Click OK when finished. 



CHAPTER 4 

Formatting Fields 

The Format Fields dialog gives you a quick way to format any set of fields displayed 

within your chart. 

➣ To format fields: 

1 With your chart open, select Format Fields from the Format menu to display the 

Format Fields dialog box. 

2 Select fields by clicking on the associated checkboxes. 

Note: You can use the Check All and Clear All buttons to check or clear all fields. 

3 Specify your formatting options using the Font, Shadow, and Alignment tabs. 

Refer to Formatting Text on page 4-44 

4 Under Apply to: select a radio button to specify how to apply your formatting. 

5 Click the Apply button. You can immediately see your formatting applied in the 

chart. 

Note: You can click the Apply button at any time to apply your changes to the 

chart. The dialog will remain open. 



6 Click OK. 

Formatting Pictures 

You can format a picture whether it is a free-floating object or a field in a box. 

Note: This topic explains formatting pictures in boxes. For information about 

formatting free-floating objects, see Adding Free Floating Objects in Chapter 7. 

➣ To resize a picture: 

1 With your chart open, select a picture. 

2 Click any one of the eight resizing handles on the selected picture and drag to 

resize it. 

➣ To modify picture properties: 

1 Select any box (containing a picture). Select a picture within that box. 

2 Right-click on the picture and select the Picture Properties… menu item to 

display the Picture Properties dialog box. Make sure the Picture tab is selected. 

3 Select Frame/Scale options: 



CHAPTER 4 

By default, the Lock aspect ratio checkbox is turned on and the Autoframe 

radio button is selected. 

The Lock aspect ratio checkbox maintains the relationship between width and 

height to the picture is resized. 

The Autoframe, Autoscale and Manual radio buttons determine the 

relationship between a picture and the frame that it is contained within. 

Autoframe forces the frame to the same size as the picture. Autoscale allows 

you to create a frame that is larger than the picture; however, the picture scales 

as the frame scales. Manual enables you to independently set the size of the 

frame and the picture. 

4 Specify Horizontal and Vertical Alignment of the picture in the picture field: 

Horizontal Alignment: Select the Left, Center, or Right radio button to 

specify the horizontal alignment. 

Vertical Alignment: Select the Top, Center, or Bottom radio button to specify 

the vertical alignment. 

5 To select another image use the Modify… button. 

6 Click OK. 

Formatting Charts 

OrgPlus enables you to apply background, border or shadow formatting to a chart. 

OrgPlus also enables you to set the orientation of a chart. 

➣ To apply formatting to charts: 

1 With your chart open, select Chart Properties | Color and Lines from the 

Format menu. The Chart Properties dialog box is displayed. 

Formatting Charts 4-49


• Define Background properties, as required: 

▪ 

Color: Use the drop-down control to set the background to a specific 

color, gradient, texture, or picture. 

• Define Border properties as required: 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

Border Style: Select the border style. 


Color: Select the line color. 

• Use the Apply to radio buttons to apply your specifications to either the 

Entire chart or to the Active sub-chart only. 

2 Click Shadow tab. The Chart Properties dialog box Shadow tab is displayed. 

4-50 Formatting Charts


CHAPTER 4 

• Define the following, as required: 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 



selected). 


selected). 





Use the Apply to radio buttons to apply your specifications to either the 

Entire chart or to the Active sub-chart only. 



3 Click the Orientation tab to display the Chart Properties dialog box Orientation 

tab. 


▪ 

▪ 

Orientation: Select how you want the chart to be drawn. The 

orientation options are left to right, right to left, top to bottom, or 

bottom to top. 

Subordinate Alignment: Select how subordinates boxes are to be 

aligned with respect to their manager. 

Note: You can set only one orientation per chart. The orientation you define 

applies to all sub-charts contained within a chart. 

4-52 Formatting Charts


CHAPTER 4 

4 Click the Sub-chart Arrows tab. 

5 Specify your preferred style for Sub-chart Arrows from the styles shown. 

6 Specify a Fill Color and a Border Color for your Sub-chart Arrows: 

• By default, the fill and border color of your arrows correspond the to 

associated box. To specify different colors, uncheck the Use Box Colors 

checkbox and specify a Fill Color and Border Color for all sub-chart 

arrows. 

7 Optionally, you can add labels to sub-charts arrows. Labeling sub-chart arrows 

enhances navigation within the chart and improves the usability of your printed 

and published charts. Select the Show Label checkbox and then select the label 

type and label position. Click the Font… button to modify font properties for the 

label if needed. 

8 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. 

Note: You can select only one sub-chart arrow style per chart. The sub-chart arrow 

style you select applies to all sub-charts contained within a chart. 



Applying Chart Styles 

This section describes how to change chart branch styles. 

Changing Chart Styles 

You can change the layout of any group of boxes within your chart by selecting from 

one of the chart styles. There are four types of chart styles: 

• Chart Styles: Arranges peer boxes relative to their immediate manager. 

• Assistant Styles: Arranges assistant boxes relative to their immediate 

manager. 

• Co-Manager Styles: Groups a set of boxes as co-managers. 

4-54 Applying Chart Styles


CHAPTER 4 

• Advanced Styles: If required, you can use advanced styles to arrange peer 

boxes in multi-column styles relative to their immediate manager. 

Note: You can also define Chart Rules that enable you to change branch styles 

within a chart based on a condition. For example, if an employee’s title includes the 

word “assistant”, you can create a rule that changes the branch style to an assistant 

style. See Chart Rules in Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting for 

more information. 

The following procedure describes how to change chart styles. 

Note: OrgPlus Express has a limited set of chart styles. 

➣ To change chart styles: 

1 Select the boxes for which you want to change the style. 

2 Select Chart Styles from the Format menu to display the Chart Style options. 

3 Choose a chart style from the displayed chart style options. 

Applying Chart Styles 4-55


The following example shows the effect of applying the 

the assistants of Chris Phillips. 

assistant chart style to 

 

➣ To use advanced chart styles: 

1 Select the boxes for which you want to change the style. 

2 Select Chart Styles from the Format menu. The Chart Style options are 

displayed (as in step 2 of previous procedure). 

3 Select Advanced Chart Styles to display the Advanced Chart Styles 

dialog box. 


▪ Advanced Style: Select multi-column tree or multi-column 

pair . 

4-56 Applying Chart Styles


CHAPTER 4 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

Alignment: Select how peer boxes are to be aligned. 

Maximum number of boxes per row: Select the maximum number of 

boxes that can be located on any row within a style group. 

Maintain banding: Selecting this option ensures that each box stays on 

its current row when other boxes are added or deleted. This is useful if 

rows are used to represent seniority. For example, the first row might 

contain permanent employees while the second row contains temporary 

employees. 

Note: Right-click a box within a multi-column style and select the 

Action menu to promote or demote a box if the Maintain Banding 

option is selected. 

4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. 

Applying Chart Styles 4-57


Quick Chart Panel 

The Quick Chart panel provides an easy way to get started with OrgPlus. It is the 

fastest way to create basic organizational charts. The Quick Chart panel is intended 

for first time users and contains only a small sub-set of the features available in the 

OrgPlus application. 


Adding and Deleting Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-58 

Moving Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-59 

Editing Box Content Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-60 

Formatting Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-60 

Adding Fields Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-61 

Box Layout Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-62 

Applying Templates Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-63 

Changing Branch Styles Using the Quick Chart Panel Page 4-63 

Adding and Deleting Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel 

OrgPlus includes five types of boxes: 

Subordinate 

Left Co-Worker 

Right Co-Worker 

Manager 

Assistant 

4-58 Quick Chart Panel


CHAPTER 4 

To add boxes to your chart, select a box in the chart, then use the buttons at the top 

of the Quick Chart panel to specify the type of box you are adding. 

To delete a box use the 

button. 

Moving Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel 

To move boxes within your chart, select a box and then use the move buttons in the 

Quick Chart panel to reposition the selected box as desired. 

Quick Chart Panel 4-59


Editing Box Content Using the Quick Chart Panel 

To edit the content of a box, select a box and then select Edit Box Contents 

button. You can now type information into the first field. Use the key to 

advance to the next field. 

Formatting Boxes Using the Quick Chart Panel 

To format a box within your chart, select a box and then use the Edit Box 

Format button in the Quick Chart panel to format the selected box as desired. 

The Format Box button displays the Box Properties dialog. Use the options in the 

Color & Lines tab to select different box shapes, fill colors and border options 

(style, dash, and color). 



CHAPTER 4 

Adding Fields Using the Quick Chart Panel 

You can add additional fields to your charts at any time. 

➣ To add a field: 

1 Select the Edit Box Fields button in the Quick Chart Panel. (define fields icon) 

2 Click Add to add a new field. 

3 Type a field name (such as Org Unit). 

4 Click OK. You will be prompted to add the new field to all boxes. 

5 Click Yes to add the field to all boxes or click No to add the field without 

displaying it in your chart. 



Box Layout Using the Quick Chart Panel 

To specify which fields are shown in a box, select the Edit Box Layout button in 

the Quick Chart panel. OrgPlus displays the Layout panel in the Box Properties 

dialog box. The layout panel is where you specify which fields are displayed in any 

given box. 

➣ To display a field in a box: 

1 Drag a field (for example Org Unit) into the box until you see the symbol, then 

release the mouse button. 

See Adding Fields Using the Quick Chart Panel. 

 



CHAPTER 4 

If you want to remove a field from a box, drag the field out of the box (shown in 

the Layout tab) and back into the field list. 

Note: You can apply the layout changes to all boxes in the chart by selecting the 

Entire chart radio button. 

2 Click OK. Notice that the field is added to the selected boxes. You can now define 

the value of this field for each box in your chart (see Editing Box Content Using the 

Quick Chart Panel). 

Note: You can select more than one box at a time using shift-click. 

Applying Templates Using the Quick Chart Panel 

Templates provide a quick way to format your chart. You can apply box, branch, and 

design templates to your chart using the templates panel. 

Changing Branch Styles Using the Quick Chart Panel 

You may want to change the branch style for aesthetic or space reasons. OrgPlus 

offers a large variety of branch styles, which can be applied to any branch in your 

chart or the entire chart. 

➣ To change the branch style: 


2 Select all the subordinates for a manager (Lynn Brewer in the example below) by 

double-clicking one of the subordinate boxes. 

3 Click the Styles button at the bottom of the window. 



4 Select any style ( for example ). 

The boxes under the manager are reformatted as shown below: 



CHAPTER 4 

Using Cut/Copy/Paste 

This section describes how you can use the cut, copy, and paste within OrgPlus. 


Moving Boxes and Free Floating Objects by Cutting and Pasting page 4-65 

Copying Contents and Format page 4-65 

Moving Boxes and Free Floating Objects by Cutting and 

Pasting 

You can cut and paste one or more boxes from one location to another in a chart. 

You can also use this technique to move boxes from one chart to another. 

➣ To move boxes by cutting (or copying) and pasting: 

1 With your chart open, select the boxes you want to move. 

To select multiple objects, press and click each object, or drag an 

outline around them if they are next to each other in the chart. 

2 Select Cut or Copy from the Edit menu. 

3 Select the box to which you want the boxes attached and select Paste from the 

Edit menu. The selected box(es) are moved. 

➣ To move free objects by cutting (or copying) and pasting: 

1 With your chart open, choose the free floating objects you want to move. 

To select multiple objects, press and click each object, or drag an 

outline around them if they are next to each other in the chart. 

2 Select Cut or Copy from the Edit menu. 

3 Select Paste from the Edit menu. The selected object(s) are moved. 

Copying Contents and Format 

You can copy only the contents of a box or only the formatting for a box. 

➣ To copy box contents: 

1 With your chart open, choose the box you want to copy. 

2 Select Copy Contents from the Edit menu. The content of the selected box is 

copied. 

3 Choose the target boxes and select Paste from the Edit menu. The content of the 

selected box is pasted into the target box. 

Using Cut/Copy/Paste 4-65


➣ To copy box format: 

1 With your chart open, choose the box you want to copy. 

2 Select Copy Format from the Edit menu. The format of the selected box is 

copied. 

3 Choose the target boxes and click Paste from the Edit menu. The target boxes 

are reformatted. 

Printing 

This section describes how print charts. 


Defining Page Setup page 4-67 

Using Print Preview page 4-70 

Printing Charts page 4-71 

4-66 Printing


CHAPTER 4 

Defining Page Setup 

This section describes how to define the page settings for your chart. 

➣ To define page setup: 

1 Select Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box. 

2 In the Page tab, define the following: 

• Orientation: Select Portrait or Landscape. 

• Scaling: Defines the number pages your chart should be allowed to span. 

Select from the following options: 

▪ 

▪ 

Adjust to: Specify the percentage of actual size in which the chart 

should be printed. 

Or 

Fit to: Specify the number of pages over which the chart should span. 

Printing 4-67


▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

Uniform Scaling for all sub-charts: Apply the same scaling to all 

sub-charts. Uniform scaling ensures that every chart box has the same 

scaling in the printed output. 

Uniform Scaling for all master page elements: Apply the same 

scaling to the master page based the percentage you specify in the 

Scale to: drop-down. Uniform scaling ensures that every master page 

elements has the same scaling on each printed page. This is an 

important option when sub-charts or chart tabs within a project are 

printed using multiple print jobs. 

Include an Overlap Between Chart Pages: Enables the printed pages 

of charts that span multiple pages to overlap in order to facilitate binding 

to a final document. 

Print comments as displayed on charts: If the chart contains 

comments, this option will print the comments as they are displayed on 

the chart. 

• Paper Size: Define the paper size. 

• Page Order: Select the order in which the pages of the chart are printed: 

▪ Down, then Over : Prints the left-most segments first, from top 

down. 

▪ Over, then Down : Prints the top-most segments first, from left 

to right. 

• Apply to: Specify whether these settings apply to the Entire Project or 

only the Current Chart. 

4-68 Printing


CHAPTER 4 

3 Select the Margins tab. 

4 Define the margin settings as follows: 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

▪ 

Margins: Enter the minimum values for the Top, Left, Right and 

Bottom margins. You can also set margins by dragging margin lines in 

the Page Setup dialog box. 

Or 

Use the Minimum Margins for this Printer: Select this option to use 

the minimum margin settings for your printer. 

Center Chart on Page: Select how to center the chart content on each 

page. Select Horizontally or Vertically or both. 

Apply to: Specify whether these settings apply to the Entire Project or 

only the Current Chart. 

5 Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog box. 

Note: The Options… button allows you to modify printer specific settings. 

Printing 4-69


Using Print Preview 

You can preview how your chart will look when it is printed. 

➣ To Print Preview: 

• Select Print Preview from the File menu. The Preview dialog box, which 

includes standard Print Preview functionality, is displayed. 

4-70 Printing


CHAPTER 4 

Printing Charts 

OrgPlus enables you to print out your charts. 

➣ To print your charts: 

1 Select Print from the File menu. The Print dialog box is displayed. 

2 Choose the printer. 

3 Define the printing options, such as, Print Range and Number of Copies. 

4 In the Print what section, select from the following options: 

• Entire Project: Prints all the charts in the project. 

• Current Chart: Prints the current chart. 

• Active Sub-chart: Prints the currently active sub-chart. 

• Selection: Prints the chart segment that includes the selected boxes. 

5 Click Print all linked documents if you want to print documents linked to OLE 

objects in your chart. 

If you click Print All Linked Documents OrgPlus checks your chart for OLE 

objects that are linked to documents. If OrgPlus finds any documents, it prompts 

you to select which of documents you want printed. 

6 Click Include navigation arrows if you want to include the arrows indicating sub 

charts in your printed chart. 

The Include navigation arrows checkbox appears only if your chart contains 

sub charts. 

7 Click OK to start printing. 

Printing 4-71


4-72 Printing

Chapter 5 

Working with Charts: Navigation and Visualization 


Viewing Charts Page 5-1 

Hiding Boxes and Lines Page 5-5 

Basic Visualization Techniques Page 5-6 

Working with Groups Page 5-9 

Viewing Charts 

This section describes how you can view and navigate charts. 


Zooming and Panning page 5-1 

Using the Thumbnail Window page 5-3 

Showing Selected Branches page 5-4 

Using Full Screen Mode page 5-4 

Zooming and Panning 

The following Zoom and Pan tools are available in OrgPlus: 

• Zoom In and Zoom Out enable you to increase or decrease the 

magnification of your chart. If you have a wheel on your mouse you can also 

zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. 

• Zoom Wheel makes your mouse wheel a zoom tool. Rolling the wheel 

forward zooms in, rolling backward zooms out. 

• Zoom Rect tool allows you to click and drag to define a rectangle. When 

you release the mouse button the selected area is magnified. 

5-1


• The Pan tool enables you to pan the chart within its window by clicking 

and dragging the mouse as required. 

• Fit to Window scales the chart so that its entire content is visible in a 

single window. 

• The Scale drop-down list allows you to choose from a list of 

zoom factors. 

The following menu items can be accessed by selecting Zoom from the View menu. 

• Fit to Width: Scales the chart so that the width of chart fits in the window. 

• Fit to Window: Scales the chart so that its entire content is visible in the 

window. 

• Actual Size: Scales the chart so that the boxes appear at the size in which 

they will print. 

• Zoom To: Displays the Zoom dialog box. Select the zoom options and click 

OK. 

5-2 Viewing Charts


CHAPTER 5 

Using the Thumbnail Window 

The thumbnail view is useful for navigating large charts. 

➣ To open the thumbnail window: 

1 Click the Thumbnail button to display a thumbnail window. 

Viewing Charts 5-3


2 The red rectangle corresponds to the portion of the chart that is displayed in the 

main window. As you drag the red rectangle in the thumbnail, the displayed 

chart is updated accordingly. 

Note: The red rectangle in the thumbnail window changes as zoom and pan 

tools are used. 

3 Click the button in the thumbnail window to close. 

Showing Selected Branches 

You can temporarily hide all boxes in a chart that are not contained in a selected 

branch using this feature. 

➣ To show a selected branch: 

• Click the Show Branch button . A chart containing only the selected branch 

is displayed. 

 

• Click the Show Branch button again to show the entire chart. 

Using Full Screen Mode 

You can enlarge the work area to fill the entire monitor area, similar to the Full 

Screen mode in a PowerPoint slide show. 

➣ To use full screen mode: 

• Click the Full Screen toolbar button to enter/exit Full Screen mode. 

Note: Press to exit Full Screen mode. 

5-4 Viewing Charts


CHAPTER 5 

Hiding Boxes and Lines 

Hidden boxes remain part of a chart but are not visible. When boxes are hidden, 

connecting lines are adjusted accordingly. 

 

In this section… 

Hiding Boxes and Lines page 5-6 

Showing Boxes and Lines page 5-6 

Hiding Boxes and Lines 5-5


Hiding Boxes and Lines 

Only chart boxes and lines can be hidden. 

➣ To hide boxes or lines: 

1 Select the boxes or lines you want to hide. 

2 Select Hide from the Format menu. The selected boxes or lines are hidden. 

Showing Boxes and Lines 

You can show hidden boxes and lines, making them visible again. This option is 

enabled only when the selected objects are already hidden. 

➣ To show hidden boxes and lines: 

1 Select the hidden boxes or lines you want to unhide. 

2 Select Show from the Format menu. The selected boxes or lines are shown. 

3 Note: Select the menu item Hidden Boxes or Hidden Lines from the Show 

menu to temporarily show hidden boxes and lines. 

Basic Visualization Techniques 

This section describes techniques you can use to determine the visual appearance of 

your charts and some navigational features you can use. 


Showing Hidden Objects page 5-7. 

Showing Levels page 5-8. 

Finding by Photo page 5-8. 

5-6 Basic Visualization Techniques


CHAPTER 5 

Showing Hidden Objects 

When creating a chart you may need to reveal various elements that are not to be 

included in the final output. 


Showing Hidden Boxes, Lines, Fields, and Comments page 5-7 

Showing or Hiding Symbols page 5-7 

Showing Page Lines page 5-7 

Showing Hidden Boxes, Lines, Fields, and Comments 

You can show hidden boxes and lines as necessary. You can also temporarily display 

all defined fields in a box. 

To temporarily show or hide boxes: Select Show | Hidden Boxes from the View 

menu. 

To temporarily show or hide lines: Select Show | Hidden Lines from the View 

menu. 

To temporarily show or hide hidden fields: Select Show | Hidden Fields from the 

View menu. 

To show comments: select Show | Comments from the View menu. 

Showing or Hiding Symbols 

A box may contain one or more symbols. Symbols include elements such as 

sub-chart arrows and expand/collapse branch. 

To show or hide symbols: Select Show | Symbols from the View menu. 

Showing Page Lines 

Pages lines demarcate header and footer areas, print margins, and page breaks. 

Basic Visualization Techniques 5-7


To show or hide page lines: Select Show | Page Lines from the View 

menu. 

Showing Levels 

A chart consists of one or more levels. You can limit the number of levels displayed 

at any given time. 

To specify the number of levels to display: Select Show Levels from 

the View menu and select the number of levels to display. 

Finding by Photo 

This feature enables you to find boxes in your chart by selecting photos. The Find 

by Photo dialog box displays the first picture field in each box in your chart. 

➣ To locate a chart box using Find by Photo: 

1 Select Find by Photo from the Edit menu. The Find By Photo dialog box is 

displayed. 

2 In the Search Where section, select the scope of the search: 

Entire Chart: Lists all the pictures in the chart. 

Active Sub-chart: Lists only pictures in the current sub-chart. 

Selection: Lists only the pictures in the current selection. 

3 Selecting any photo scrolls the box containing that picture into view. 

4 Click Close to close the Find By Photo dialog box. 

Note: Like all panels in OrgPlus, you may dock the Find by Photo dialog box to any 

side of the OrgPlus window. 

5-8 Basic Visualization Techniques


CHAPTER 5 

Working with Groups 

The Groups feature enables you to define a sub-set of a chart that meets a set of 

user-defined criteria. All boxes that do not belong to this sub-set (or group) are then 

shaded when this group is selected. 


Creating New Groups page 5-9 

Applying Groups page 5-11 

Editing, Copying, Deleting, and Ordering Groups page 5-12 

Creating New Groups 

This section describes how to create new groups. 

➣ To create new groups: 

1 Select Groups | Manage Groups from the Chart menu, or click the Manage 

Groups button 

. The Manage Groups dialog box is displayed. 

2 Click Add to display the Manage Group Properties dialog box. 

Working with Groups 5-9


3 Enter the group name in the Group Name field. 

4 Enter the group selection criteria. You can use a formula to define a group using 

the Field Name, Comparison, and Contents fields. For complex formulas use 

the And/Or operators to expand or contract your criteria. See Using Formulas in 

Chapter 7, Working with Charts: Advanced Charting for more information. 

Note: Use the Constants… button to include any defined constants in your 

selection criteria. See Using Constants in Chapter 7, Working with Charts: 

Advanced Charting for more information. 

5 Click the Group Display Options tab. 

5-10 Working with Groups


CHAPTER 5 

Define the display options as follows: 

Boxes: 

▪ 

▪ 

Gray boxes not in group: Grays boxes that do not belong to the group. 

Hide boxes not in group (preserve hierarchy): Hides boxes that do 

not belong to the group unless the box is required to maintain the 

hierarchy of the chart. 

Content: 

▪ 

▪ 

Hide content if not in group: Hides the content of boxes that do not 

belong to the group. 

Gray content if not in group: Grays the content of boxes that do not 

belong to the group. 

Applying Groups 

6 Click OK to create the group. 

7 Click Close. The Manage Groups dialog box is closed. 

You can apply a group to the displayed chart. 

➣ To apply a group: 

Select Groups | from the Chart menu, or select the group 

from the Groups drop-down list on the toolbar. The boxes in the chart are redrawn 

to indicate which boxes belong to the current group. 



Note: If you do not want to apply a group, select Groups | All Boxes from the 

Chart menu. 

Editing, Copying, Deleting, and Ordering Groups 

You may want to edit, delete, or reorder groups. 

➣ To edit group settings: 


Groups button 

defined groups. 

. The Manage Groups dialog box is displayed listing all 

2 Select the group you want to edit and click Edit. 

3 Click Close when finished. 

➣ To copy a group: 


Groups button 

defined groups. 

. The Manage Groups dialog box is displayed listing all 

2 Select the group you want to copy and click Copy. 

Note: OrgPlus adds your new group to the group list. The default name of your 

new group is the same as the original you copied, but with an incremental 

number appended to it. For example, if you copy a report named “MyGroup,” the 

default name of your copy is “Copy of Mygroup.” You can rename groups in the 

Manage Groups dialog box. 


➣ To delete groups: 

1 From the Manage Groups dialog box, select the required group to be deleted 

and click Delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. 

2 Click OK to delete the group. 


➣ To change the ordering of groups: 

1 From the Manage Groups dialog box, select a group and click: 

Move Up to move the group up one position in the list. 

Or 

Move Down to move the group down one position in the list. 




CHAPTER 5 

Using Groups for E-mail Distribution 

You can create an e-mail distribution list based on any defined group. For example, 

you can send an e-mail to: 

• All engineers in the San Francisco office 

• All full-time employees that participate in the retirement plan 

Creating a Distribution List Based on a Group 

You can create e-mail distribution lists composed of group members. 

Specifying the e-mail address field: 

In order to use this feature, your chart must include an e-mail field. 

Note: See Defining Field Properties in Chapter 4 for detailed information on 

defining the e-mail address field. 

➣ To create a distribution list for a group: 

1 With your chart displayed, select Groups | E-mail Groups from the Chart 

Menu or click the E-mail Groups icon 

Group dialog box. 

on the Toolbar to display the E-mail 

2 Under Send Using, select an outgoing e-mail option: 



• E-mail Client – Select this option to use your default e-mail client. 

• SMTP – Select this option to use Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Your e-mail 

will be sent according to the SMTP settings defined for OrgPlus. 

Note: You can configure SMTP settings by selecting the Options menu item 

from the Tools menu. See Using the Options Panel in Chapter 6, Working 

with Charts: Utilities. 

3 All the members of the current group are automatically included. You can add or 

remove recipients using the To, CC, and BCC buttons. You can also manually 

enter e-mail addresses. Multiple e-mail addresses should be must separated by 

semi-colons. 

4 Optionally you can attach a copy of the current chart by selecting the Attach 

Chart checkbox. Use the Setting… button to make sure the chart is optimized 

properly. See Chapter 4, Working with Charts, Basic Charting for additional 

details. 

5 Enter the Subject and Body text of the e-mail. 

6 Click OK to send. 


Chapter 6 

Working with Charts: Utilities 



Using Grids and Rulers Page 6-2 

Working with the Photo Manager page 6-2 

Comparing Charts Page 6-5 

Sorting Boxes page 6-5 

Using Find and Replace Page 6-9 

Spell Check Page 6-13 

Inserting Comments Page 6-14 

Setting OrgPlus Options Page 6-15 

Overview 

This chapter describes some of the useful utility functions that are included in 

OrgPlus. 

6-1


Using Grids and Rulers 

Grids and rulers provide a visual aid for the placement of objects on the OrgPlus 

page. The lines of the grid crisscross the work surface like those on traditional graph 

paper. When you place a free-floating object on the page, it snaps into place 

according to its position on the grid. 

The rulers along the left and top edges measure the page in inches. 

Note: Rulers are especially useful for outputting charts to large format printers and 

plotters. Use the Page Setup… menu from the File menu to set the paper size. 

Select the Adjust to: radio button and set scaling to 100% to get WYSIWYG output. 

Displaying the Grids and Rulers 

To display the grid, select Grid from the View menu. To display the rulers, select 

Ruler from the View menu. 

Note: Grids and rulers do not appear in printed charts. 

Working with the Photo Manager 

This section describes how to place pictures in box fields using the Photo Manager. 

Pictures added using Photo Manager can be synchronized with the original data 

source. 

Inserting Pictures Using Photo Manager 

The Photo Manager can import pictures into chart boxes. The Pictures fields in each 

box can be automatically populated from an external source. This is useful if you 

maintain a set of pictures with a logical naming convention. These pictures may be 

stored on a local or network drive, HTTP or FTP server. 

Photo Manager identifies photos according to a flexible naming convention. The same 

naming convention must be used for identifying all pictures. 

➣ To import/refresh photos to your chart: 

1 With your chart open, select Photo Manager from the Data menu. If the chart 

has no Pictures fields defined, the following Photo Manager message is 

displayed. 

6-2 Using Grids and Rulers


CHAPTER 6 

2 Select Add Field to all the boxes in your chart if you want new Pictures 

fields to be added to all the boxes in your chart and click Yes to continue. If you 

click No the action is cancelled. 

The Photo Manager dialog box is displayed. 

3 Define your settings as follows: 

• Choose photo column: Select a destination field. Only fields of type Photo 

are listed. 

• Target location: Select the source location of the photo files 

(Disk/Network, FTP or HTTP). Enter the path or use the browse button to 

specify a location. 

Working with the Photo Manager 6-3


Note: You can specify whether to embed or link picture files to your chart. 

Linked files result in a smaller file size; however, if you share your OrgPlus 

file with other users they may not have access to the linked picture files. 

• Photo Generator: Specify the naming convention used to name the source 

pictures files: 

• Pictures Field: Select a field to be used to generate the source picture 

file names. For example, source files can be named according to the 

contents of the Name field or the Title field. 

• Name template: Select how the picture file name should be 

constructed. For example: if a field has the name Adam Smith, selecting: 

• Last.bmp generates Smith.bmp. 

• First.bmp generates Adam.bmp. 

• FLast.bmp generates ASmith.bmp. 

• FirstL.bmp generates AdamS.bmp. 

• FirstLast.bmp generates AdamSmith.bmp 

• File type: Select the file type from the drop-down list. 

• Import photos up to level: Select the number levels for the photo 

manager to import. 

4 Click Generate to match boxes in the chart with picture files from the source. 

The results of this action are shown in the table at the bottom of the dialog box. 

The symbol indicates that a match was found. The symbol indicates a 

missing photo. 

Note: You can view a preview of the picture that corresponds to a row by 

selecting that row in the table. 

5 Click the Photo Size tab if you want to change the default scale, size and 

alignment before importing each picture. 

Note: Importing large photos into your chart can affect performance. We 

recommend that you create smaller versions of photos before importing. 

6 Click OK to import the photos into your chart. 

6-4 Working with the Photo Manager


CHAPTER 6 

Comparing Charts 

OrgPlus allows you to compare two charts. After comparison a report containing the 

differences between the two charts is generated. 

Comparing the following charts: 

Would result in the following delta report: 

Comparing Charts 6-5


➣ To compare two charts: 

1 Select Compare Charts… from the Chart menu to display the Compare 

Charts dialog box. 

2 Use the Browse… button in the Compare (Project) area to select any OrgPlus 

file or select the “Use Current Project” checkbox to select the displayed chart. 

If the selected project contains multiple tabs, use the Chart Tab drop-down list 

to select a chart. 

3 Use the Browse… button in the To (Project) area to select any OrgPlus file or 

select the “Use Current Project” checkbox to select the displayed chart. If the 

selected project contains multiple tabs, use the Chart Tab drop-down list to 

select a chart. 

4 Use the Unique Field drop down list to select the field (in each chart) that will 

be used to match boxes between the two charts (i.e. email address or employee 

ID). 

5 Define the information to Include in the delta report: 

• Headers: Output field names in the first row of the report. 

• File Info: Output path and file name information in the report. 

• Previous Values: Include columns showing the previous value of a field in 

the delta report. 

• Select Fields: Select which fields to include in the delta report. 

6-6 Comparing Charts


CHAPTER 6 

Note: By default, the delta report is automatically displayed after the 

comparison is complete. Clear the View delta reports checkbox if you do not 

wish to display the report after comparison. 

6 Click OK in the Compare Charts dialog box to display the Windows Save As 

dialog box. 

7 Specify a file name file type for your comparison report. 

8 Click Save. 

Comparing Charts 6-7


Sorting Boxes 

Subordinate boxes that report to the same manager can be sorted. 

➣ To sort boxes in your chart: 

1 Select the boxes to sort. If you do not select any boxes, all boxes within the 

current sub-chart are sorted. 

2 Select Sort from the Data menu. 

The Sort dialog box is displayed. 

3 Define the sort parameters: 

• Sort by: Select the field name by which to sort and then select Ascending 

or Descending. 

• Then by: If required, select a second level of sorting and then select 

Ascending or Descending. 

• Then by: If required, select a third level of sorting and then select 

Ascending or Descending. 

4 In the Sort what section, select from: 

• Entire Chart: Sorts all the chart boxes. 

• Active sub-chart: Sorts only the boxes in the currently displayed sub-chart. 

• Selection: Sorts only the selected boxes. 

5 Select OK to perform the sort. 

6-8 Sorting Boxes


CHAPTER 6 

Using Find and Replace 

You can perform simple or advanced searches using the Find command. The 

Replace command enables you to replace some or all occurrences of a specified 

string with another string. 

Note: You can view a tabular list of all records that match a simple or complex set of 

criteria using the Search panel. See Searches in Chapter 8, Reports, Profiles, 

Directories, and Searches for more information. 


Using Find page 6-9 

Using Advanced Find page 6-10 

Using Find and Replace page 6-11 

Using Advanced Find and Replace page 6-12 

Using Find 

You can search for occurrences of a specific string. 

To perform a simple find: 

1 Select Find from the Edit menu. The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. 

2 Enter the search string in the Find What field. 

3 Select the search mode: 

Select All Matching Boxes: Selects all boxes that contain the search string. 

Go to First Matching Box: Selects the first box that contains the search string. 

Using Find and Replace 6-9


4 Depending on the selected search mode, click Find Next or Find All. You can 

continue to click Find Next until you reach the bottom of the chart or you find 

the desired occurrence of a string. 

Note: Press to search for the next occurrence. Press 

++ to search backwards. 

Using Advanced Find 

You can search for every occurrence of strings based on a set of conditions. 

To perform an advanced find: 

1 Select Find from the Edit menu. The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. 

2 Select the Advanced Find button. 

3 Define the first search criteria expression by selecting from the Field Name and 

Comparison drop-down lists. Then enter the search string in the Contents 

field. 

4 Define any additional search criteria in the second and subsequent lines by 

selecting the And/OR search condition for each line. 

5 Select Match Case to find only words that are capitalized the same way as the 

text in the Contents field. 

6 Select Whole Word Only to find only complete words that match the Contents 

field entries. 

7 In the Search where area, select from the following options: 

Entire Chart: Searches the entire chart. 

Active sub-chart: Confines the search to the currently displayed sub-chart. 

Selection: Confines the search to the selected boxes. 

6-10 Using Find and Replace


CHAPTER 6 

8 Select the search mode: 

Select All Matching Boxes: Select all the boxes that contain the search string. 

Go to First Matching Box: Selects the first box that contains the search string. 

9 Depending on the selected search mode, click Find Next or Find All. You can 

continue to click Find Next until you reach the bottom of the chart or you find 

the desired box. 

Using Find and Replace 

You can replace any text string with another text string. 

To replace text in chart boxes: 

1 Select Replace from the Edit menu. The Find and Replace dialog box is 

displayed. 


3 Enter the replacement string in the Replace With field. 

4 Start your find and replace operation as follows: 

Click Replace All to replace all instances of the old text with the new text. 

Click Replace to replace the current instance and continue to the next instance. 

Click Find Next to find the next instance of the text. 

5 Repeat the previous step until the message Search Completed is displayed, or 

click Cancel to stop the search at any point. 

Using Find and Replace 6-11


Using Advanced Find and Replace 

Use the Replace command to find and replace specific text in your chart. 

To replace text in chart boxes: 

1 Select Replace from the Edit menu. The Find and Replace dialog box is 

displayed. 


3 Enter the replacement string in the Replace With field. 

4 Click More. The expanded Find and Replace dialog box is displayed. 

Define the Replace Options: 

• Limit the replace operation to a single field by selecting from the Replace In 

drop-down list. 

• Select Match Case to find only words that are capitalized the same way as 

the text in the Contents field. 

• Select Whole Word Only to find only complete words that match the Find 

What field entries. 

In the Search where area, select from the following options: 

• Entire Chart: Searches the entire chart. 

• Active sub-chart: Confines the search to the currently displayed sub-chart. 

• Selection: Confines the search to the selected boxes. 

5 Start your find and replace as follows: 

Click Replace All to replace all instances of the old text with the new text. 

6-12 Using Find and Replace


CHAPTER 6 

Click Replace to replace the current instance and continue to the next instance. 

Click Find Next to find the next instance of the text. 

6 Repeat previous step until the message Search Completed is displayed, or click 

Close to stop the search at any point. 

Spell Check 

You can check the spelling of text in your chart. 

To spell check: 

1 Select Spell Check from the Tools menu. The Spelling dialog box is displayed. 

2 Select the fields to spell check. 

3 Select Spell Check text objects if you want to spell check text that is not 

contained in chart boxes (free floating text object, titles, and so on). 

4 In the Check what area, select the scope of the spell check: 

Entire Chart: Applies the spell check to all chart boxes. 

Active sub-chart: Applies the spell check to the currently displayed sub-chart. 

Selection: Applies the spell check to only selected boxes. 

5 Click OK to start the spell check. If a word that is not in the spelling dictionary is 

encountered, the standard Microsoft Office Spell Check dialog box is displayed. 

6 A message is displayed confirming the end of the spell check.0 

Spell Check 6-13


Inserting Comments 

OrgPlus enables you to insert comments in a chart. This can be a useful tool for 

collaboration, allowing a chart owner to get input from others. Comments can also 

be viewed in OrgPlus Reader. 

➣ To insert a comment: 

• Select a box in your chart and select Comment from the Insert menu. 

Note: When you add a comment, the comment author is shown in the title bar. 

The author is automatically set by Windows when a chart is created. If needed, 

you can change the author by selecting Project Properties… from the File 

Menu (Summary tab). 

➣ To view and edit comments: 

1 Any box with an attached comment has a red triangle in the upper right corner. 

Move the mouse cursor over the triangle to view a comment. 

2 Double-click on the triangle to edit the comment. 

3 Use the delete key to delete the selected comment. 

Note: Use the Text toolbar to specify font, size, and formatting for your 

comments. 

Note: A list of all comments can be viewed using the Comments panel. See 

Chapter 8 for more details. 

6-14 Inserting Comments


CHAPTER 6 

Setting OrgPlus Options 

This section describes the options available in OrgPlus and explains how you can set 

them according to your preferences. 


Using the Options Panel Page 6-15 

Protecting Projects Page 6-18 

Using the Options Panel 

The Options panel gives you control over some of the default behaviors of OrgPlus. 

➣ To modify OrgPlus Preferences: 

1 Select Options from the Tools menu to display the Preferences tab of the 

Options dialog box. 

2 Modify any of the following options in the Preferences tab: 

On application start, open the last project saved: Opens the last saved 

project the next time you launch OrgPlus. 

Setting OrgPlus Options 6-15


Automatically check for OrgPlus news and special offers: Keeps you 

informed of news and special offers from OrgPlus. 

Optimize Layout for New Sub-charts: Optimizes the layout of any sub-charts 

you create. With this option selected, OrgPlus minimizes the number of pages 

and optimizes the distribution of boxes on a page. 

Microsoft Office Toolbar: Enables you to specify which MS Office applications 

will include the OrgPlus toolbar. The OrgPlus toolbar allows you to create 

organizational charts directly in MS Office applications. 

Use OrgPlus to edit embedded charts created with MS OrgChart: By 

default, embedded charts created with MS OrgChart are opened in OrgPlus. If 

you want to edit these charts with MS OrgChart, turn this checkbox off. 

Use Fixed line widths for embedded objects: Microsoft Office does not fully 

support dashed lines. Select this option if you use dashed lines in your charts. 

Recently used file list: Sets the number of entries listed in the recently used 

file list in the File menu. 

3 Click the New Projects tab. 

4 Specify your preferences for the new project Properties: 

Default: Applies the blank template, which has minimal formatting. 

6-16 Setting OrgPlus Options


CHAPTER 6 

Take from Current Chart: Applies the design template used in the currently 

active chart. 

Apply Template: Allows you to choose a template to apply to new projects. Use 

the Select Template drop-down list to select a template to apply. You can view 

a preview of the selected template on the right side of the dialog. 

5 Select the default style for Sub-chart Arrows and specify color and label 

options. 

Use Box Colors: Applies the chart box border and fill colors to your sub-chart 

arrows. 

Fill Color and Border Color: You can choose a fill color and/or border color 

from the drop-down menus. 

Show Label: To include a label with your sub-chart arrows click this checkbox 

and select the label from the drop-down list. If you add a label, select either 

Position Left or Position Right to specify the label location relative to the 

arrow. Click the Font… button to set the Font Properties for the label. 

6 Select the SMTP tab to display the SMTP Options. Setting up STMP allows you to 

automatically e-mail charts after publishing to PDF, PowerPoint or Word. For 

more information on publishing charts, see Chapter 10, Publishing Your Charts. 



Note: The SMTP tab also allows you to set your preferences for e-mail 

distribution of OrgPlus charts using groups. For more information, see Using 

Groups for E-mail Distribution in Chapter 5. 

User Information: Type Name and E-mail Address. 

Server Information: Type the name of the Outgoing mail server (SMTP). 

Type the number of the Outgoing server port (SMTP). Port 25 is the default. 

Type the Maximum number of recipients. If you leave this field blank, no 

maximum is applied by OrgPlus. 

Logon information: Type the User Name and Password. If you want the 

system to remember the password, click the Remember password checkbox. 

Click the Test Settings… button. The system will send a test e-mail to the 

address you entered in User Information. 

7 Click OK to save your changes and close the Options dialog box. 

Protecting Projects 

If your project is saved on a shared network, you may want to set a password to 

prevent unauthorized access to sensitive information. 

Note: DO NOT forget the password. Once a project is protected, no one can access 

it without the password, not even the author. 

➣ To password protect projects: 

1 With your project open, select Protect Project from the File menu to display 

the Protect Project dialog box. 

2 Enter a password in the Password field and then enter it again in the Confirm 

Password field. 

3 Click OK. The project is now password protected. 

4 Note: Once you have protected a file, any user is prompted for a password 

whenever the file is opened. 

➣ To unprotect projects: 

1 With your project open, select Unprotect from the File menu. The Password 

Required dialog box is displayed. 



CHAPTER 6 

2 Enter the password and click OK. The project is now unprotected. 0 

Viewing Project Properties 

The Project Properties dialog box provides standard file information and attributes, 

user-entered file identification, and OrgPlus project statistics. This is feature is 

similar to File Properties available in Microsoft applications. 

➣ To view Project Properties: 

1 Select Project Properties from the File menu to display the Project Properties 

dialog box. 

The Project Properties dialog box includes the following tabs: 

General: Shows standard file data and statistics. 



Summary: Enables you to enter authoring details about the project. 

Contents: Provides OrgPlus project statistics: 

• Records: Total number of records in the project as a whole, including 

records applicable to hidden boxes. 

• Orphans: Number of unassigned boxes in the project. 

• Project Contents: 

• Statistics for each individual chart in the project, such as the 

number of boxes and sub-charts. 

• A listing of the directories, profiles and reports defined for this 

project. 

2 You can modify fields in the Summary tab but you cannot modify any fields in 

the General or Contents tabs. 

3 Click OK to save changes and close the dialog box. 


Chapter 7 

Working with Charts: Advanced Charting 


Using the Master Page page 7-2 

Adding Headers and Footers page 7-4 

Adding AutoText Elements page 7-5 

Adding Free Floating Objects page 7-6 

Adding Hyperlinks to Objects Page 7-12 

Adding Auxiliary Lines Page 7-12 

Adding Legends page 7-13 

Creating and Modifying Templates Page 7-17 

Using Templates Page 7-19 

Defining Dynamic Fields Page 7-23 

Using Formulas Page 7-29 

Using Constants Page 7-31 

Working with Sub-charts Page 7-35 

Working with Multiple Charts Page 7-40 

Advanced Chart Layout page 7-43 

Multi-record Boxes page 7-46 

Conditional Formatting Page 7-48 

7-1


Chart Rules Page 7-52 

Creating Off-page References page 7-55 

Overview 

This chapter provides detailed descriptions of advanced charting functionality 

available in OrgPlus. 

Using the Master Page 


Viewing the Master Page Page 7-3 

Scaling Master Page Elements Page 7-4 

The Master Page enables you to define a background page that is common to all 

charts and sub-charts in a project. The Master Page layer often includes elements 

such a corporate logo and page numbering. Content on the Master Page layer is 

always drawn first, behind any elements that exist on the charts or sub-charts. 

7-2 Working with Charts: Advanced Charting


CHAPTER 7 

In the following example you can see how the images added to the Master Page are 

drawn in the background when the Normal View is selected. 

Normal 

View 

Master Page 

View 

Free-floating objects, headers, and footers are usually added to the Master Page; 

however, they can also be added to a specific sub-chart. 

Viewing the Master Page 

This section describes how to view the Master Page. 

➣ To view the Master Page of a chart: 

• With your chart open, select Master Page from the View menu to display he 

Master Page. (To revert to Normal view, select Normal from View menu.) 

Using the Master Page 7-3


Note: You can enhance a chart’s presentation by inserting a logo or other picture as 

a free-floating object anywhere on the Master Page or on any individual sub-chart. 

See Inserting Pictures on page 7-8. 

Scaling Master Page Elements 

When printing or publishing, you can holistically adjust the scaling of all Master Page 

elements to achieve optimal results See Defining Page Setup in Chapter 4 for more 

details. 

Adding Headers and Footers 

You can enter free-floating text either in the header/footer area of a page or 

anywhere on the page using a text-box. Normally headers and footers are added to 

the Master Page. 

➣ To modify headers and footers: 

1 With your chart open, select Master Page from the View menu. 

2 Select Show | Page Lines from the View menu if the header and footer areas 

are not already visible. 

3 Click in the header or footer area and enter a title for your chart. 

4 Apply formatting to the text as required using the standard Font Properties 

dialog box, for example, Arial 24 Bold font and Purple color. 



CHAPTER 7 

5 To enter text elsewhere, select Text Box from the Insert menu and click 

anywhere in the page. A text box is displayed in which you can enter text. 

6 Select Normal from the View menu when you are finished working with the 

Master Page. 

Note: The following diagram shows the four header and three footer areas in 

which you can enter text. 

Adding AutoText Elements 

AutoText elements are dynamic strings that provide information about the chart, 

such as the current page number, the total number of pages, the current date, the 

file name and so on. 

They can be inserted in headers and footers, or into text boxes. Typically they are 

added to the Master Page so that they are common to all sub-charts within a chart. 

For details about all the various AutoText elements, see Appendix A, Window 

Structure and Command Reference. 

➣ To insert AutoText elements: 

1 If you want to add an AutoText element to the Master Page, select Master Page 

from the View menu. 

2 If you want to insert the AutoText element into an existing text box or a header 

area, click on that area. If you do not a select a destination for the AutoText 

element, a new text box containing the element is created when the element is 

inserted. 

3 Select AutoText from the Insert menu and then select an AutoText element 

from the submenu, for example, 

Page# to insert the current page number. 

4 Select Normal from the View menu when you are finished working with the 

Master Page. 

Adding AutoText Elements 7-5


Adding Free Floating Objects 

You can add shapes, lines, text boxes, and pictures to your chart. 


Drawing or Inserting Free Floating Objects page 7-6 

Formatting Free-floating Objects page 7-8 

Anchoring Free-floating Objects to Boxes Page 7-8 

Binding Free-floating Objects page 7-9 

Changing Object Order page 7-9 

Aligning Objects page 7-10 

Drawing or Inserting Free Floating Objects 

This section describes how to work with the following free-floating objects: 

Drawing Shapes page 7-6 

Drawing Lines page 7-7 

Inserting Text Boxes page 7-7 

Inserting Pictures page 7-8 

Drawing Shapes 

Shapes (rectangles, rounded rectangles and octagons) can be inserted anywhere in 

your chart. Once drawn the shape can be repositioned or resized. 

➣ To draw a shape: 

1 Select Shape | Rectangle from the Insert menu, or click the Rectangle tool 

. The cursor changes to a crosshair . 

Note: You can also select other shapes, such as an Octagon. 

2 Click and drag on the chart to draw a rectangle. 



CHAPTER 7 

 

3 Click on the Select tool (or press ) to deselect the Shape tool. 

Drawing Lines 

You can draw both constrained (horizontal or vertical) and unconstrained (diagonal) 

lines. Once drawn a line can be repositioned or resized. 

➣ To draw a line: 

1 Select Line | Horizontal or Vertical from the Insert menu, or click the Horizontal 

or Vertical Line tool . 

Or 

Select Line | Diagonal from the Insert menu, or click the Diagonal Line tool 

. 

The cursor changes to a crosshair . 

2 Click and drag on the chart to draw a line. 

 

3 Click on the Select tool (or press ) to deselect the Line tool. 

Inserting Text Boxes 

Text boxes enable you enter text anywhere on your chart. Once added a text box 

can be reformatted, repositioned or resized. 

➣ To create a text box: 

1 Select Text Box from the Insert menu, or click the Insert Text tool . The 

cursor changes to a 

Symbol. 

2 Click on the chart and start typing. 

3 When you have entered all the text, click again. The text is displayed in a text 

box as follows: 

Adding Free Floating Objects 7-7


4 Click on the Select tool (or press ) to deselect the Insert Text tool. 

Inserting Pictures 

You can insert pictures to a chart as free-floating objects. 

➣ To insert pictures as free-floating objects: 

1 Select Picture from the Insert menu, or click the Insert Picture button . 

The Select Picture dialog box is displayed. 

2 Select an image file. 

3 Click Open to embed the picture in your chart as a free-floating object. 

4 You can reposition the picture by clicking on it and dragging it to a new location. 

5 Note: Click the down-arrow on the right of the Open button and select Open as 

Link to link the picture in your chart. Linked pictures are not included in chart 

files; only a reference to the picture is included. 

Formatting Free-floating Objects 

You can format the shapes, lines, text boxes (and the text within them) and pictures 

that are displayed in charts using the same techniques as described in Chapter 4, 

Working with Charts: Basic Functions. 

Anchoring Free-floating Objects to Boxes 

Free-floating objects can be linked to a chart box using the anchor function. Once 

anchored, a free floating object remains positioned next to the selected box even if 

the box is moved within the chart. 

➣ To anchor a free floating object to a chart box: 

1 Select a chart box and at least one object, for example, a text box. 



CHAPTER 7 

2 Select Anchor from the Insert menu. 

➣ To unanchor a free floating object from a chart box: 

1 Select the anchored object you want to unanchor. 

2 Select Unanchor from the Insert menu. 

Binding Free-floating Objects 

When a free-floating object is placed on a page, it automatically repositions itself as 

the page is resized. In rare cases, you may want to change how an object is bound 

to a page (especially the master page). 

➣ To change the binding of a free floating object: 

1 Select an object. 

2 Right-click on the object and select a Bind To option. As the page is resized the 

object is repositioned according to the selected option. 

Changing Object Order 

The relative order of free-floating objects in your chart can be changed. The process 

is similar to changing the order of objects in PowerPoint. 

➣ To change the relative order of free floating objects: 

1 Select the object whose order you want to change relative to other objects. For 

example, in the following diagram the Square is selected. 



2 Select Order from the Format menu. 

Select from the following options: 

Bring to Front: Moves the selected object to the front. 

Send to Back: Moves the selected object to the back. 

Bring Forward: Moves the selected object one level forward. 

Send Backwards: Moves the selected object one level back. 

In the following example the square is moved one level forward using the Bring 

Forward option. 

 

Aligning Objects 

You can align free-floating objects. The process is similar aligning objects in 

PowerPoint. 

➣ To align free floating objects: 

1 Select the objects that you want to align. 

Note: Holding down the Ctrl key while clicking on a free-floating object enables 

you to select or unselect objects one at a time. 



CHAPTER 7 

2 Select Align from the Format menu. 

Select from following options: 

Align Left 

Align Center 

Align Right 

Align Top 

Align Middle 

Align Bottom 

In the following example the objects are aligned to the left. 

 



Adding Hyperlinks to Objects 

You can add hyperlinks to free floating objects. 

➣ To add hyperlinks to floating objects: 

1 Select the object you want to hyperlink 

2 Select Hyperlink from the Insert menu or right click on the object and select 

Hyperlink | Edit Hyperlink. 

3 Define the hyperlink. 

4 Note: The title is shown when you mouse over a hyperlinked object. 

5 Click OK.0 

Note: Ctrl-Click an object to follow a hyperlink. Right click and select Hyperlink 

| Remove Hyperlink to delete a hyperlink. 

Adding Auxiliary Lines 

You can add auxiliary lines between boxes to show additional information about 

reporting relationships, such as dotted line reporting. For example, in the following 

diagram, a dotted line shows the reporting relationship between Sue Watkins and 

Tina Nomura. 

➣ To draw an auxiliary line between two boxes: 

1 Select Line | Auxiliary from the Insert menu or click the Auxiliary Line tool 

. 

2 Move the pointer over a box. Anchor point symbols appear on all four sides of 

the box and in the middle of the box. Move the mouse to one of the anchor 

points and click and drag toward another box. 



CHAPTER 7 

3 Once over the other box, the same anchor point symbols are displayed. Release 

the mouse button over the desired anchor point. Releasing the mouse over the 

center anchor point will automatically pick the optimal anchor point. 

Note: When importing data from an external data source, you can use the 

AuxReportsTo advanced data field to define auxiliary lines in your charts. See 

Importing Advanced Data Fields in Chapter 9: Importing and Exporting Data for 

more information. 

Adding Legends 

You can add legends to your chart. Each legend contains one or more color coded 

legend entries. Once a legend has been inserted, it can be moved or resized in the 

same manner as other free floating objects. 

The following diagram contains a legend that color codes full time, part time, and 

contract employees. 

A legend consists of the following elements: 

Adding Legends 7-13


Note: Legends are often linked to Conditional Formats. You may want to create 

conditional formats before creating a legend. See Creating a Conditional Format on 

page 7-48 for more information on conditional formats. 

➣ To add a legend manually: 

1 If you want the legend to be shown with every sub-chart, select Master Page 

from the View menu. 

2 Select Legend… from the Insert menu to display the Legend Properties dialog 

box. 

3 Make sure the Legend tab is selected. Click Add to add a legend entry. Repeat 

to add any number of legend entries. 

4 To name an entry, click in the corresponding row in the entry column and enter 

a name. 

5 Click the Format Entry… button to set the font properties for an entry. 

Note: To delete a legend entry, select the entry and click on the Delete button. 

6 To format the key for an entry, click in the corresponding row in the key column 

and then select the Format Key button or click the button. The Format 

Legend Key Properties dialog box is displayed. 



CHAPTER 7 

7 Use the Color and Lines tab and the Shadow tab to set the display properties 

for each key. You can also use the Conditional Formats tab to edit a key linked 

to a conditional format. 

8 Click OK. 

9 Use the Color and Lines tab and the Shadow tab to set the display properties 

for the entire legend. 

10 Click OK. 0 

➣ To create a legend based on conditional formatting: 

If you use conditional formats to differentiate the boxes in your chart, you can create 

a legend for your chart that is based on those conditional formats. See Conditional 

Formatting in this chapter for details on creating and applying conditional formats. 

1 Open a chart that includes conditional formats. 

2 Select Legend… from the Insert menu to display the Legend Properties dialog 

box. 

3 Click the Conditional Formats tab. This tab is available only if you have defined 

conditional formats. 

Adding Legends 7-15


4 Select Auto to create a legend that includes all the defined conditional formats 

or select only the conditional formats you want to include in your legend. You 

can use the checkboxes to select individual conditions, or click the Check All 

button. 

Note: You can return to this dialog box by double-clicking the legend in your 

chart. 

➣ To delete a legend: 

1 Select a legend. 

Note: If the legend is located in the master page, select Master Page from the 

View menu. Select Normal from the View menu after deleting the legend. 

2 Select Delete from the Edit menu or hit the Delete key on your keyboard. 

➣ To edit a legend: 

1 Right-click on a legend and select Legend Properties… from the context menu. 

The Legend Properties dialog is displayed. 


View menu. Select Normal from the View menu after editing the legend. 

2 Modify the legend properties using the Color and Lines, Shadow, Legend and 

Conditional Formats tabs. 

3 Click OK.0 

➣ To edit a legend entry: 

1 Select a legend. 


View menu. Select Normal from the View menu after editing the legend. 

2 Select any legend entry. 

3 Right-click and select Format Key… from the context menu. The Legend Key 

Properties dialog is displayed. 

4 Modify the legend entry properties using the Color and Lines, Shadow, and 

Conditional Formats tabs. 

5 Click OK. 

Note: Click any label within a legend to edit the legend entry name. 



CHAPTER 7 

Creating and Modifying Templates 

OrgPlus provides a variety chart design, box and branch templates. You can also 

create or modify your own templates. This section describes how you can create or 

modify your own templates. 


Learning About Templates page 7-17 

Creating Design, Box, and Branch Templates page 7-17 

Multi-record Boxes and Templates Page 7-18 

Modifying Templates page 7-18 

Learning About Templates 

There are a number of factors to keep in mind when creating your own templates: 

• Box and design templates do not change which fields are displayed in a box. Box 

and design templates change only the format and font selection parameters. To 

change the box layout, see Applying File Templates in this chapter. 

Creating Design, Box, and Branch Templates 

OrgPlus enables you to create new templates from an existing file or template. 

➣ To create a new template: 

1 Select Open from the File menu. The Open dialog box is displayed. 

2 Select an existing chart or template file and click Open. 

3 Save the chart as a template. 

If you want to save the template as a Design template: 

a Select Save As from the File menu, and choose the file type OrgPlus 7 

Template File (*.opxt). 

Note: If you save this file in your MyCharts/Templates folder, it automatically 

appears in the design section of the templates panel. 

If you want to save the template as a Box template: 

b 

Delete all boxes in your chart, except for the box that defines the template. 

c Select Save As from the File menu and choose the file type OrgPlus 7 


Creating and Modifying Templates 7-17


Note: If you save this file in your MyCharts/Templates/Box folder, it 

automatically appears in the box section of the templates panel. 

If you want to save the template as a Branch template: 

a 

Create the branch layout structure that you want by always adding child 

boxes to the left most node in the chart. 

b Select Save As from the File menu and choose the file type OrgPlus 7 


Note: If you save this file in your MyCharts/Templates/Branch folder, it 

automatically appears in the branch section of the templates panel. 

Multi-record Boxes and Templates 

When creating or modifying templates, you can define the layout for multi-record 

boxes. When you apply a template file containing one or more multi-record boxes to 

a chart, the template’s multi-record box layout is applied to the multi-record boxes 

in the chart. 

Modifying Templates 

OrgPlus enables you to modify templates. 

➣ To modify templates: 

1 Select Open from the File menu or click the Open button . The Open dialog 

box is displayed. 

2 Select any template file (of type .opxt) and click Open. 

3 Modify the file/template as required, in the same way as working with a chart. 

4 Select Save As from the File menu. 

5 Select OrgPlus 7 Template File (*.opxt) from the Save as type drop-down list. 

6 Click Save. You may be prompted to replace the existing file, in this case click 

Yes. 



CHAPTER 7 

Using Templates 

Templates provide a quick way to format your chart. You can also use Template 

files to copy reports, directories, groups, conditional formats, and profiles from an 

existing file to your current file. 


Using the Templates Panel page 7-19 

Applying Template Files page 7-21 

Using the Templates Panel 

OrgPlus provides a variety of chart design, box and branch templates. You can also 

create or modify your own templates. 


Applying Design Templates page 7-19 

Applying Branch Templates page 7-20 

Applying Box Templates page 7-20 

Applying Design Templates 

Design templates allow you to format an existing chart. They do not modify what 

fields are shown in the chart or the branch styles used in the chart. Design templates 

change the look and feel of your chart. 

➣ To apply design templates: 

1 If the Template Panel is not shown, select Template from the View menu. 

2 Click the Design button to display design templates. 

3 Drag the chosen template to the chart area and release the mouse button. The 

template is applied. 

4 Right-click a design templates to select from the following options: 

Apply to Sub-chart: Applies the template to the displayed sub-chart. 

Apply to Entire Chart: Applies the template to the entire chart (all defined subcharts). 

Note: By default a design template is applied to all sub-charts within a chart. 

Using Templates 7-19


Applying Branch Templates 

Branch templates allow you change the branch style of an existing chart. Branch 

templates only reformat the layout of your chart. 

➣ To apply a branch template: 


2 Click the Branch button in the template panel to display branch templates. 

3 Drag the chosen template to the chart area and release the mouse button. The 


4 Right-click a design template and select from the following options: 



5 Note: By default a branch template is applied to all sub-charts within a chart.0 

Applying Box Templates 

Box templates allow you change the format for any set of boxes in your chart. Box 

templates change only the format of boxes; the content of boxes remains 

unchanged. 

➣ To apply a box template: 


2 Click the Box button in the template panel to display box templates. 

3 Drag the chosen template over any box and release the mouse button. The 


4 Right-click a box template and select from the following options: 

Apply to Selection: Applies the template to the selected boxes. 





CHAPTER 7 

Applying Template Files 

Template files enable you to copy the look and feel from an existing template file to 

your chart. You can also copy Directory, Profile, Report, Group and Conditional 

Format definitions from the template file. 

➣ To apply template files: 

1 Select Apply Template File from the Chart menu. 

2 Choose a template and click Open. The Apply Template dialog box is 

displayed. 

3 To reformat your chart: 

In the Apply what area, select Look and Feel. 

In the Apply To area, select one of the following options: 

Entire chart: Applies the template to the entire chart. 

Active sub-chart: Applies the template to the displayed sub-chart. 

Selection: Applies the template to the selected boxes. 

4 If you want to copy selected definitions from the template: 

In the Apply what area, select Contents. 

Using Templates 7-21


Choose the elements to import: 

• Design 

• Copy Box Layout 

Note: If your template file contains a multi-record box, checking the 

Copy Box Layout checkbox applies the template’s multi-record box 

layout to the chart’s multi-record boxes. 

• Copy Reports 

• Copy Profiles 

• Copy Master Page 

• Copy Constants 

• Branch 

• Copy Directories 

• Copy Groups 

• Copy Conditional Formats 

• Copy Chart Rules 

• Copy Search 

5 Click OK to apply the template. 

Note: Selecting Contents reformats the entire chart to match the template file. 

The fields shown in boxes, branch styles, box formatting, and chart properties 

are updated to match the template file. 

Note: If the template file contains fields that are not defined in the current 

chart, you are prompted to add the additional fields to your chart. 



CHAPTER 7 

Defining Dynamic Fields 

This section describes the various types of calculations available in OrgPlus, and how 

to define a formula field. Formulas are not available in OrgPlus Express. 


Adding Formulas Page 7-23 

Available Formulas Page 7-26 

Calculations Page 7-27 

Formula Options Page 7-29 

Adding Formulas 

➣ To define a formula field: 

1 Click the Define Fields tool or select Define Fields from the Data menu to 

display the Define Fields dialog box. 

When you specify a field as a Formula, OrgPlus displays the Formula Properties 

dialog box. You can also edit an existing formula by clicking the Formula button 

. The following is an example of the Formula Properties dialog box with 

the Average drop-down list option selected. 

Defining Dynamic Fields 7-23


2 Select the Formula tab. 

3 Select a formula from the left-most drop-down list. See Available Formulas on 

page 7-26 for formula definitions. 

4 If the selected formula requires a field, select a field from top-middle drop-down 

list. 

5 Based on the selected type of formula, you must select the boxes that you want 

to include in this calculation. You can specify the boxes to include (using the 

right-most drop-down) as follows: 

Co-workers: All boxes sharing the same manager, including the manager's 

assistants. 

Level: All boxes on the same level in the chart. 

Branch and Mgr: All boxes in a branch, including the branch's manager. 

Branch Excl. Mgr: All boxes in a branch, excluding the branch's manager. 

Dir Sub and Manager: All direct subordinates of a single manager, including 

the manager. 

Dir Subordinates: All direct subordinates of a single manager, excluding the 

manager. 



CHAPTER 7 

Entire Chart: All boxes in the chart. 

Current Mgr: A box's direct manager (one level up). 

All Mgrs Inclusive: The path of managers from the top of the tree down to that 

box, including the box. 

All Managers Exclusive: The path of managers from the top of the tree down 

to that box, excluding the box. 

Top of Chart: The number of boxes at the top level of the chart. 

Self: The current box. 

6 Optionally, you can perform a calculation (divide, multiply, add, or subtract) on 

multiple arguments. See Calculations in this chapter for more information. 

7 If required, you can specify which boxes are to be included or excluded from a 

calculation by creating a conditional formula. To create a conditional formula, 

select the Criteria tab. Select the Define Criteria checkbox and then define 

the criteria for inclusion. 

➣ To define formula options: 

1 Use the Options tab to specify formula options such as a min and max result. 

See Formula Options section in this chapter for more details. 

2 Click OK to save the formula. 



Available Formulas 

The following formulas are available in OrgPlus. 

Numeric Formulas 

The following formulas are for use with number fields. 

Average: Compute an average of the selected number field for all specified 

boxes. 

Non-zero count: Count the number of specified boxes that do not contain a 

number field with a zero value. 

Fraction of Total: Compute the percentage of a total. First sum the field across 

all specified boxes, and then divide into the field value for each box. 

Maximum/Minimum: Determines the maximum or minimum value of the 

selected field across all specified boxes. 

Product: Multiply the values of the selected field across the specified boxes. 

Standard Deviation: Compute the standard deviation for the selected field and 

boxes. 

Total: Sum the selected field across the specified boxes. 

Variance: Compute the variance for the selected field. 

General Formulas 

Equals: Perform a calculation using a field or set of fields. For example, 

performance change = current performance – last year’s performance. 

ReportsTo: Get a value from a manager’s field. 

Text Formulas 

The following formulas are for use with text fields. 

Upper: Convert a text field to all upper case. 

Lower: Convert all letters in a text field to lowercase. 

Trim: Remove all spaces from a text field except for single spaces between 

words. 

Len: Return the number of characters in a text field. 

Count: Count the number of specified boxes. 

Mid: Return a sub-string from the middle of a text field. For example, 

Mid(3,3,”ABC123”) = C12. 

Left: Return a sub-string from the start of a text field. For example, 

Left(3,”ABC123”) = ABC. 



CHAPTER 7 

Right: Return a sub-string from the end of a text field. For example, 

Right(3,”ABC123”) = 123. 

Date Formulas 

The following formulas are for use with date fields. 

Year: Return the year from the selected date field. 

Month: Return the month (1-12) from the selected date field. 

Day: Return the day from the selected date field. 

Chart Formulas 

The following formulas allow you to access information about your chart hierarchy: 

Level: Return chart level for a box. 

Sub-levels: Return number of subordinate levels for a box. 

Occurrences: Return number of times a box appears in the chart based on the 

duplicate identifier (dotted line) key. 

Allocation: Return 1/ Occurrences. For example, if a person appears four times 

in chart their allocation is 0.25. 

Calculations 

Within a formula, you can perform a calculation. 

Below are some sample calculations: 

Field + Field: Total Compensation = Salary + Bonus 

Field * Value: Next Year Salary = Current Salary * 1.05 

Constant - Field: Year To Retirement = RETIREMENT AGE – Current Age 



Note: See Using Constants in this chapter for more information on Constants. 

You can also perform date calculations using the TODAY constant and/or the Year, 

Month, and Day functions. 

Below are some sample date calculations: 

Years_with_company: Today – Hire_Date 

Months_since_last_review: Today – Review_Date 

➣ To define a calculation within a formula: 

1 With the Formula dialog open and the formula tab selected, define the first 

argument type. The following types are available: 

• Field 

• Text 

• Number 

• Date 

• Date (Years) 

• Date (Months) 

• Date (Days) 

• Constant 

2 Select or type an argument value. 



CHAPTER 7 

3 Select a range. Available Formulas on page 7-26. 

4 Select an operator (/, *, +, -). 

5 Define the type for the second argument. 

6 Select or type a value for the second argument. 

Optionally, you can also define a third argument using the same procedure as 

noted in the steps above. 

7 Click OK. 

Formula Options 

The Options tab in the Formula dialog allows you to further define how a formula 

will be computed. The following formula options are available: 

• Min: Specify the minimum value returned by the formula. 

• Max: Specify the maximum value returned by the formula. 

• Ignore Selected Group: By Default, if a group is applied, boxes that are not 

included in the group are not included in the current calculation. The Ignore 

Selected Group option includes all boxes in a calculation regardless of the 

selected group. If you turn this checkbox on, you can create a group based on a 

formula. 

• Exclude zero values: Select this option to exclude zero values from counts and 

products. 

• Exclude empty fields: Select this option to exclude empty fields from counts 

and products. 

• Assistants: Select whether the current formula includes assistants, excludes 

assistants or includes only assistants. An assistant is defined as any box with the 

assistant branch style. 

• Duplicates: Specify whether the current formula includes duplicate records 

(dotted line reports), excludes duplicate records, or allocates duplicate records. 

For example, if you select the allocation option, a person included in a chart 

three times has a value of 0.333 when one of the corresponding boxes is 

included in a count. 

Using Formulas 

OrgPlus can total budgets, revenues, project hours, and more. You can compare 

results between positions, departments, and divisions. 

Calculations can be performed only on Number, Date, and Text fields. 

• Number fields are used to enter discrete amounts, such as a salary or budget. 

Using Formulas 7-29


• Formula fields are calculated based on field values or chart properties (such as a 

count of subordinate boxes). 


Recalculating Formulas Automatically page 7-30 

Excluding Boxes from Formula Calculations page 7-30 

Recalculating Formulas Automatically 

By default, formulas are recalculated automatically each time a change is made to a 

chart. For large charts, you may want to turn automatic recalculation off to enhance 

performance. 

• Select Auto Recalculation from the Chart menu to turn automatic recalculation of 

formulas on and off. 

• If automatic recalculation is OFF, select Recalculate Formulas from the Chart 

menu to update all formula fields. 

• Caution: While Auto Recalculation is OFF, there is no indication that formulas are 

not up to date. 

Excluding Boxes from Formula Calculations 

Sometimes, you may want to exclude one or more boxes from a calculation. For 

example, a headcount calculation should not include vacant positions. 

➣ To exclude fields from calculations: 

1 Select the boxes that you want to exclude from a calculation. 

2 Select Box Properties from the Format menu and then click the Advanced 

tab. 

The Box Properties dialog box Advanced tab is displayed. 



CHAPTER 7 

3 Complete your selections as follows: 

Exclude from Calculations: Select a set of fields to exclude from calculated 

functions. 

Exclude from Counts: Select this option to exclude a box from count functions. 

4 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box. 

Using Constants 

OrgPlus allows you to define constants that you can use in formulas, conditional 

formats, groups, searches, reports and chart rules. Changing the value of a constant 

will update every element that references that constant. 

For example, you can define a conditional format that sets the color of a box based 

upon whether an employee was hired before or after a specific date. If you define a 

constant called cutoff date, and reference it in the conditional format, you can now 

easily visualize the impact of changing the value of the cutoff date. 

Using Constants 7-31



Adding and Deleting Constants page 7-32 

Referencing Constants page 7-34 

Adding and Deleting Constants 

You can create any number of constants that can be referenced when defining 

formulas, conditional formulas, groups, reports, conditional formats, chart rules, and 

in the search panel. 

➣ To add a constant: 

1 Select Define Constants… from the Data menu. The Define Constants dialog 

is displayed. 

2 Click Add. A constant is added. 

3 Name the constant by entering a name into the Name column. 

4 Set the field type by selecting from the Type drop-down list for that constant. 

The following options are available: 

• Text 

• Date 

• Number 

5 Enter a value for the constant into the Value column. 

➣ To edit a constant: 


is displayed. 

2 Click in the Value column associated with a constant. 

3 Edit the value for that constant as needed. 

4 Note: You can rename a constant by clicking in the Name column or you can 

change the type using the Type drop-down. 

➣ To delete a constant: 


is displayed. 

2 Select a constant by clicking in the first column associated with that constant. 



CHAPTER 7 

3 Click Delete. A warning message is displayed asking you to confirm that you 

want to permanently delete the constant. Click Yes to delete or No to cancel the 

action. All references to constants will be replaced by the last value stored in 

the constant. 

Using Constants 7-33


Referencing Constants 

In order to reference a constant, use the syntax, [$], when 

entering criteria for any comparison. 

For example, to reference a constant (called Retirement Age) in a conditional format 

you would enter the condition as follows: 

The value of the Retirement Age constant could be varied as part of a what-if 

analysis exercise. 



CHAPTER 7 

Working with Sub-charts 

Large charts can be subdivided into sub-charts. For example, an organization with 

four divisions can be presented as five sub-charts – one for the executive team, and 

one for each division. This section describes how to work with sub-charts. 

The following picture shows a chart after sub-charting. 


Inserting Sub-chart Breaks page 7-36 

Labeling Sub-chart Breaks Page 7-36 

Removing Sub-chart Breaks Page 7-36 

Navigating Sub-charts page 7-36 

Creating Sub-charts Using the Sub-chart Wizard Page 7-37 

Using the Sub-chart Panel page 7-38 

Working with Sub-charts 7-35


Inserting Sub-chart Breaks 

You can insert sub-chart breaks manually at any level in your chart. 

➣ To insert a manual sub-chart break: 

1 Select a box that will be the top position in your new sub-chart. 

2 Select Sub-chart | Insert Sub-chart Break from the Insert menu. The subchart 

is created. 

Labeling Sub-chart Breaks 

You can label your sub-chart breaks by defining labels to attach to the sub-chart 

arrows. Sub-chart arrow labels improve navigation within a large chart and enhance 

the usefulness of your printed and published charts. 

See Formatting Charts in Chapter 4 for details on defining labels for your sub-chart 

arrows. 

Removing Sub-chart Breaks 

You can remove sub-chart breaks one at a time or all at once. 

➣ To remove selected sub-chart breaks: 

• Select any boxes containing a sub-chart break ( ) and then select Sub-chart 

| Remove Sub-chart Break from the Insert menu. 

➣ To remove all sub-chart breaks in the entire chart: 

• Select Sub-chart | Remove All Breaks from the Insert menu. All the sub-chart 

breaks are removed. 

Navigating Sub-charts 

OrgPlus enables you to navigate sub-charts by clicking in the chart area or using the 

sub-charts panel. 

➣ To navigate sub-charts using symbols: 

1 Use the symbol to navigate down the sub-chart tree. 



CHAPTER 7 

2 Use the symbol to navigate up the sub-chart tree. 

Creating Sub-charts Using the Sub-chart Wizard 

The sub-chart wizard enables you to define a set of rules that are used to break your 

chart into sub-charts. 

➣ To create sub-charts using the Sub-chart Wizard: 

1 With the chart open, select Sub-chart | Create Sub-charts from the Insert 

menu to display the Create Sub-charts dialog box. 

2 Define your sub-charting options as follows: 

Create Sub-charts: Select one of the following criteria according to which subchart 

breaks should be created. 

• Every: Creates a sub-chart break at every nth level in the chart. 

• Using Field: Creates a sub-chart at each occurrence of the field. 

• At Level: Creates a sub-chart break at the specified levels. (Separate 

level numbers by comma.) 

• Condition: Defines a condition based on complex criteria. The 

Condition dialog is displayed. 

Smart Sub-chart breaks: Specify the minimum number of boxes in a branch 

before a break is inserted. 



Name Sub-charts: Specify how each sub-chart page should be named. Select 

from: 

• Default: All sub-charts are named based on the default: Sub-chart1, 

Sub-chart2, and so on. 

• From Field: All sub-charts are based on the value of the specified field. 

The field value is extracted from a box when a sub-chart break is 

inserted. 

Apply to: Specify whether the sub-chart rules are to be applied to the 

Entire Chart, the Active sub-chart, or the current Selection. 

3 Click OK. The chart is sub-charted according to the selected options. 

Note: By default, the Sub-chart panel is automatically displayed after creating 

sub-charts. Clear the View Sub-charts check box if you do not wish to display the 

Sub-chart panel. 

Using the Sub-chart Panel 

The Sub-chart panel lists the sub-charts in your chart using a tree structure. Clicking 

a sub-chart name displays the corresponding sub-chart. 



CHAPTER 7 

The Sub-charts panel toolbar provides the following functions: 

Icon Name 

Check All 

Description 

Select all sub-charts. 

Uncheck All Unselect all sub-charts. 

Create Subcharts 

Send to 

Excel 

Display the Create Sub-charts dialog box. 

Export data from selected sub-chart(s) to an Excel 

spreadsheet. 

Export Data Export data from selected sub-chart(s) using the Export 

Data dialog box. 

Reconnect 

Subchart(s) 

Print Subcharts 

OrgUnit 

Chart 

Remove sub-chart breaks from the selected sub-charts. 

Print the selected sub-charts. 

Create a chart of OrgUnits (or departments) from the 

hierarchy shown in the sub-charts panel. 

➣ To rename a sub-chart: 

1 Make sure the sub-chart panel is displayed by selecting Sub-charts from the 

View menu. 

2 Double-click a sub-chart. 

3 Type in a sub-chart name and press . 

➣ To navigate sub-charts using the Sub-chart panel. 

1 Click the Sub-charts tab on the lower right side of the main window, or select 

Sub-charts from the View menu if that tab is not available. The Sub-charts 

panel is displayed in the main window. 

2 Click on any sub-chart listed in the Sub-charts panel. The corresponding 

sub-chart is displayed. 



➣ To create an OrgUnit Chart: 

1 Make sure the sub-chart panel is displayed by selecting Sub-charts from the 

View menu. 

2 Click on the OrgUnit Chart button . 

3 Define your OrgUnit Chart options as follows: 

Sub-chart levels: Specify the number of levels to include when creating the 

OrgUnit chart. 

Include Headcounts: Specify whether to include headcounts when creating the 

OrgUnit chart. 

4 Click OK. An untitled OrgUnit Chart is created based on the selected options. 

Working with Multiple Charts 

OrgPlus projects can contain multiple charts, similar to the Microsoft Excel workbook 

and worksheet concept. Each chart within a project can show a unique view that 

displays different data fields, contains different formatting, and may even contain a 

different hierarchy. 

While the display of data may be different across multiple charts, the underlying 

data records are shared. Any changes made to data in one chart are always reflected 

in all other charts. 

The only exception is that a chart may have a unique hierarchy. For example, two 

project teams may contain the same individuals but with different reporting 

relationships. 


Creating New Charts page 7-41 

Renaming or Deleting Charts page 7-42 



CHAPTER 7 

Using Chart Tabs page 7-42 

Creating New Charts 

New charts in a project either share the same hierarchy as the original chart or have 

a different hierarchy. 

➣ To create a new chart in a project: 

1 Select Chart from the Insert menu, or right-click the chart's tab and select 

New Chart from the context menu. 

The New Chart dialog box is displayed. 

2 Define how you want the new chart to be created: 

Reporting: Indicate whether to keep the hierarchy synchronized with the current 

chart or whether to create a new hierarchy: 

• Share and maintain the project’s hierarchy across all charts: 

Copies the existing chart to a new chart. Changes to the hierarchy of the 

new chart are synchronized with the original chart. 

• Do not share, maintain unique hierarchy in this chart: Select from 

the following options: 

Empty Chart: Creates an empty chart with a new hierarchy. 

Entire Chart: Copies the existing chart to a new chart. Changes to the 

hierarchy of the new chart are NOT synchronized with the original chart. 

Reconnect all sub-charts: Remove all sub-chart breaks from the new chart. 

3 Click OK. The new chart is created and a new chart tab is added at the bottom of 

the main window. 

Working with Multiple Charts 7-41


Renaming or Deleting Charts 

When new charts are created, OrgPlus automatically assigns the default names, 

Chart1, Chart2, and so on. 

➣ To rename a chart: 

1 Right-click a chart tab and select Rename Chart from the pop-up menu to 

display the Rename Chart dialog box. 

2 Enter a new name and click OK. 

➣ To delete a chart: 

1 Do one of the following to delete a chart. 

Right-click the chart's tab and select Delete Chart from the pop-up menu. 

Select Delete Chart from the Edit menu. 

2 In the confirmation dialog box, click Delete to delete the chart. 

Using Chart Tabs 

If you have multiple charts in your project, you can switch between charts using 

chart tabs. 

➣ To view another chart: 

Do one of the following: 

• Select a chart tab at the bottom of the main window. 

• Select Chart List from the Chart menu and select the required chart. 



CHAPTER 7 

Advanced Chart Layout 

This section describes the methods for formatting a chart. 


Grouping Boxes Page 7-43 

Demoting Boxes Page 7-44 

Spacing Chart Boxes page 7-43 

Optimizing Chart Layout page 7-45 

Positioning Charts page 7-46 

Grouping Boxes 

The group function is used to group one or more peers that report to the same 

manager. 

➣ To group or ungroup boxes 


2 Select the boxes that you wish to group (Use shift-click to select multiple boxes). 

All selected boxes must report to the same manager, 

Advanced Chart Layout 7-43


3 Right-click on any of the selected boxes. 

4 Select Actions | Group Right or Actions | Group Left to the boxes. 

Note: Any box that has been grouped can be ungrouped by right-clicking on that 

box and selecting Actions | Ungroup. 

Note: Boxes can also be grouped by selecting one or more boxes that share a 

common manager and then selecting a branch style for those boxes. 

Note: Boxes can also be grouped using a data driven approach, see Chart Rules 

on page 7-52 for more information. 

Demoting Boxes 

The demote function is used to drop any box down one or more levels in a chart. 

➣ To demote or promote a box 


2 Right-click on the box that you want to promote or demote. 

3 Select Actions | Demote Right or Actions | Demote Left to demote a box 

one level. Repeat to demote additional levels. 

Note: Any box that has been demoted can be promoted by right-clicking on that 

box and selecting Actions | Promote. 

Note: Boxes can also be demoted using a data driven approach, see Chart Rules 




CHAPTER 7 

Spacing Chart Boxes 

You can change the spacing between boxes in your chart. 

➣ To adjust the spacing between boxes: 

1 If you want to change the spacing for a set of boxes, select the boxes and their 

manager. 

Note: If nothing is selected the spacing for all boxes in the current sub-chart is 

changed. 

2 Select Spacing from the Format menu. 

The Box Spacing dialog box is displayed. 

3 Change the spacing as desired. 

Note: Click Restore Defaults to reset to the default spacing. 

4 Click OK to change the spacing between boxes. 

Optimizing Chart Layout 

The Optimize Branch Styles function reformats the branches in your chart to 

optimize the distribution of boxes on a page. 

➣ To optimize the branch styles in your chart: 

• Select Optimize Branch Styles from the Chart menu. 

Advanced Chart Layout 7-45


Positioning Charts 

You can center your chart vertically and/or horizontally on the page or you can 

manually position your chart. 

➣ To center your chart: 

• Select Center Up/Down from the Chart menu. The chart is centered vertically 

from page. 

• Select Center Left/Right from the Chart menu. The chart is centered horizontally 

from page. 

➣ To reposition your chart manually: 

• Select the move chart tool and click and drag the chart to a new position. 

Multi-record Boxes 

You can create boxes that contain more then one record. For example, you can 

display an entire sales staff in one box. 

Note: See Using the Import Wizard in Chapter 9 for more information on creating 

Multi-record boxes from imported data. 

➣ To define a multi-record box: 


2 Select Box Properties from the Format menu. The Box Properties dialog box 

is displayed. 

3 Click the Box Layout tab. 

4 Click the Layout Options… button to display the Layout Options dialog box. 

5 Select the Multi-Record Box checkbox and click OK to return to the Box 

Layout display. 



CHAPTER 7 

6 Click the Show Sub-box Properties checkbox to edit the sub-box. The Subbox 

Properties works in the same fashion as the Box Properties dialog (See 

Formatting Boxes Chapter 4). 

Note: As you add or remove fields from a multi-record box, the layout defined 

for the sub-box will be repeated for each record in the multi-record box. 

7 When you are done editing the sub-box, uncheck the Show Sub-box properties 

checkbox. 

8 Click OK to update. 

Note: See Defining and Displaying Fields in Chapter 4 for more layout options. 

Note: You can reorder records within a multi-record box using drag and drop in 

the chart. 

➣ To format multi-record boxes with templates: 

See Multi-record Boxes and Templates in this Chapter. 

Multi-record Boxes 7-47


Conditional Formatting 

Conditional formatting enables you to dynamically apply formatting to a sub-set of a 

chart that meets specific criteria. OrgPlus applies conditional formats from the first 

defined condition to the last defined condition. 

Note: When two or more conditions address the same format element, OrgPlus 

applies the last condition only. 


Creating a Conditional Format page 7-48 

Modifying Conditional Formats Page 7-50 

Creating a Conditional Format 

A conditional format consists of a condition and a format, where the format is 

applied to boxes that meet the condition. 

➣ To create a condition: 

1 Select Conditional Formatting from the Format menu to display the 

Conditional Formatting dialog box.. 

Note: You can duplicate an existing conditional format using the Copy button. 

2 Click Add to display the Define Conditional Formatting Properties dialog box. 



CHAPTER 7 

3 Enter the condition name in the Condition Name field. 

4 Define the criteria for the condition as follows: 

Define the first search criteria expression by selecting from the Field Name and 

Comparison drop-down lists. Then enter the comparison string in the Contents 

field. 

Define any additional search criteria in the second and subsequent lines by 


Select Match Case to match only words that are capitalized the same way as 


Select Match Whole Word to match only complete words that match the 

Contents field entries. 

Note: Use the Constants… button to include any defined constants in the 

condition. See Using Constants on page 7-31 for more information on using 

constants. 

5 Optionally, you can limit a conditional format to one or more levels in your chart 

as follows: 

Select the Limit to checkbox and select chart or sub-chart from the drop-down 

list to limit the conditional format to a level(s) within the entire chart or a 

level(s) within the current sub-chart. 

Define the level range(s) to which you want the conditional format limit to apply. 

Conditional Formatting 7-49


6 Click OK. The Conditional Formatting Rule is added to the list of rules in the 

Conditional Formatting dialog box. 

7 Select the condition and use the Format Box, Format Fields, or Format 

Connector buttons to define a format. Use the Clear Format button to reset 

formatting as needed. 

Note: The Use Selection button in the Box Properties dialog will copy the 

formatting information from the currently selected chart box. This can save time 

when setting up conditional formats. 

8 Click OK. The format is applied to all boxes in all charts that meet the condition. 

Note: You can disable a condition by clearing that condition’s check box. 

Modifying Conditional Formats 

Conditional Formatting Rules can be edited, deleted or reordered at any time. 


Editing Conditional Formats page 7-50 

Deleting Conditional Formats page 7-51 

Reordering Conditional Formats page 7-51 

Editing Conditional Formats 

You may need to modify the criteria for a condition or the format that is applied to 

boxes that meet a condition. 

➣ To edit a conditional format: 


Conditional Formatting dialog box listing all the defined Conditional 

Formatting Rules. 

2 Select a condition and click Edit to modify the condition’s criteria. 

3 Click the Format Box, Format Fields or Format Connector buttons to modify 

the format. Click Clear Format to reset the formatting. 

4 Click OK to close the Conditional Formatting dialog box. 



CHAPTER 7 

Deleting Conditional Formats 

You can remove a conditional format at any time. 

➣ To delete a conditional format: 


Conditional Formatting dialog box. 

2 Select a condition. 

3 Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. 

4 Click Yes to delete the condition. 


Reordering Conditional Formats 

Each condition is applied to the chart starting with the first condition and ending with 

last condition. Any box in your chart may satisfy two or more conditions. In this case 

you may need to reorder conditions to achieve the desired formatting. 

➣ To reorder a conditional format: 

1 Select Conditional Formatting from the Format menu to display the Conditional 

Formatting dialog box. 

2 Select a condition. 

3 Click the up arrow to move the condition up. 

4 Click the down arrow to move the condition down. 


Conditional Formatting 7-51


Chart Rules 

You can define Chart Rules that enable you to change branch styles within a chart 

based on a condition and/or perform an action (group left, group right, demote left 

or demote right) based on a defined condition. Chart Rules can be applied at any 

time including after a data refresh. (See Chapter 10, Publishing your Chart.) 


Creating Chart Rules page 7-52 

Modifying Chart Rules Page 7-53 

Creating Chart Rules 

A chart rule enables you to define a condition, an action and/or a style. When the 

condition is met, the action and/or style is applied to boxes to which the rule applies. 

➣ To create a chart rule: 

1 Select Chart Rules from the Format menu to display the Chart Rules dialog 

box. 

2 Click Add. The Chart Rules dialog box Define Chart Rule tab is displayed. 

3 Enter the rule name in the Chart Rule Name field. 

4 Define the criteria for the rule as follows: 

Define the first search criteria expression by selecting from the Field Name and 

Comparison drop-down lists. Then enter the comparison string in the Contents 

field. 



CHAPTER 7 

Define any additional search criteria in the second and subsequent lines by 


Select Match Case to match only words that are capitalized the same way as 


Select Whole Word Only to match only complete words that match the 

Contents field entries. 

Note: Use the Constants… button to include any defined constants in the 

condition. See Using Constants on page 7-31 for more information on using 

constants. 

5 Optionally, you can limit a chart rule to one or more levels in your chart as 

follows: 

Select the Limit to checkbox and then select chart or sub-chart from the dropdown 

list to specify whether to limit the chart rule to a level(s) within the entire 

chart or a level(s) within the current sub-chart. 

Define the level range(s) to which you want the chart rule limit to apply. 

6 Click OK. The chart rule is added to the list of rules in the Chart Rules dialog 

box. 

7 Select the chart rule and use the Chart Style or Action buttons to select a style 

or action to associate with the chart rule. Click Clear to reset the style and 

action. 

8 Note: By default, boxes are demoted one level if you associate a demote action 

with a chart rule. If needed, you can use the levels drop-down list in the Actions 

dialog to specify any number of levels to demote. 

9 Click OK. The style and/or action are applied to all boxes in all charts that meet 

the chart rule. 

Note: You can disable a chart rule by clearing that chart rule’s check box. 

Modifying Chart Rules 

Chart Rules can be edited, deleted or reordered at any time. 


Editing Chart Rules page 7-54 

Deleting Chart Rules page 7-54 

Reordering Chart Rules page 7-54 

Chart Rules 7-53


Editing Chart Rules 

You may need to modify the criteria for a chart rule or the style/action that is applied 

to boxes that meet the conditions defined by a chart rule. 

➣ To edit a chart rule: 

1 Select Chart Rules from the Format menu. The Chart Rules dialog box listing 

all the defined chart rules is displayed. 

2 Select a chart rule and click Edit to modify the chart rule’s criteria. 

3 Click the Action or Style buttons to modify the format. Click Clear to reset the 

formatting. 

4 Click OK to close the Chart Rules dialog box. 

Deleting Chart Rules 

You can remove a chart rule at any time. 

➣ To delete a chart rule: 

1 Select Chart Rules from the Format menu. The Chart Rules dialog box is 

displayed. 

2 Select a rule. 

3 Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box is displayed. 

4 Click Yes to delete the rule. 


Reordering Chart Rules 

Each chart rule is applied to the chart starting with the first chart rule and ending 

with last chart rule. Any box in your chart may satisfy two or more chart rules. In 

this case you may need to reorder chart rules to achieve the desired formatting. 

➣ To reorder a chart rule: 

1 Select Chart Rules from the Format menu. The Chart Rules dialog box is 

displayed. 

2 Select a chart rule. 

3 Click the up arrow to move the chart rule up. 

4 Click the down arrow to move the chart rule down. 




CHAPTER 7 

Creating Off-page References 

Using URIs (Uniform Resource Identifiers), you can enhance navigation within your 

charts. Any hyperlink, within a box or free text object can navigate to another box 

within the chart, another sub-chart within the chart, another tab within the project 

or even an entirely different chart. 

Note: To define a URI you need a field that is defined as a hyperlink. Please see 

Defining and Displaying Fields in Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Charting. 

Using Off-page References you can create links to: 

• A box within a chart or sub-chart. 

• A sub-chart within a chart. 

• A chart within a project. 

• A project file within a file system. 

➣ To define an off-page reference: 

1 Right click a hyperlink field in your chart and select Hyperlink | Edit Hyperlink 

from the context menu to display the Hyperlink Properties dialog box. 

The Title text box displays the hyperlink text you selected. The Link text box 

displays the URI or destination of the hyperlink. 

2 Optionally, you can change the title of the link using the Title: text entry. This 

does not change the link’s destination. 

3 You can specify a URI in using the Link: text entry. The syntax for a URI is 

defined in the next section. 

4 Click OK. 

Creating Off-page References 7-55


URI Syntax 

Create your off-page references using the following URI syntax: 

orgplus:[filename]?[chart=]&[subchart=]&[field=] 

Orgplus: 

[filename] 

This tag is required to tell OrgPlus that the link is 

an off-page reference and not a typical 

hyperlink. 

The filename parameter identifies the OrgPlus 

file to which the URI refers. The value of this 

parameter can be a fully qualified file name (i.e. 

C:\charts\myChart.opx), a relative filename (i.e. 

myChart.opx), or omitted completely to search 

the current file. 

? Use to identify the end of the file name and the 

beginning of the query parameters. 

[chart=] 

[subchart=] 

[field=] 

This parameters specifies the chart (or tab) in 

the filename to search. If omitted, OrgPlus will 

search all charts in the project file. 

This parameter specifies the sub-chart to query. 

If omitted, OrgPlus will query all sub-charts in 

the project file. 

This parameter identifies specific field data to 

use in the query. Multiple fields can be added to 

a single URI using the & symbol to separate 

them. 

Entering the following URI would create a hyperlink to the Ken Gorman record in 

the Sales sub-chart on the 2007 chart (tab) in the C:\myChart.opx file: 

orgplus:C:\myChart.opx?chart=2007&subchart=Sales&field=Ken Gorman 



CHAPTER 7 

Note: Some characters cannot be used in your 

URI. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) has 

identified substitute for these characters using the 

percent encoded octet. This table provides the 

substitute codes for the most common restricted 

characters. For a complete list and detailed 

information, please refer to the W3C at: 

http://www.w3.org/. 

Restricted 

Character 

Substitute 

Code 

& %26 

= %3D 

# %23 

Space %20 


Creating Off-page References 7-57



Chapter 8 

OrgPlus Panels 



Working with Reports page 8-2 

Working with Directories Page 8-12 

Working with Profiles page 8-20 

Working with Trees Page 8-31 

Searching Charts Page 8-34 

Working with Comments Page 8-40 

Overview 

OrgPlus includes a number of panels to help you navigate, search and analyze your 

organizational charts. These features are available only in OrgPlus Standard and 

Professional. 

The Reports panel enables you to create and view both static and dynamic reports 

based on your underlying chart data. 

The Directory panel provides a tabular list of information based on the underlying 

chart data. 

The Profile panel enables you to display additional information about a chart box 

without cluttering the chart. For example, an employee photo or pager number can 

be viewed without adding those fields to each box. 

The Tree panel provides an alternate way to view, reorganize, add, change, or 

delete chart records. 

The Search panel allows you to search charts for all records that meet a set of 

criteria. The search panel is useful for orphan management, succession planning, 

and data mining. 

8-1


The Comments panel allows you to quickly view and edit all comments associated 

with a particular chart. 

Working with Reports 


Using the Reports Panel page 8-2 

Managing Reports page 8-3 

Displaying Reports page 8-11 

Working with Directories Page 8-12 

Using the Reports Panel 

This section describes how to work with the Reports panels. 

➣ To access the reports panel: 

• Select Reports from the View menu. The Reports panel is displayed. 

8-2 Working with Reports


CHAPTER 8 

The Reports panel has the following elements: 

Element Name Description 

Report 

Selector 

Display 

Options 

Print Report 

Select reports from the drop-down list. 

Select the sub-set of the chart data to be used for 

building your report. See Creating Reports on page 

8-3. 

Print the displayed report. 

Print Preview 

Page Setup 

Preview how the currently displayed report looks 

when printed. 

Change the page settings. 

Copy Report 

Copy the report contents to the Clipboard. 

Send Report to 

Excel 

Manage 

Reports 

Edit Current 

Report 

Export the current report to an Excel spreadsheet. 

Add, modify or delete reports. 

Modify the displayed report. 

Managing Reports 

This section describes how to add, modify or delete reports. 

Creating Reports 

This section describes how to create new reports. 

➣ To create a new report: 

1 With the Reports panel open do one of the following: 

• Click the link Click here to create a report if no reports have been created 

previously. 

• Click the Manage Reports button . The Manage Reports dialog box is 

displayed. 

Working with Reports 8-3


Click Add. The Report dialog box is displayed. 

The Select Fields tab enables you to name the report and specify the fields to 

include. 

2 In Report name: type the name of your report. 

The Available Fields list displays the fields available for your report. 

3 Use the following elements to select the fields you want in your report: 



CHAPTER 8 

Element Function Description 

> Add Field Include the selected available field 

>> Add All Fields Include all available fields in the report. 

< Remove Field Remove selected field from the report. 


6 Use the following elements to define groupings for a report: 

Name 

Add Group 

Description 

Create a grouping based on the selected field. 

Remove Group Remove the selected grouping. 

Up Group 

Down Group 

Include Count 

Move the selected grouping up. 

Move the selected grouping down. 

Display a count of the number of records in a grouping. 

7 Click the Sorting tab. Sorting enables you to define the sorting order of the rows 

displayed in your report. 



CHAPTER 8 

8 Use the Following elements to define the sorting of your report rows: 

Name 

Description 

> Add the selected available field to the sort list. 

< Remove the selected field from the sort list. 

Sort Order 

For each field included in the sort list, you can specify 

whether to sort using Ascending or Descending order. The 

or symbol next to each selected field name indicates 

the sort order to be used when the report is generated. 

Note: You must add the fields from the Available Fields area into the Sort by 

fields area, then place then in the order in which you want them sorted. 

9 Click the Criteria tab. 



The Criteria tab enables you to define a subset of chart records to include in a 

report. For example, you may want to report only employees with salaries 

greater than 50,000. 

The Report Summary tab is shown only if at least one number or formula field 

is defined. You can include the SUM, AVERAGE, MINIMUM and/or MAXIMUM 

value for any defined number or formula field as part of your report. 

The Format tab enables you to define the format for each element in the report. 



CHAPTER 8 

The left panel lists the hierarchy within the report according to your Grouping 

and Summary selections. The branches prefixed with a indicate the categories 

of elements. Each element within a category can be formatted separately. 

10 Format the report elements listed in the left panel: 

• Select an element and click Format. The Properties dialog appears. 

• Define the formatting properties for the report element. 

Note: The Properties dialog for formatting report elements is essentially the 

same as any Windows® formatting dialog. 

11 In the Grid Properties area, select the formatting options for the report: 

• Show Grid: Includes row and column line separators in the report. 

• Odd row fill color: Select the background fill color of odd record rows 

from the drop-down list. 

• Even fill color: Select the background fill color of even record rows from 

the drop-down list. 

The Range tab enables you to define the range of boxes that will be included in 

a dynamic report. By default dynamic reports include the selected box and all 

direct and indirect subordinates (within the current chart or sub-chart). 



12 Do the following to define the range of your report: 

13 Click OK. 

• Use the Top radio button group to define the topmost box to be included 

in a report. The topmost box is defined with respect to the selected box. 

• Use the Bottom radio button group to define the how many levels of the 

hierarchy to include in the report. 

• Use the Include Peers checkbox to include the selected box’s peers. 

Note: If the Manage Reports dialog box is displayed, click Close. The report is 

displayed in the Reports panel. 

Editing Reports 

This section describes how to modify reports. 

➣ To edit the current report: 

• With the Reports panel open, click the Edit current report button to 

modify the report. 

➣ To edit any report: 

1 With the Reports panel open, click the Manage Reports button . The 

Manage Reports dialog box is displayed. 



CHAPTER 8 

2 Select a report and click Edit. The Report dialog box is displayed. Modify the 

report as desired. 

3 Click Close to close the dialog box. 

Note: You can reorder how reports are displayed in the Manage Reports dialog 

box using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. 

Copying Reports 

You can copy a report. Copying a report, then editing the copy is an easy way to 

create a new report. 

➣ To copy a report: 

1 With the Report panel open, click the Manage Reports button . The 


2 Select a report and click Copy. 

Deleting Reports 

You can delete a report that is no longer required. 

➣ To delete reports: 

1 With the Reports panel open, click the Manage Reports button . The 


2 Select a report and click Delete. 


Displaying Reports 

This section describes how reports are displayed in the Reports panel. 

➣ To display a report: 

• In the Reports panel, select the desired report from the Reports drop-down 

list. The selected report is displayed in the Reports panel. 



When generating a report, you can choose the sub-set of data to be used by clicking 

on the Display Options drop-down list 

available: 

. The following display options are 

Option 

Dynamic 

Description 

Generate a report based on the currently selected chart box and 

its descendants. 

Selection Only Generate a report based on only the selected chart boxes. 

Entire Chart 

All Records 

Limit to subchart 

Generate a report based on the entire chart. 

Generate a report based on the chart and all unassigned records 

(orphans). 

For Dynamic reports only. Limit the contents of the report to 

the displayed sub-chart; does not include descendant subcharts. 

Working with Directories 

A Directory is a tabular list of information derived from your chart. You can use a 

directory to send an email or to update data in the same way that you edit data in a 

spreadsheet. 

Any number of special-purpose directories can be created to provide different kinds 

of information according to each your needs. 


Using the Directory Panel page 8-13 

Managing Directories page 8-15 

Displaying Directories page 8-18 

Other Directory Functions page 8-18 

8-12 Working with Directories


CHAPTER 8 

Using the Directory Panel 

This section describes how to work with the Directory panel. 

➣ To access the directory panel: 

• Select Directory from the View menu. The Directory panel is displayed. 

Working with Directories 8-13


The Directory panel has the following elements: 


Directory 

Selector 

Display 

Options 

Print 

Directory 

Print 

Preview 

Copy 

Directory 

Send 

Directory to 

Excel 

Manage 

Directories 

Edit Current 

Directory 

New Record 

Delete 

Record(s) 

Select a directory from the drop-down list. 

Select sub-set of the chart data to be used for building 

your directory. See Creating Directories on page 

8-15. 

Print the displayed directory. 

Preview how the currently displayed directory looks 

when printed. 

Copy the directory contents to the Clipboard. 

Export the current directory to an Excel spreadsheet. 

Add, modify or delete directories. 

Modify the displayed directory. 

Add an unassigned record to the directory. 

Delete the selected records. 



CHAPTER 8 

Managing Directories 

This section describes how to add, modify or delete directories. 


Creating Directories page 8-15 

Editing Directories page 8-17 

Deleting Directories page 8-17 

Creating Directories 

This section describes how to create new directories. Any field that is not a picture or 

formula can be included in the directory. 

➣ To create new directories: 

1 With the Directory panel open: 

Click the link “Click here to create a directory” if no directories have been 

created previously. 

Or 

Click the Manage Directories button 

displayed. Then click Add. 

. The Manage Directories dialog box is 

2 The Directory Settings dialog box is displayed. 



3 Enter the directory name in the Directory name field. 

4 Use following functions to define the contents and format of the directory. 

• Remove fields that you do not want displayed in the directory by selecting a 

field in the Selected Fields area and clicking Remove. 

• Add fields to the directory by selecting a field in the Available Fields area and 

clicking Add. 

• Arrange the fields in the Selected Fields area in the order in which they 

should appear in the directory using the Move Up or Move Down buttons. 

• To change a label name, click on the label (Name, Title, and so on) and 

update the name as necessary. 

• For each of the fields in a directory you can set the format by clicking on the 

Format button. 

• In the Grid Properties area, you can change the following formatting options: 

• Show Grid: Show row and column line separators in the directory. 

• Odd/Even row fill color: Select the background fill color of odd/even 

directory rows from the drop-down list. 



CHAPTER 8 

5 Click OK. The directory is created. 

6 If the Manage Directories dialog box is displayed, click Close. The directory is 

displayed in the Directory panel. 

Editing Directories 

This section describes how to modify directories. 

➣ To edit the current directory: 

• With the Directory panel open, click the Edit Current Directory button to 

modify the directory. 

➣ To edit any directory: 

1 With the Directory panel open, click the Manage Directories button . The 

Manage Directories dialog box is displayed. 

2 Select a directory and click Edit. The Directory dialog box is displayed. Modify 

the directory as desired. 


Note: You can reorder how directories are displayed in the Manage Directories 

dialog box using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. 

Deleting Directories 

You can delete a directory that is no longer required. 

➣ To delete directories: 

1 With the Directory panel open, click the Manage Directories button . The 

Manage Directories dialog box is displayed. 

2 Select the required directory and click Delete. 




Displaying Directories 

This section describes how directories are displayed in the Directory panel. 

➣ To display a directory: 

• In the Directory panel, select the desired directory from the Directories 

drop-down list. The selected report is displayed in the Directory panel. 

When generating a directory, you can choose the sub-set of data to be used by 

clicking on the Display Options drop-down list 

are available: 

. The following display options 

Option 

Dynamic 

Description 

Generate a directory based on the currently selected chart box 

and its descendants. 

Selection Only Generate a directory based on only the selected chart boxes. 

Orphans 

Entire Chart 

All Records 

Limit to 

sub-chart 

Display a directory that contains only unassigned record 

(records that are not included in the chart.) 

Generate a directory based on the entire chart. 

Generate a directory based on the chart and all unassigned 

records (orphans). 

For Dynamic directories only. Limit the contents of the 

directory to the displayed sub-chart; does not include 

descendant sub-charts. 

Other Directory Functions 

This section describes the other available directory functions. 


Editing Data Using Directories page 8-19 

Emailing from Directories page 8-19 

Adding and Deleting Records page 8-20 



CHAPTER 8 

Editing Data Using Directories 

You can edit chart information using the directory. Changes are automatically 

reflected in the chart. 

➣ To edit chart data via the directory: 

1 With the Directory panel open, select a directory from the Directory drop-down 

list. 

2 Choose a row in the directory. Click any cell in that row and enter the desired 

changes. Press to advance to the next cell or press when 

finished. Notice that the corresponding box in the chart is also updated. 

 

Note: When you double-click the icon 

corresponding to that record is selected. 

Emailing from Directories 

to the left of a directory line, the box 

You can send an email from a directory. 

➣ To send an email: 

1 With the Directory panel open, choose a directory from the Directory dropdown 

list. 

2 Click the email address shown in any record. 

Outlook or your default email client is automatically opened with a new message 

addressed to the recipient selected in your directory. 



Adding and Deleting Records 

The New Person function enables you to add an unassigned record to a directory 

Note: The Delete Record(s) button enables you to delete a record. If the 

record is associated with a box in the chart, the fields in the box are cleared but the 

box itself is not deleted. 

➣ To add a new person: 

1 With the Directory panel open, select the desired directory from the Directory 


2 Click the New Person button . A new row is added to the directory. The 

Display Option is automatically set to show Orphans. 

3 Enter data in the fields for each new record. You can tab from field to field. 

Note: You can click on the Orphan icon in any row and then drag it over any box 

in your chart. When you release the mouse button, a subordinate is added to the 

box. 

Note: When you delete a box from the chart you can use the type -Delete to 

add the box to the orphan list. 

Working with Profiles 

Profiles enable you to display and edit information related to any box in your chart, 

such as a photo, or phone numbers. 

8-20 Working with Profiles


CHAPTER 8 

Profiles provide information about one selected box at a time. Profiles can include 

hyperlinks to documents and email addresses. 

Profiles can be associated with Hotspots (See Modifying Box Layout in Chapter 4, 

Working with Charts: Basic Charting). When you move the cursor over a hotspot 

OrgPlus dynamically displays the profile associated with that box. 


Using the Profile Panel page 8-22 

Managing Profiles page 8-23 

Displaying Profiles page 8-30 

Working with Profiles 8-21


Using the Profile Panel 

This section describes how to work with the Profile panel. 

➣ To access the profile panel: 

• Select Profile from the View menu. The Profile panel is displayed. 

The Profile panel has the following elements: 


Profile Selector 

Choose the profile to display. 

Print Profile 

Print the displayed profile. 

Print Preview 

Copy Profile 

Preview how the currently displayed profile 

looks when printed. 

Copy the profile contents to the Clipboard. 

Send Profile to Excel 

Manage Profile 

Edit Current Profile 

Previous Record 

Export the current profile to an Excel 

spreadsheet. 

Add, modify or delete profiles. 

Modify the displayed profile. 

Navigate to the previous record. 



CHAPTER 8 


Next Record 

Navigate to the next record. 

Editing Data Using Profiles 

You can edit records directly in the Profile panel. Changes you make in the Profile 

panel are automatically reflected in the chart. 

To edit chart data using the profile panel double-click any cell in the profile and enter 

your changes. Press or to confirm each change and advance to the 

next cell. 

Note: You can replace a picture in the profile, by double clicking the picture to 

display the Select Picture dialog. 

Managing Profiles 

This section explains how to add, modify and delete profiles. 


Creating Standard Profiles page 8-23 

Creating Composite Profiles page 8-26 

Creating HTML Profiles page 8-26 

Editing Profiles Page 8-29 

Copying Profiles Page 8-29 

Deleting Profiles Page 8-29 

Creating Standard Profiles 

This section describes how to create new profiles based on fields defined in your 

chart. 

➣ To create a new profile: 

1 With the Profile panel open: 

Select Click here to create a Profile if no profiles have been created. 

Or 

Click the Manage Profiles button to display the Manage Profiles dialog. 

Click Add to display the Profile Settings dialog. 



2 Use the following elements in Profile Settings dialog to create your profile: 

Profile Name 

Profile Type 

Enter a name for the profile. 

Select a radio button to specify the type of profile you want 

to create: Standard, Composite, or HTML. Each of these 

profile types is described in this chapter. 

• For Composite profile settings, see Creating Composite 

Profiles section in this chapter. 

• For HTML profile settings see Creating HTML Profiles 

section in this chapter. 

Available Fields 

Selected Fields 

This area lists the fields available to be included in the 

profile. 

This area lists the fields selected to be included in the profile. 

To change a label name, click the label and change it as 

necessary. You can reset a label to its original text by rightclicking 

it and selecting Use Original Label from the 

context menu. 

Add>> 

Select any available field and click this button to add the 

field to the selected fields list. 

Optionally, you can add a free text field to your profile by 

selecting the field labeled Text. Once added, you can edit 

both the Label and Field values associated with the Text 

field. 



CHAPTER 8 

 


3 Click OK. 

Note: If the Manage Profiles dialog box is displayed, click Close. A blank 

profile is displayed in the Profile panel until you select a box in the chart. 

Conditional Formats 

Using the Condition… button you can define a set of conditions. If the defined 

criteria are met for a given record, fields within the profile are then reformatted in 

accordance with the conditional format. The example below shows how you can 

bring attention to high and low performers within your organization. 



CHAPTER 8 

Creating Composite Profiles 

A composite profile is composed of one or more standard profiles. 

➣ To create a composite profile: 

1 Select Composite in the Profile Type area of the Profile Settings dialog box to 

access the Edit Composite profile display. 

2 Select profiles from the Available Profiles list and add to the composite profile. 

Profiles can either be added as Tabs or as part of the main profile. The Available 

Profiles list is populated from defined Standard profiles. See Creating Standard 

Profiles in this Chapter for more information on creating profiles. 



3 Select the Format… button to set border properties for each profile. 

4 Click the Layout… button to specify the layout of profiles within the composite 

profile. 

5 Optionally, you can conditionally include any selected tab or profile based on a 

set of criteria. Use the Conditions… button to specify the inclusion criteria for 

any profile. 

Note: A single composite profile can be used to display different sets of 

information based on the selected box. For example, one set of tabs can be 

shown for managers and another for individual contributors. 


Creating HTML Profiles 

OrgPlus has the ability to render customized HTML pages inside the profile panel. 

These pages can access data provided in the chart to produce an interactive and 

visually rich profile. You can use standard HTML editing tools to create HTML profiles. 

➣ To create new HTML profiles: 

1 In the Profile Type area of the Profile Settings dialog box select HTML to 

display the HTML version of the dialog box. 

2 Enter the profile name. 

3 In the HTML template text box, type the filename and location of an HTML 

profile. 

Or 



CHAPTER 8 

Click Browse to locate an HTML template. 

Or 

Click Create Default HTML profile to define where the default template is 

saved. 

Note: It is preferable that this HTML file is online so that when you distribute 

your OrgPlus file, your recipients will be able to view the profile as well. 

4 Click OK to create the profile. 

Dynamic Field Substitution in HTML Profiles 

OrgPlus can dynamically replace fields in your HTML profile. Use the following syntax 

to include OrgPlus field data in your HTML profiles: 

• [@FIELDNAME@], where FIELDNAME is the name of any field defined in define 

fields. For example, [@Name@] displays the value of the Name field, for the 

selected box. 

The following is a basic HTML profile that displays the selected user’s name and title: 

 

 

Name:[@Name@] 

Title:[@Title@] 

 

 

Editing Profiles 

You can modify profile settings by clicking the Edit… button in the Manage Profiles 

dialog box. OrgPlus displays the Profile Settings dialog box. See Working with 

Profiles in this chapter for detailed information. 

Copying Profiles 

You can copy a profile. Copying a profile, then editing the copy is an easy way to 

create a new profile. Use the Copy button in the Manage Profiles dialog to 

duplicate profiles. 

Deleting Profiles 

You can delete a profile that is no longer required. 

➣ To delete profiles: 

1 With the Profile panel open, click the Manage Profiles button to display 

the Manage Profiles dialog box. 



2 Select the required profile and click Delete. 


Displaying Profiles 

This section describes how profiles are displayed in the Profile panel. 

➣ To display profile information: 

1 In the Profile panel, select the desired profile from the Profile drop-down list. 

2 Select any box in the chart. The Profile panel displays additional information for 

the selected box. 



CHAPTER 8 

Working with Trees 

The Tree panel provides another way of viewing your organizational hierarchy. You 

can also use this panel to reorganize your chart and to add or delete chart records. 

Using the Tree Panel 

Select Tree from the View menu to display the Tree Panel. You edit records directly 

in the tree panel by doubling-clicking. The Level drop-down allows you to easily 

expand and collapse the displayed tree. 

Working with Trees 8-31


The Tree panel has the following elements: 


Print Tree 

Print the displayed tree. 

Print Preview 

Send tree to Excel 

Add a Position 

Delete a Position 

Preview how the currently displayed tree will 

look when printed. 

Export the current tree to an Excel 

spreadsheet. 

Add a position following the selected position. 

Delete the currently selected position. 

Move up 

Move down 

Modify Tree Settings 

Move the selected record up with respect to 

its peers. 

Move the selected record down with respect 

its peers. 

Modify the Tree properties. 

Modifying Tree Settings 

In the default setting the Tree panel displays the name of each member of the 

organization in a hierarchical tree structure. 

➣ To modify tree settings: 

1 Click the button to display the Tree Settings dialog box. 

8-32 Working with Trees


CHAPTER 8 

2 Add fields to the tree view by selecting them in Available Fields and clicking 

the Add >> button. 

3 Remove fields from the tree view by selecting them in the Selected Fields and 

clicking the <


Searching Charts 

The search panel allows you to search charts for all records that meet a set of 

criteria. 

This section describes how to work with the Search panel. 

➣ To access the search panel: 

• Select Search from the View menu. The Search panel is displayed. 

The Search panel has the following elements: 


Print Search Results 

Print results from the current search. 

Print Preview 

Copy Search Results 

Preview how the current search results will 

look when printed. 

Copy search results to the Clipboard. 

Send Search Results 

to Excel 

Modify Search Panel 

Export the current search results to an Excel 

spreadsheet. 

Define which fields are returned after a 

search and change the formatting parameters 

used to display search results 

8-34 Searching Charts


CHAPTER 8 

Managing Search Results 

This section describes how to select which fields are returned after a search. This 

section also describes how to change the formatting parameters used to display 

search results. 

➣ To modify search results: 

1 With the Search panel open click the Modify Search button. The Search 

Settings dialog box is displayed. 

2 Move fields that you want to include in the search results from the Available 

Fields area to the Selected Fields area by selecting each field and clicking Add 

>>, or by clicking Add All >> to add all fields. 

Use Remove and Remove All to remove fields. 

• Arrange the fields in the Selected Fields area in the order in which they 

should appear in the search results by using the Move Up or Move Down 

buttons. 

• To change a label name, click on the label (Name, Title, and so on) and 

update the name as necessary. You can reset the label to the original text by 

right-clicking on a label and selecting the Use Original Label menu item. 

Searching Charts 8-35


• For each of the fields listed in the Selected Fields area, you can set the 

format by clicking on the Format button (You can also right-click any field 

and select Format menu item). 

• In the Grid Properties area, define the formatting for the profile as follows: 

3 Click OK. 

• Show Grid: Includes row and column line separators in the profile. 

• Fill Color: Select the background fill color for the search results from the 

drop-down list. You can specify different colors for even and odd rows. 

Using the Search Panel 

When performing a search, you can set the sub-set of data to search using Search 

drop-down list. The following options are available: 

Option 

All Records 

Entire Chart 

Active Sub-chart 

Orphans w/ Mgr 

Orphans w/o Mgr 

All Orphans 

Description 

Search the chart and all unassigned records (orphans). 

Search the entire chart. 

Search only the displayed sub-chart. 

Search for all unassigned records that have a valid 

supervisor but are not part of the current chart. 

Search for all unassigned records that do not have a valid 

supervisor are therefore not included in the chart. 

Search all unassigned records. 

Note: Look for the red icon 

to the left of each orphan record. 

➣ To perform a basic search: 

1 With the Search panel open, enter the search criteria. 

2 Click Search. A list of a search results are returned. 



CHAPTER 8 

Note: Clicking the icon for any record will display and select the 

corresponding record in the active chart. 

➣ To perform an advanced search: 

1 With the Search panel open, select the Advanced link. 

2 Note: Use the Basic link to return to the basic search mode. 

3 Specify the first search criteria by selecting a field, a comparator (contains, =, >, 


Orphan Management 

The search panel can be used to place unassigned records (orphans) into a chart. 

This is useful if your imported data contains no hierarchy information for one or 

more records. 

For example, importing the following data: 

ID ReportsTo Name Title 

1 Lynn Brewer CEO 

2 1 Larry Stevens VP Sales 

3 1 Claire Chancellor VP Engineering 

4 1 Fred Barnes VP Marketing 

5 1 Gary Truman Director Operations 

6 1 Martin Sawyer Director Finance 

10 14 Mary Wilson Marketing Director 

11 10 Joan Levinson Marketing Director 

Would result in the following chart: 

With the following unassigned records: 

ID ReportsTo Name Record Type 

10 14 Mary Wilson Orphan w/o Mgr 

11 10 Joan Levinson Orphan w/ Mgr 

Even though Joan Levinson has a valid manager (Mary Wilson), Joan cannot be 

included in the chart because her manager, Mary, cannot be included in the chart. If 

Mary is assigned to a manager in the chart, Joan can be automatically included in 

the chart. 

➣ Assigning Orphans: 

1 With the Search panel open, select Orphans w/o Mgr from the Search dropdown 

list. 

2 Click Search. A list of all unassigned records without a valid manager is 

returned. You can also search for all orphan records (All Orphans) or all 

orphans with valid managers (Orphans w/ Mgr) by selecting the associated 

option in the Search drop-down list. 



CHAPTER 8 

3 Click Search. A list of a search results are returned. 

4 Using the icon you can drag and drop records in your chart using one of the 

following options: 

• Drag over any box in your chart to move the selected item to a new 

supervisor. 

• Ctrl-Drag over any box in your chart to create a copy of the selection. 

• Drag into the sub-chart panel to move the selected box to report to the top 

of the selected sub-chart. 

• Ctrl-Drag into the sub-chart panel to add a subordinate box to the top 

position of the selected sub-chart. 

Note: Click the Sub-chart Panel link to display the sub-chart panel so that you 

can easily drag records into sub-chart charts. 

Maintaining Orphan Placement after Data Refresh 

You can prevent orphaned records that have been manually added back into the 

chart from being re-orphaning during the data refresh process. See Data Refresh in 

Chapter 9, Importing and Exporting Data for details. 

Searching Charts 8-39


Working with Comments 

The comments panel allows you to easily view all comments associated with a chart. 

You can double-click any comment in the comments panel to edit that comment. 

➣ To access the comments panel: 

• Select Comments from the View menu to display the Comments panel. 

The Comments panel has the following elements: 


Print Comments 

Print a list of all comments. 

Print Preview 

Copy Comments 

Preview how the comment list will look when 

printed. 

Copy selected comments to the Clipboard. 

Send Comments to 

Excel 

Insert Comment 

Delete Comment 

Previous Comment 

Export the comments list to an Excel 

spreadsheet. 

Define a comment for the selected box. 

Delete selected comment. 

Navigate to the previous comment. 

Next Comment 

Navigate to the next comment. 

8-40 Working with Comments

Chapter 9 

Importing and Exporting Data 



Importing Data page 9-2 

Advanced Import Page 9-25 

Advanced Import page 9-25 

Exporting Data page 9-47 

Push Data Page 9-50 

Consolidation Page 9-51 

Overview 

Charts can be built based on data imported from an external data source. This 

chapter describes how to import data to create a chart. 

Multiple OrgPlus charts can also be combined into a single chart using the 

consolidation feature. 

9-1


The import and consolidation features are available only in OrgPlus Professional. 

In addition, this chapter describes how to export chart data to Excel and other file 

formats. 

Importing Data 

Using the OrgPlus Import Wizard you can import data from following data sources: 

• Any ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) compliant database 

• Any OLE DB compliant database 

• Oracle 

• SQL Server 

• LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)/Active Directory 

• Text file 

• Excel Spreadsheet 

• OrgLite XML file 

• SAP HR-OCI (SAP HR Organizational Charting Interface) 


Source Data Requirements page 9-2 

Using the Data Connection Wizard page 9-11 

Source Data Requirements 

Source data must be formatted correctly to be imported into OrgPlus. 


Required Fields page 9-2 

Creating Charts from Files Page 9-3 

Including Advanced Data Fields page 9-4 

Required Fields 

Data sources must contain a Position field and a Reports To field. OrgPlus cannot 

build a hierarchical chart unless these fields are available during the import process. 

• Position field 

9-2 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

Each record must have a Position field. Usually a numeric ID such as a position 

code or employee ID is used for the Position field. An email address can also be 

used. Using an employee name is not recommended as names are not unique. 

• Reports To field 

In order to determine the reporting relationship (such as, who reports to whom), 

each record must contain a Reports To field. The Reports To field enables 

OrgPlus to build a hierarchical chart. 

Note: OrgPlus can also handle data that contains a hierarchy that cannot be 

processed using only the Reports To and Position fields. See Complex Hierarchies 


Creating Charts from Files 

You can import a file from any source as long as it meets some minimum 

requirements. 

Use the following guidelines when creating an import file: 

➣ To prepare your text for importing: 

1 Create one line in the file for each record in your chart. 

2 If you are importing from a text file, each field must be separated by a delimiter 

(a tab, comma, semicolon, space, or other character). 

• In the following example, each record has four fields, separated by commas. 

The four fields are Position, Reports To, Name, and Title. Position is 

used as the unique identifier for each record. 

1, ,Chris Phillips,President 

2,1,Lynn Brewer,Chief Financial Officer 

3,1,Larry Stevens,Vice President 

3 If you are importing from Excel you do not need to worry about commas. Each 

field should be entered into a cell. 

1 Chris Philips President 

2 1 Lynn Brewer Chief Financial Officer 

3 1 Larry Stevens Vice President 

4 You can, in addition, enclose each field value within text delimiters. 

For example, if you separate fields with spaces, you need to enclose field values 

within another delimiter if the field values themselves contain spaces. Field 

values can be enclosed in double quotes, as in the following example: “2" "1" 

"Lynn Brewer" "Chief Financial Officer" 

Importing Data 9-3


5 If you want to use one of your text delimiters as a literal character, precede it 

with an escape character. 

For example, if a field value contains a double-quotation mark, place a backslash 

(\) in front of it so that OrgPlus knows it is a literal quote character and not the 

delimiter for a field. 

6 Each record must contain a Position field and a Reports To field. Otherwise, 

the import wizard cannot determine the relationship between records. 

7 You can create a header row that tells OrgPlus the names of the fields in the 

Text or Excel file. 

If you create a header row, it must be the first row in the file. Instead of field 

values, the fields in this row contain the names of the fields themselves, for 

example: employee name, position, reports to, and title. 

8 Make sure there are no blank lines in the file. 

Including Advanced Data Fields 

Your source can also include Advanced Data Fields. Advanced data fields automate 

chart formatting and can be used to identify assistant boxes, insert sub-chart 

breaks, hide branches, or specify the chart styles of selected branches. In addition, 

advanced data fields can also be used to identify rows to ignore during the import 

process. 

In order to use advanced data fields, you must include a header row in your import 

file. The header must with contain columns that correspond to each utilized 

advanced data field. If you are importing from a database, the fields in the source 

database table (or view) must be named to match an advanced data field. A typical 

Excel import file would be constructed as follows: 

ID ReportsTo Name Title IsAssistant BreakAt 

1 Lynn Brewer CEO 0 0 

2 1 Larry Stevens Assistant 1 0 

3 1 Claire Chancellor VP 0 1 

The following sections describe the available advanced data fields: 

IsAssistant page 9-5 

BreakAt page 9-5 

CollapseAt page 9-5 

BranchStyle page 9-6 

Sequence Page 9-7 

9-4 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

Exclude Page 9-8 

Format Page 9-9 

Special Page 9-9 

AuxReportsTo Page 9-10 

IsAssistant 

If the IsAssistant field is included in an import file, OrgPlus can automatically 

format assistants in your chart. Setting IsAssistant to 1 for a record makes the 

corresponding box an assistant. 

For example, if the IsAssistant field for Corinne Speer is set to 1 in the import file, 

the resulting chart is formatted as follows: 

Note: You can specify an assistant branch style in the IsAssistant column (refer to 

the table in the BranchStyle section below). 

BreakAt 

If the BreakAt field is included in an import file, OrgPlus automatically inserts a subchart 

break for the corresponding record. 

• Setting BreakAt to 0 does not insert a sub-chart break. 

• Setting BreakAt to 1 inserts a sub-chart break. 

• Setting BreakAt to a text string (such as, Marketing) inserts a sub-chart break 

and names the sub-chart based on the text. 

CollapseAt 

If the CollapseAt field is included in an import file, OrgPlus automatically collapses 

or expands the branch associated with each box. Setting CollapseAt to 1 collapses 

a branch. 

Importing Data 9-5


BranchStyle 

Using the BranchStyle advanced data field applies the branch style you specify to 

all subordinates of the selected record. By default, charts created using the Import 

Wizard select chart styles that minimize the total number of pages and optimize the 

distribution of boxes on each page. 

The following branch styles are available: 

Branch 

Style 

Name 

Branch 

Style 

Name 

TreeStyle 

ListStyle 

TreeLeftStyle 

LeftListStyle 

TreeRightStyle 

BoxListStyle 

TreeStaggerStyle 

BoxListLeftStyle 

TreeStaggerLeftStyle 

BoxListRightStyle 

TreeStaggerRightStyle 

SuperiorBoxListStyle 

TwoColumnStyle 

Assistant1Style 

TwoColumnTreeStyle 


FourColumnStyle 


FourColumnTreeStyle 


OneColumnStyle 


9-6 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

Branch 

Style 

Name 

Branch 

Style 

Name 

OneColumnLeftStyle 


OneColumnCenterStyle 


OneColumnLeftCenterStyle 


OneColumnEdgeLeft 

OneColumnEdgeRight 

MultiColumnLine 

CoManagerStyle 

MultiColumnPair 

Sequence 

The Sequence field allows you to control the order in which subordinate boxes are 

arranged under a manager. Boxes are sequenced from left to right and then top to 

bottom. 

For example, importing the following data … 

ID ReportsTo Name Title Sequence 

1 Lynn Brewer CEO 0 

2 1 Larry Stevens VP Sales 3 

3 1 Claire Chancellor VP Engineering 2 

4 1 Fred Barnes VP Marketing 1 

… would create the following chart: 

Notice that Larry Stevens, assigned sequence number 3, is third from the left. 

Importing Data 9-7


The Sequence field can also be used to sequence subordinates in multiple rows and 

columns beneath a manager. To achieve this, enter row number and sequence 

number separated by a : for each import record. 

For example, importing the following data … 

ID ReportsTo Name Title Sequence 

1 Lynn Brewer CEO 0 

2 1 Larry Stevens VP Sales 1:1 

3 1 Claire Chancellor VP Engineering 1:2 

4 1 Fred Barnes VP Marketing 1:3 

5 1 Gary Truman Director Operations 2:1 

6 1 Martin Sawyer Director Finance 2:2 

… would create the following chart: 

Exclude 

The Exclude field allows you to determine how each box in your chart is handled 

with respect to calculations. 

• Setting Exclude to 0 includes a box in all counts and calculations. 

• Setting Exclude to 1 excludes a box from all counts and calculations. 

• Setting Exclude to 2 excludes a box from all counts. 

• Setting Exclude to 3 excludes a box from all calculations. 

9-8 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

Format 

The Format field allows you to specify the format for any given box. The example 

below contains a subset of available options. See the OrgPlus Knowledge Base at 

www.orgplus.com/support for more information on the Format advanced data field. 

ID ReportsTo Name Title Format 

1 

2 1 

3 1 

4 1 

Special 

Lynn 

Brewer 

Larry 

Stevens 

Claire 

Chancellor 

Fred 

Barnes 

CEO 

VP Sales 

VP Engineering 

VP Marketing 

fields_show=”Name, Title”, 

font=”Verdana,12, blue” 

fields_show=”Name,”, 

font=”Verdana, 9”, 

box=”round_rect” 







The Special field allows you to specify chart formatting parameters such as chart 

title and chart background color. See the OrgPlus Knowledge Base at 

www.orgplus.com/support for more information on the Special field. 

ID ReportsTo Name Title Special Format 

1 

2 1 

3 1 

Lynn 

Brewer 

Larry 

Stevens 

Claire 

Chancellor 

CEO 

VP Sales 


title=”My Corp” 

chart_fill=”solidfill, 

green” 

font= 

“Verdana 

, 24” 

Importing Data 9-9


The Special field can also be used to ignore any row from the import data source. 

For example, as shown below, an Excel file containing a summary row. 

ID ReportsTo Name Title Salary Special 

1 

2 1 

3 1 

AuxReportsTo 

Lynn 

Brewer 

Larry 

Stevens 

Claire 

Chancellor 

CEO 125,000 

VP Sales 75,000 

VP Engineering 100,000 

Total 300,000 Ignore 

The AuxReportsTo field allows you to specify one or more auxiliary reporting 

relationship within your chart. 

Importing the following data: 

ID ReportsTo AuxReportsTo Name Title 


2 1 Larry Stevens VP Sales 

3 1 Claire 

Chancellor 


4 1 Fred Barnes VP Marketing 

5 2 4 Gary Truman Director 

Sales/Marketing 

6 3 Martin Sawyer Director Engineering 

Would result in the following chart: 

9-10 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

Note: Multiple auxiliary reporting relationships for a single record must be separated 

by semi-colons. 

Using the Data Connection Wizard 

The import wizard requires a Data Connection file to import data from LDAP (Active 

Directory), Oracle, SQL Server, SAP (HR-OCI), OLE DB or ODBC compliant 

data source. You can use the Data Connection wizard to create a Data Connection 

file. 

If you are importing from a text, Excel, or OrgLite XML file, continue with Using the 

Import Wizard on page 9-16. 

The Data Connection Wizard is described in the following steps. 

Creating a Data Connection File page 9-11 

Selecting the Table/View page 9-13 

Creating a Data Connection File 

In order to access an external data source, you must create a data connection file. A 

data connection file contains all the configuration details required to connect to an 

external data source. 

➣ To create a Data Connection file: 

1 Select Import Data from the File menu to display the Select Data Source dialog 

box. 

Importing Data 9-11


2 Click New Source. 

3 Select one of the following data sources and click Next. 

• ODBC DSN 

• OLE DB 

• Oracle 

• SQL Server 

• SAP (HR-OCI) 

If you selected ODBC DSN 

The ODBC Wizard – Connection dialog box is displayed. 

➣ To select the ODBC data source: 

1 Select an ODBC Data Source and click Next. 

2 You are prompted based on which ODBC Data Source you selected. You may be 

required to select a database file or to login to a database server. 

3 Click Next. 

If you select OLE DB 

1 In the Connection String field, enter a connection string. 

9-12 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

2 Enter the User Name and Password. 

3 Click Next. 

Note: More detailed information on OLEDB is available in the OrgPlus Support 

Center (http://www.orgplus.com/support). 

If you select Oracle 

1 In the Service Name field, enter the required service name. 

2 Enter your Oracle User Name and Password. 

3 Select whether you want to browse for a database and table/view or whether 

you want to specify a database and table/view. If your login account has access 

to a large number of databases or tables/views, downloading a complete catalog 

to browse may be time consuming. 

4 Click Next. 

If you select SQL Server 

1 In the Server Name field, enter a server name. 

2 Select one of the following Log on credentials: 

• Use Windows Authentication 

• Use the following User Name and Password, and enter the User Name 

and Password. 

3 Select whether you want to browse for a database and table/view or whether 

you want to specify a database and table/view. If your login account has access 

to a large number of databases or tables/views downloading a complete catalog 

to browse may be time consuming. 

4 Click Next. 

If you select SAP (HR-OCI) 

1 Enter all the SAP Connection parameters. 

2 Click Next. 

Note: The SAP HR-OCI connection is an add-on module to OrgPlus Professional. 

More detailed information on SAP HR-OCI is available in the OrgPlus Support Center 

(www.orgplus.com/support). 

Importing Data 9-13


Selecting the Table/View 

After you have selected the data source, the Tables/Views dialog box is displayed 

(if you did not specify a table/view in the previous step), which lists the views or 

tables available from the selected data source. 

Note: If you selected SAP HR-OCI you will not need to select a table or view or if 

you specified a database and table/view in the previous wizard step. 

➣ To select a table or view: 

1 Select the table or view that contains the source data. 

2 Click Next. 

9-14 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

The Result dialog box displays data from the selected table/view. If the data is 

incorrect or an error occurs connecting to your data source, click Cancel and 

repeat the process making sure you select the correct table/view and that all 

parameters are entered correctly. 

If required, use the Browse button to change the name or the path that will be 

used to save the Data Connection file. 

Note: If you are planning to use automation to refresh your data, make sure to 

select the Save password in file checkbox. If not selected, you are prompted 

to supply the password each time you connect to the database. 

3 Click Finish to save the Data Connection file. You are returned to the Select 

Data Source dialog. 

Importing Data 9-15


Using the Import Wizard 


Selecting the Data Source page 9-16 

Defining Data Settings page 9-19 

Selecting the Data Source 

In this step, you will use the Import Wizard to select a Data Connection file or data 

source. 

➣ To select the data source: 

1 Select Import Data from the File menu. The Select Data Source dialog box is 

displayed. 

2 Select a data connection file (.ora, .ldap, odbc, .sqlsvr, .saphr, .oledb) or a data 

source file (.xml, .txt, .xls, .xlsx) and click Open. 

Note: Depending on the file type selected you may be prompted to login to the data 

source. 

If you select an Excel (XLS) Spreadsheet 

The Import Wizard - XLS Sheet Selection dialog box enables you to select a 

worksheet from the Excel file and to verify that the worksheet is properly formatted. 

9-16 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

➣ To verify that the Excel file is properly formatted: 

1 Choose a tab (Sheet1, Sheet2 or Sheet3 above). The corresponding data is 

displayed in the dialog box. 

2 Verify that the data is properly formatted and ready for import. 

If the data is not correct, click Cancel and make any required corrections to the 

spreadsheet. 

3 You can manually define whether the first row contains data or column headers 

by selecting the appropriate option: 

• First row contains column names 

• First row contains data 

4 Click Next. The Import Wizard - Data Settings dialog box is displayed. 

If you select a Text (txt) file: 

The Import Wizard - Delimiters dialog box enables you to verify that OrgPlus has 

correctly identified the delimiters used to denote columns in the source text file. If 

not, you can select the correct delimiters. 

Importing Data 9-17


➣ To verify that your data file is correctly delimited: 

1 You can specify Delimiters manually. Choose whether to use the Tab, Comma, 

Semicolon or Space as delimiters or define your own delimiter using the Other 

checkbox and text entry area. 

2 You can specify which characters are used as Text Qualifiers. Text qualifiers 

help OrgPlus process each field. For example a quote can be used to define the 

start and end of a name field (such as Smith, Nora). 

3 If your text file uses an escape symbol, enter it in the Escape symbol field. An 

escape symbol indicates that a character should be interpreted literally (not as a 

delimiter or qualifier). 

4 You can manually define whether the first row contains data or column headers 

by selecting the appropriate option: 

• First row contains column names 

• First row contains data 

5 Verify that the data, as displayed in the dialog box's Imported Data section, has 

been properly delimited according to your definitions and is ready for import. 

6 Click Next to continue. The Import Wizard - Data Settings dialog box is 

displayed. 

9-18 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

Defining Data Settings 

This procedure enables you to sequence through each source field and determine 

which fields should be imported. You can also define the properties associated with 

each field. 

All fields from the source can be imported. The Source Field drop-down list includes 

all the fields defined in the source file. 

➣ To specify the kind and type of data that is in each field 

1 Optionally you can use the Merge Fields button to combine fields (such as first 

and last name). See Merge Fields on page 9-27. 

2 Select each source field in turn from the Source Field drop-down list and define 

its settings: 

• If you do not want to import a field, you can omit it by selecting Exclude 

Field. You can include all fields by selecting the Include All button. 

• Use Field Name to rename any field. 

• Use the Field Type drop-down list to select the field's type (Text, Date, 

Picture or Number). 

• If the Field Type selection is Text or Number, you can further define the 

field type using the Field Category drop-down list. 

• Select Hyperlinked if the field contains a hyperlink (such as an email 

address or a URL). 

Importing Data 9-19


Note: Managing Duplicate records is discussed in Duplicates on page 9-25; and 

sorting is discussed in Sort Criteria for Subordinate Boxes on page 9-29. 

Verifying the Hierarchy 

Click the Next> button in the Data Settings dialog box to display the Verify 

Hierarchy dialog box, You can verify that OrgPlus is building the chart hierarchy 

correctly and also set a filter which allows you to define a subset of source data to 

import into a chart, for example, a division within an organization. 

In the following example, OrgPlus selects the source fields ID and ReportsTo as 

default choices for the Position and Reports To fields. The chart hierarchy built 

(based on the selected Position and Reports To fields) is shown on the right side of 

the dialog box. 

9-20 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

➣ To define the chart hierarchy: 

1 Identify the Position field. You can specify the field used as the Position 

(unique identifier) using the Position: drop-down list. 

2 Identify the Reports To field. You can specify the field used as the Reports To 

identifier or clear the Reports To checkbox if the data source does not contain 

hierarchy information or you do not want to use the Reports To information 

contained in the data source. 

Note: Optionally, you can change the fields that are displayed in the Import 

Wizard by clicking the Show Fields… button. This is helpful if the Name field 

does not provide enough information to verify that the hierarchy is correct. 

Note: Use the Advanced… button if your data contains a hierarchy that cannot 

be processed using only the Reports To and Position fields. See Advanced 

Import on page 9-25. 

3 Identify the Unique Field. Use this drop-down list to specify the field that will 

uniquely identify each record during the data refresh process. 

Note: Click Filter Data to select a subset of information from the data source. 

See Filtering Data on page 9-34 for more details. 

4 After you finish defining the hierarchy and data filtering options, click Finish. 

Note: If there are unmapped records (orphans) in your source, you will receive 

the following prompt: 

• Click Fix After Import if you want to fix the hierarchy (using the Search 

panel) after the import process is complete. See Orphan Management in 

Chapter 8, for more information on managing orphan records. This option is 

the recommended method if there are more many unmapped records in your 

data source. 

• Click Use Hierarchy Mapper… if you want to manually assign orphans to 

managers. This method is best for correcting a few unmapped records. Click 

this button to display the Hierarchy Mapper dialog box. For more 

information, see Using the Hierarchy Mapper on page 9-22. 

• Click Ignore if you do not want to assign orphans to managers. You can 

view and map orphan records using the Search panel. See Orphan 

Management in Chapter 8, for more information on managing orphan 

records. 

Importing Data 9-21


5 If your chart has at least four levels you will prompted to sub-chart. For more 

information about sub-charts, refer to the section, Sub-charts, in Chapter 7, 

Working with Charts: Advanced Function. 

• Click Yes if you want to sub-chart the imported chart. 

• Click No if you do not want to sub-chart. You can add sub-chart breaks later 

if needed. 

Using the Hierarchy Mapper 

Your data source may contain records that cannot be added to a chart because the 

Position or Reports To information for those records is missing or incorrect. 

Records that cannot be added to a chart are called orphans. The Hierarchy 

Mapper dialog box enables you to assign orphan records. 

The Unassigned Positions panel on the left lists all the orphans. All the assigned 

positions are shown in the right panel. 

9-22 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

➣ To map orphans into imported charts: 

1 Drag each orphan from the Unassigned Positions panel to their respective 

manager in the right panel. 

2 Select Remove All Unassigned Positions if you want to discard all unmapped 

orphans when the chart is created. If you do not select this option, you can map 

the orphans into the chart using a directory. See Chapter 8, OrgPlus Panels. 

3 Select Maintain Hierarchy Mapper Settings to preserve the mappings when 

you next use Data Refresh. 

4 Click OK. 

Note: Optionally you can change which fields are displayed in the hierarchy mapper 

by clicking on the Show Fields button. This is helpful if the Name field does not 

provide enough information to map the orphans. For example, in the following 

example both Name and Title are shown. 

 

Importing Data 9-23


Changing the Fields that are shown in the Hierarchy Mapper 

When using the hierarchy mapper it can be helpful to change which fields are 

displayed. 

➣ To change the fields that are displayed in the Hierarchy Mapper: 

1 In the Hierarchy Mapper dialog box (page 9-22), click Show Fields. 

The Hierarchy Mapper Show Fields dialog box is displayed. 

2 You can determine which fields are shown in the Hierarchy Mapper by moving 

fields between the Allowable panel the Show panel using the > and < buttons. 


9-24 Importing Data


CHAPTER 9 

Advanced Import 

In this section, some of the more sophisticated import features are discussed. 

➣ In this section: 

Duplicates Page 9-25 

Merge Fields Page 9-27 

Sort Criteria for Subordinate Boxes Page 9-29 

Show Fields Page 9-29 

Combining Multiple Records Page 9-30 

Grouping Peers Page 9-32 

Top of Chart Page 9-33 

Filtering Data Page 9-34 

Complex Hierarchies Page 9-36 

Using LDAP Page 9-40 

Duplicates 

Your organizational charts may contain people who report to more than one 

manager. People who report to more than one manager typically have a dotted line 

reporting relationship to their secondary managers. Boxes that contain an employee 

who appears more than once in an organizational chart are displayed as follows: 

Advanced Import 9-25


Note: Any person that appears more than once in your organizational chart has a 

icon in lower right corner of their box. Click this icon to navigate to the next 

occurrence of that person. 

➣ To identify duplicate reports in your chart 

1 Select the Duplicates… button in the Import Wizard - Data Settings dialog box 

to display the Identify Duplicates dialog box. 

2 Click the Identify duplicate records checkbox. 

3 Select a field to be used as a Key for identifying duplicate records. 

4 Specify whether you want to automatically update your duplicate records when 

refreshing data. Automatically Update will automatically update the icon in 

chart boxes when manual edits are made to a chart. We recommend that you do 

not select this option. 

5 Specify whether you want to show alternate managers for your duplicate 

records. Selecting the Show alternate managers checkbox displays alternate 

manager for each duplicate employee record: 

• As callout displays a callout containing the alternate managers. 

• As part of box displays the alternate managers within each box. 

9-26 Advanced Import


CHAPTER 9 

6 If you select the Show alternate managers option, you can specify one or two 

fields of to be shown for each alternate manager: 

• Show Field 1: Use this drop-down list to select the first field to display for 

each alternate manager. 

• Show Field 2: Use this drop-down list to select the second field to display 

for each alternate manager. 

7 Click OK. 

In the following example, Martin Smith acts both as the VP of Finance and as the 

Acting VP of Marketing. Selecting ID as the Key field allows OrgPlus to identify that 

Martin Smith is the same person. 

Position ReportsTo Name Title ID Primary 

1 Lynn Brewer CEO 5011 1 

Larry 

1 

2 1 

Stevens VP Sales 5022 

Claire 

1 

3 1 

Chancellor VP Engineering 5023 

4 1 Gary Truman VP Operations 5024 1 

5 1 Martin Smith VP Finance 5040 1 

6 1 Martin Smith Acting VP Marketing 5040 0 

Note: Conditional formatting can be used to format boxes for any secondary 

reporting relationships. In the above example, creating a conditional format using 

the Primary field allows you to conditionally format the second occurrence of Martin 

Smith. 

Merge Fields 

You can import fields from the data source in a combined form. For example, if the 

source includes the fields Last Name and First Name, you may want to import 

these as a single Name field. 

➣ To merge fields for charting purposes: 

1 Click the Merge Fields… button in the Import Wizard – Data Settings dialog box 

to display the Merge Fields dialog box. 



The From area displays the fields that are eligible for merging. 

2 Select the fields you want to merge in the From area and use the button to 

move the them to the To area. 

3 Define a new column for the merged field by typing it the New Column Name 

text box. 

4 Specify whether you want to include or exclude the individual fields after the 

merge. By default the Exclude Old Columns checkbox is selected. If you want 

to retain the individual fields after the merge, uncheck this checkbox. 

5 Click the Merge button to confirm your decision, or click the Reset All button to 

undo your changes. 

6 Click OK. 



CHAPTER 9 

Sort Criteria for Subordinate Boxes 

You can specify the criteria by which to sort subordinates that report to individual 

managers. 

➣ To define sort criteria for subordinate boxes: 

1 Click the Sort Criteria… button in the Import Wizard – Data Settings dialog box 

to display the Sort Criteria dialog box. 

2 Use the Sort by and Then by drop-down lists to select up to three sorting 

levels. For each level, select either the Ascending or Descending radio button. 

3 Click OK. 

Show Fields 

You can specify which fields appear in the Verify Hierarchy tree display. 

➣ To select the fields to show in the hierarchy tree: 

1 Click the Show Fields… button in the Import Wizard – Verify Hierarchy dialog 

box to display the Show Fields dialog box. 



2 Use the add and remove buttons to select which fields are to be 

displayed in the hierarchy tree. 


Combining Multiple Records 

When importing data, you may want to combine all the members of a team into a 

single box. 

This can be done manually after import or during the import process by combining 

all records that share a common field value. 


ID ReportsTo Name Title Function 


2 1 Larry Stevens Manager Sales 

3 2 Claire Chancellor Sales Associate Sales 

4 2 Bill London Sales Associate Sales 

5 2 Joanne Banks Sales Associate Sales 

6 2 Patrick Gaines Sales Associate Sales 



CHAPTER 9 

Combining all sales associates would yield: 

this chart… 

rather than this. 

➣ To combine records into multi-records boxes: 

1 In the Import Wizard - Verify Hierarchy dialog box (see page 9-20), select the 

Combine… button to display the Combine dialog box. 

2 Select the Combine Records checkbox. 

3 Use the Combine using: selector to select a field (For example, the ReportsTo 

field in the example above). 

4 Select the Only combine boxes with no subordinates checkbox to limit 

creation of multi-record boxes to the bottom level of your organizational chart. If 

you select this option, you can also set the Include subordinates with no 

peers checkbox to create multi-record boxes that contain only one record. 



5 Optionally, you can use the Criteria tab to restrict multi-record box creation to 

include only boxes that meet specific criteria (i.e. Title = Sales Associate). 

6 Click OK to exit the Combine dialog box. 

7 Click OK. 

Note: To manually create multiple record boxes see Multi-record Boxes in Chapter 7, 

Working with Charts: Advanced Functions. 

Note: Another approach to combining records is to use a shared Position ID field 

value to combine records. An example is shown below: 

PositionID ReportsTo Name Title 

1 Larry Stevens Manager Sales 

5 1 Claire Chancellor Sales Associate I 

5 1 Bill London Sales Associate II 

5 1 Joanne Banks Sales Associate II 

5 1 Patrick Gaines Sales Associate I 

Grouping Peers 

When importing data, you may want to group peer records. This can be done 

manually after import or during the import process by grouping peer records. 


ID ReportsTo Name Title 

1 Larry Stevens Manager Sales 

2 1 Claire Chancellor Sales Associate 

3 1 Bill London Sales Associate 

4 1 Joanne Banks Engineer 

5 1 Patrick Gaines Engineer 

Grouping by title would yield: 

this chart… 

rather than this. 



CHAPTER 9 

➣ To combine records into multi-records boxes: 

1 In the Import Wizard - Verify Hierarchy dialog box (see page 9-20), select the 

Group… button to display the Group dialog box. . 

2 Select the Group Peers checkbox. 

3 Use the Group using: drop-down menu to select a field (For example, the 

Function field in the example above). 

4 Select the Only group boxes with no subordinates checkbox to limit the 

grouping of peer boxes to the bottom level of your organizational chart. If you 

select this option, you can also set the Group Boxes with no peers checkbox 

to group all boxes without peers. 

5 Optionally, you can use the Criteria tab to restrict grouping to include only 

boxes that meet specific criteria (i.e. Title = Sales Associate). 

6 Click OK to exit the Group dialog box. 

Top of Chart 

By default OrgPlus displays the Largest Branch (chart) that can be created from a 

data source. You can change which branch is used to build a chart. You can also 

create a chart with multiple top positions. 

1 Click the Top of Chart… button in the Import Wizard – Verify Hierarchy dialog 

box to display the Top of Chart dialog 



You can choose which record(s) will be designated as the top position in the 

chart by either specifying a Position or Reports to value. This is useful in the 

following cases: 

• Multiple boxes at the top: To designate more than one box at the top of 

chart make sure that each box must has the same reports to value. 

• Circular Reference at the top: The top boxes report to each other. 

• Display orphans at the top: All orphan records must have the same 

reports to value. 

Note: You can enter multiple values separated by commas. 

2 Click OK. 

Filtering Data 

The Filter Data dialog box enables you to limit the information that is charted from 

the source. You can use this feature to extract the hierarchy of a specific 

department, division or sub-division of a large organization. 

➣ To filter the branches to be imported: 

1 From the Import Wizard - Verify Hierarchy dialog box (see page 9-20), click 

Filter Data to display the Filter Data dialog box. 



CHAPTER 9 

2 Define the filter options as follows: 

• Choose top position: Enables you to define the top level in the chart tree 

that you want to import. By default Chart is selected in the Top Position 


If you choose a manager, only that manager’s branch is imported. 

• Choose number of levels: Having chosen the Top Position, you can now 

define how many levels below that top position must be filtered. 

• Filter Levels from: Select the name of the first person in the filter level 

from the drop-down list. 

• Show Levels: By default the drop-down list shows the maximum 

number of levels below the Top Position that you can filter. Select any 

other level from the drop-down list. 


Note: Optionally, you can change the fields that are displayed in the Filter Data 

dialog box by clicking the Show Fields button. 



Complex Hierarchies 

OrgPlus can handle data with a hierarchy that cannot be processed using only the 

ReportsTo and Position fields. For example, you can use an OrgUnit hierarchy, in 

which the reporting structure is defined by organizations and then by a position 

hierarchy within each organization. 

OrgUnits Containing Position 

If the Primary Position in your hierarchy is the OrgUnit and each OrgUnit reports to a 

ParentOrgUnit, you can define a Secondary Hierarchy to chart the reporting structure 

within each Orgunit. 

The following chart was created (using the table below) by adding a secondary 

hierarchy in which Supervisor ID reports to Department ID: 

Position Supervisor Department Parent Dept. Name Title 

500 1 Chris Phillips CEO 

501 500 1 Lynn Brewer CFO 

100 2 1 Tina Nomura COO 

101 100 2 1 Cathy Fineran Facilities 

102 100 2 1 Dan Handalian HR 

300 3 1 Larry Stevens VP 



CHAPTER 9 

➣ To define a Secondary Hierarchy 

1 On the Verify Hierarchy page of the Import Wizard, click the Advanced… button 

to display the Advanced Hierarchy Options dialog box. 

2 Select the Secondary Hierarchy: radio button. 

3 Use the Position: and Reports To: drop down menus to define the reporting 

structure of the secondary hierarchy. 

4 Click OK to continue with the import process. 



OrgUnit Containing a Chief Position 

If your data contains a hierarchy of OrgUnits (or departments), you can identify a 

Chief Position within each OrgUnits in order to build a hierarchy. For example, 

importing the data below results in the chart that follows: 

OrgUnit ParentOrgUnit ChiefPosition Name Title 

1 1 Chris Phillips CEO 

1 0 Lynn Brewer CFO 

2 1 1 Tina Nomura CFO 

2 1 0 Cathy Fineran Facilities 

2 1 0 Dan Handalian HR 

3 1 1 Larry Stevens VP 



CHAPTER 9 

➣ To define a Chief Position 

1 On the Verify Hierarchy page of the Import Wizard, click the Advanced… 

button to display the Advanced Hierarchy Options dialog box. 

2 Select the Define Chief Position: radio button. 



3 Click the Condition… button to display the Advanced Hierarchy Conditions 

dialog box. 

4 Define the criteria for identifying chief positions. 

5 Click OK to finish defining the condition. 

6 Click OK to continue with the import process. 

Using LDAP 

OrgPlus can be configured to access an LDAP server. You must create a data 

connection file and then use the Import Wizard to select that file. 

➣ To create an LDAP Data Connection File 

• Create a file with the extension type .ldap. Include the following parameters in 

your LDAP data connection file. 

Parameter 

server 

Protocol 

Description 

LDAP server address (for example, 

server=someserver.somenet) 

Protocol specifies version 2 or 3 of LDAP. (for 

example, protocol=3) 



CHAPTER 9 

Parameter 

user 

rememberpassword 

skiplogin 

password 

filter 

base 

acceptedfields 

multivalued 

lowercase 

Description 

Login name (for example, user=cn=some_dn 

Keep encrypted password in LDAP config file (0=no, 

1= yes) 

Skips login dialog (1=no, 0=yes) 

Encrypted LDAP server password is created by using 

the login screen at least once 

LDAP search filter string 

The name of the entry from which to begin the 

search. Multiple base entries can be added using 

semicolons 

Indicates which attributes to return for each 

matching entry 

For multivalued attributes, choose to take only the 

first value (first), create new columns for each value 

(clone), or append each value in a single field 

(append) 

List of fields which should be forced into a 

lowercase. Useful for Position and ReportsTo fields. 

The following is an example of an LDAP connection file: 

[logon] 

server=someserver.somenet 

protocol=3 

user=cn=some_dn 

password=some_pass 

rememberpassword=1 

skiplogon=0 

[config] 

Multivalued=append 

lowercase=dn,manager,cn,ou 



filter=(objectclass=OrgPerson) 

base=ou=people,dc=metaview,dc=orgplus,dc=com 

acceptedfields=dn,manager,cn,mail,telephoneNumber,PhotoURL,title,ou 

Refreshing Data 

OrgPlus enables you to perform a Data Refresh on charts created from an external 

data source. 


Refreshing your Chart Data page 9-42 

Changing Refresh Properties page 9-42 

Excluding Box Contents Page 9-46 

Refreshing your Chart Data 

Refresh updates the chart data from the source. In the refresh process, your source 

data overwrites the data in your chart. Other than formatting, refresh does not 

preserve any changes made directly to a chart. 

Note: You can specifically exclude one or more boxes from the refresh process using 

the Lock on Refresh option discussed below in Excluding Box Contents. 

You can change Refresh settings. For details, see Changing Refresh Properties, 

page 9-42. 

➣ To refresh your chart data from the data source: 

1 With your chart displayed, select Refresh Data from the Data menu. 

2 Because data refresh may be time consuming (especially for large charts), you 

will be prompted to continue. Click Yes. 

When the refresh process is complete, you have the option of viewing a log of all 

changes made 

3 Click Yes if you want to view the log; otherwise click No. 

Changing Refresh Properties 

The Refresh Properties dialog box enables you to change the parameters set during 

the import process. By default, Refresh Data uses the same settings as the original 

Import. The available settings are described on page 9-43. 

9-42 Refreshing Data


CHAPTER 9 

Refresh Properties can be used only with charts created from an external data 

source. 

➣ To change the Refresh properties: 

1 With your chart displayed, select Refresh Properties from the Data menu to 

display the Refresh Properties dialog box. 

2 On the Source tab you can modify the following parameters: 

• Data Source: Select a new data source. This is useful if the original data 

source has been moved or renamed. 

• Data Filters: During import you can choose to import a subset of your 

source data. You can modify the original data filter to change the subset of 

source data used during refresh. 

• Import Fields From Source: Select the fields to be updated during the 

Refresh process. Only selected fields are refreshed, while the unchecked 

fields are not modified during refresh. The Modify button becomes active 

when you select any field. 

Refreshing Data 9-43


• To remap a field: Select any checked field and click the Modify button. 

Use the Field from Source drop-down list to map the field to a data 

source field. 

• To add a field: Select the checkbox associated with any unchecked field 

to display the Modify dialog. Define field mapping using the OrgPlus 

Field drop-down list. By default, a new OrgPlus field with the same name 

as the data source field is created. You can name the OrgPlus field by 

typing directly into the OrgPlus Field drop-down. 

Note: At any time, you can rename OrgPlus fields by selecting Define 

Fields… from the Data menu. 

• Position: Select the field to be used as the position field. The position field 

and Reports To fields are required to build the chart hierarchy. 

• Reports To: Select the field to be used as the Reports To field. 

• Unique Field: Select the field to be used as the unique identifier for each 

record in the source data. This field is used to match boxes in the existing 

chart with records from the data source. 



CHAPTER 9 

3 Click the Options tab to modify further parameters. 

Re-apply Sub-chart Rules: After refreshing a chart, reapply the original subchart 

rules. 

Re-apply Chart Rules: After refreshing a chart, reapply all defined chart rules. 

Re-apply Photo Manager: After refreshing a chart, refresh all photos based on 

the current Photo Manager settings. 

Refresh Hierarchy: When Refresh Hierarchy is selected, the reporting structure 

of the chart and the contents of each box are updated during a refresh. When 

this option is not selected, only information within the chart boxes is updated. 

This is useful when the data source contains incorrect or is missing hierarchy 

information, or when you have manually modified the hierarchy of the chart. 

Refresh Auxiliary Lines: After refreshing a chart, refresh all auxiliary lines 

based on the AuxReportsTo advanced data field. See Adding Auxiliary Lines in 

Chapter 5 for more information on advanced data fields. 

Refreshing Data 9-45


Refresh Combined Positions: After refreshing the chart, re-combine records 

into multi-record boxes based on the settings in the Combine dialog (see 

Combining Multiple Records in Chapter 6 for more information on combining 

records). 

Refresh Group Positions: After refreshing the chart, group peers based on 

settings from the Group dialog (see Grouping Peers on page 9-32 for more 

information). 

Re-apply Sorting: After refreshing a chart, re-sort boxes based on the options 

defined in the Sort Data dialog box. 

Unassigned Positions 

Remove unassigned Positions: If you select this option, orphan records that 

are currently in the chart, will be removed from the project in the refresh. 

Maintain Mapping of Unassigned Positions: Select this option if you want 

the refresh to maintain the chart positions of records that are orphans in the 

data source. 

Note: You can preserve the current positions of orphan records you have 

mapped and prevent the inclusion of further orphan records in the refresh 

process by checking both of the Unassigned Positions checkboxes. 

Determine top of chart using: 

By default OrgPlus displays the Largest Branch (chart) that can be created 

from a data source. You can choose which record(s) will be designated as the top 

position in the chart by either specifying a Position or Reports to value. This is 

useful in the following cases: 

• Multiple boxes at the top: To designate more than one box at the top of 

chart make sure that each box must has the same reports to value. 

• Circular Reference at the top: The top boxes report to each other. 

• Display orphans at the top: All orphan records must have the same 

reports to value. 

4 Click OK to update your changes to the Refresh Properties. 

Excluding Box Contents from Data Refresh 

After manually updating the contents of a box, you may want to lock the contents of 

that box so that it is not updated during a data refresh. This is useful if you maintain 

data in one or more boxes that is not in your underlying data source. 

Note: If you have defined multi-record boxes, the Refresh process will preserve the 

formatting of those boxes and apply that formatting to any new multi-record boxes 

created by data refresh. 



CHAPTER 9 

➣ To lock/unlock the contents of a box during data refresh: 

1 Select the boxes that you want to lock or unlock. 

2 Click the Box Layout tool or select Box Properties from the Format menu. 

The Box Properties dialog box is displayed. 

3 Click the Advanced tab. 

4 Check or uncheck the Lock contents during data refresh checkbox. 

5 Click OK. 

Exporting Data 

Chart data can be exported to a variety of formats. Export destinations include: 

• Windows Clipboard 

• Microsoft Excel Workbook (.xls) 

• Microsoft Excel 2007 Workbook (.xlsx) 

• Microsoft Word Document (.doc) 

• Microsoft Word 2007 Document (.docx) 

• Comma Separated File (.csv) 

• Tab Separated File (.txt) 


Sending to Microsoft Excel page 9-47 

Exporting Data to Other Formats Page 9-48 

Sending to Microsoft Excel 

The Send to Excel button 

Excel. 

provides a quick way to export data to Microsoft 

➣ To send data to Excel: 

1 Select the chart boxes you want to export. If nothing is selected all displayed 

boxes will be exported. 

Exporting Data 9-47


2 Click the Send to Excel button . Chart data is sent to a blank worksheet in 

Excel. Fields not displayed in chart boxes are not exported. 

3 Use Excel to perform any functions on the exported data. The first row of the 

Excel spreadsheet contains field names. 

Exporting Data to Other Formats 

This section describes how you can export chart data to a variety of formats. 

➣ To export data: 

1 Select the chart boxes you want to export. If nothing is selected all displayed 

boxes will be exported. 

9-48 Exporting Data


CHAPTER 9 

2 Select Export Data from the Data menu. The Export Data dialog box is 

displayed. 

3 The Available fields section lists all the fields defined in the current chart. The 

Fields to export section lists the fields to be included in the export. You can 

select any field and then use the Add, Add all, Remove, and Remove all 

buttons to define which fields are exported. 

4 Use the Move up and Move down buttons to change the ordering of fields. 

5 Select Headers if you want the first row of the export to contain field names. 

6 Select Reporting Relationship if you want to include hierarchy information in 

your export file. 

• Select the Based on radio button to generate hierarchy information using an 

existing field 

• Select the Generate Unique IDs radio button to have OrgPlus create 

unique identifiers that describe the reporting relationships in your chart. 

7 In the Export What section you can select whether to export the Entire chart, 

the Active sub-chart, or the current Selection. 

8 Use the Sort data first button if you want to sort the data before export. 

9 Use the Export to drop-down list to select whether you want to export to a file 

or to the clipboard. 

Exporting Data 9-49


10 Click the Export button to perform the data export. 

If you are exporting to a file, you will be prompted to enter a file name and to 

select one of the following file types: 

• Windows Clipboard 



• Microsoft Word Document (.doc) 

• Microsoft Word 2007 Document (.docx) 



Note: The Save table template function is useful if you do the same exports 

repeatedly. It allows you to save an export template containing information such as 

which fields to export, whether to export headers, and so on. Use the Open table 

template button to load previously saved table templates. 

Push Data 

This section describes how to selectively push data fields or OrgPlus files from 

OrgPlus to an external system. 

➣ To push data: 

1 Select Push Data from the Data menu to display the Push Data dialog box. 

2 Specify whether your want to push Data (default) or OPX (OrgPlus file). 

3 Use the Select Fields… or Select Settings… button to specify the contents of 

the export file. See Exporting Data on page 9-47 for more details. 

Note: the Select Fields… button appears when you select Data. The Select 

Settings… button appears when you select OPX. 

9-50 Push Data


CHAPTER 9 

4 Use the Disk or FTP radio buttons to specify where you want your export file to 

be pushed. Use the FTP… button to specify FTP parameters. 

Note: OrgPlus supports both standard FTP and secure FTP. 

5 Click the Browse button. Enter a file name and select one of the following file 

types: 





6 Click OK. 

Note: You can automate the process of pushing data from OrgPlus to an external 

system by selecting Push Data from the Data menu. See Chapter 11, Automation 

for more information. 

Note: OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted users can use the Push Data functionality to send 

charts from OrgPlus Desktop products to OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted. See Chapter 11, 

Automation for more information. 

Consolidation 

Some organizations may want to combine multiple OrgPlus organizational charts into 

a single chart. One common scenario is that each division within a company is 

responsible for maintaining their own organizational chart using OrgPlus. Using the 

consolidation feature, each division’s chart can be combined into a single master 

chart. 

Creating an OrgTree File 

An OrgTree file is used to combine two or more charts into a single chart. The 

OrgTree is an organizational chart of org units (or departments). You must create an 

OrgTree file in order to combine two or more charts. 

➣ To create an OrgTree file: 

1 Click on the Create blank project icon . 

Consolidation 9-51


2 Create a chart containing a hierarchy of all the charts that you want to combine. 

3 In the first field of each box enter the name of each OrgUnit (department). 

Note: Optionally, you can create a field called OrgUnit instead of using the first 

field. 

4 Select Save As… from the File menu. 

5 Name the file (for example, OrgTree) and click Save. 

Combining Charts 

Once the OrgTree file is created, you must map an OrgPlus (.opx) file to each box in 

the OrgTree file. The files must be located in the same directory or the OrgTree must 

contain an absolute path reference to each underlying chart. 

Although not required, you will get the best results if each file uses the same naming 

convention for all fields (for example either Name or Employee_Name). 

9-52 Consolidation


CHAPTER 9 

➣ To combine two or more charts located in the same directory: 

1 Make sure that all OrgPlus files are located in the same directory and that each 

file name corresponds to a box in the OrgTree file. 

2 Select Consolidation… from File menu to display the Consolidation dialog. 

3 Use the Browse… button in OrgTree file: area to select the OrgTree file. 

4 Use the Browse… button in Chart directory: area to specify the directory 

containing the chart files. 

5 Specify your preference for handling sub-chart breaks: 

Insert sub-charts breaks - By default sub-chart breaks will be automatically 

inserted based the OrgTree file. Uncheck Insert sub-charts breaks if you do 

not want sub-chart breaks inserted into your chart. 

6 Specify your preference for handling fields that do not appear in the first file: 

Ignore Fields not in the first file - By default any fields that are not defined in 

the first file (the top of your OrgTree) are excluded. To include fields defined in 

files other than the first file, uncheck the Ignore Fields not in the first file 

checkbox. 

7 Specify whether the consolidated chart will inherit the template elements of the 

first file: 

Use the first file as template – This option enables you to copy all template 

elements—Master Page, Conditional Formatting, Groups, etc. from the first file to 

the resulting consolidated chart. 

Consolidation 9-53


8 (Optional) Specify your preference for handling records that appear in two or 

more charts: 

Match records using field: This option enables you to designate a field as the 

primary key for matching records that appear in more than one chart. For 

example, if an employee record appears in more than one of the charts that you 

are consolidating, it is possible that the fields of that record differ from one chart 

to another. By selecting this checkbox and entering a field name, such as 

EMPLOYEE_ID, you can ensure that the consolidated chart does not contain 

duplicate boxes. 

9 Click OK. 

10 Save the resulting chart by selecting Save As… from the File menu. 

➣ To combine two or more charts located in different directories: 

1 Open your OrgTree file and in the second field of each box enter the full path to 

the corresponding chart file. 

Note: Optionally, you can create a field called Location instead of using the 

second field. 

2 Save the revised OrgTree file. 

3 Select Consolidation… from File menu. The Consolidation dialog is displayed. 

4 Use the Browse… button in OrgTree file: area to select the OrgTree file. 

5 Select Use OrgTree to locate chart files. 

9-54 Consolidation


CHAPTER 9 

6 Specify your preference for handling sub-chart breaks: 

Insert sub-charts breaks - By default sub-chart breaks will be automatically 

inserted based the OrgTree file. Uncheck Insert sub-charts breaks if you do 

not want sub-chart breaks inserted into your chart. 

7 Specify your preference for handling fields that do not appear in the first file: 

Ignore Fields not in the first file - By default any fields that are not defined in 

the first file (the top of your OrgTree) are excluded. To include fields defined in 

files other than the first file, uncheck the Ignore Fields not in the first file 

checkbox. 

8 Specify whether the consolidated chart will inherit the template elements of the 

first file: 

Use the first file as template – This option enables you to copy all template 

elements—Master Page, Conditional Formatting, Groups, etc. from the first file to 

the resulting consolidated chart. 

9 (Optional) Specify your preference for handling records that appear in two or 

more charts: 

Match records using field: This option enables you to designate a field as the 

primary key for matching records that appear in more than one chart. For 

example, if an employee record appears in more than one of the charts you that 

are consolidating, it is possible that the fields of that record differ from one chart 

to another. By selecting this checkbox and entering a field name, such as 

EMPLOYEE_ID, you can ensure that the consolidated chart does not contain 

duplicate boxes. 

10 Click OK. 

11 Save the resulting chart by selecting Save As… from the File menu. 

Data Refresh and Consolidation 

Once consolidation is setup, you can use the data refresh functionality (described in 

this chapter) to refresh the master chart if any one of the underlying charts has 

changed. You can also update the OrgTree file if your organizational structure 

changes. Select Data Refresh from the Data menu to refresh your chart. See 

Refreshing Data on page 9-42 for more details. 

Use the Consolidation tab in Refresh Properties dialog to update any consolidation 

parameters (Select Data Refresh Properties from the Data menu). 

Note: You can combine collaboration with OrgPlus automation features. See Chapter 

11, Automation for more information. 

Consolidation 9-55


9-56 Consolidation

Chapter 10 

Publishing your Chart 



Publishing page 10-2 

E-mailing a Chart File Page 10-13 

Overview 

OrgPlus enables you to publish your chart to a variety of formats including Microsoft 

PowerPoint, Microsoft Word, HTML, Adobe PDF, directly to a printer, or to the 

OrgPlus Plug-in. The publish feature is available only in OrgPlus Professional. 

Emailing charts directly to other OrgPlus users is also described in this chapter. 

Users that require read-only access to OrgPlus files may want to download a free 

copy of OrgPlus Reader from the OrgPlus website (www.orgplus.com ). 

Note: The OrgPlus Plug-in is an ActiveX control that can be installed automatically in 

an end user’s web browser. 

10-1


Publishing 

The publishing process for OrgPlus is identical regardless of the final format. There 

are different options and specific features available for some formats. This section 

describes the process as a whole, and pauses to discuss the specific features 

available for each format. 

➣ To publish your chart: 

1 With your chart open, choose a Publishing method by selecting Publish To from 

the File menu to display the Publishing Wizard. 

2 Select the appropriate publishing options. 

Available for all publishing formats: 

• Expand Collapsed Branches: Before publishing the chart, expand all 

collapsed chart branches. 

10-2 Publishing


CHAPTER 10 

Page Layout Options (Word, PowerPoint, PDF, and Printer): 

• Slide Show Layout/Page Layout: Defines the way the chart is published. 

• Wall: Publishes the active sub-chart only. No additional charts, 

directories, reports or profiles are published. 

• Book: Publishes your entire chart, with each sub-chart on its own page. 

This option allows you to include additional charts, as well as directories, 

reports and profiles. You can optionally include a customized cover page 

and Content and Index pages that contain hyperlinks to the respective 

pages in the chart. 

When Book is selected, the Box Sizes option is enabled. 

• Select automatically to size boxes on a page-by-page basis. 

• Select consistently across all sub charts to ensure that box sizes 

across all sub-charts are consistent. 

• Orientation: Defines how the chart is oriented on each slide/page (Portrait 

or Landscape). 

Word and PowerPoint Options: 

• Embedded Type: Enables you to determine how the chart is embedded in 

Word or PowerPoint. There are two options: 

• Insert Metafile: Inserts the chart as a non-editable graphical image. 

• Select Maximize chart area to scale each published chart to the fill 

the destination page. 

• Include Navigation Arrows: Includes hyper-linked navigation 

arrows in the file (Not included for Word). 

• Insert Object: Inserts the chart as a linked object that is editable in 

OrgPlus. Once published, you can double-click on a chart in Word or 

PowerPoint to edit. 

• Select Remove Fields Not Shown to exclude hidden fields from the 

published chart. This protects sensitive information (for example, 

salaries) from being accessed in Word or PowerPoint. 

• Select Fixed Line Widths if you have dashed or dotted lines in your 

chart. Some Microsoft applications do not support multiple line width 

combined with dashed lines. 

OrgPlus Plug-in Options: 

• Hide Panels: Hides any included panels (sub-charts, profiles, directories, 

and reports) when a chart is first displayed. The Show 

Hide 

icon or the 

icon on the toolbar can be used to show or hide the panels. 

Publishing 10-3


• Enable Print: Enables users to print published charts from OrgPlus Plug-in. 

• Enable Save: Enables users to download published charts from OrgPlus 

Plug-in. 

• Enable Send to Excel: Enables users to send the chart data to a Microsoft 

Excel spreadsheet file. 

• Remove Fields Not Shown: Prevents users from viewing or saving hidden 

data contained in the original chart file (for example, salaries or, employee 

identification numbers). 

• HTML Container: Creates an HTML container page for the chart. 

• Select Auto Update Enabled to automatically install OrgPlus Plug-in 

when users open an HTML page containing an OrgPlus Plug-in chart. 

• Select Automatically Activate ActiveX Control to activate ActiveX 

Control when users open an HTML page containing an OrgPlus Plug-in 

chart. 

• Enable Security: Enables OrgPlus Plug-in Security. See OrgPlus Plug-in 

Security Options on page 10-12 for more information. 

• Choose which toolbar buttons you want accessible in OrgPlus Plug-in: 

• Include "Launch OrgPlus" button 

• Include "Publish to PP" button 

• Include "Publish to Word" button 

• Include "Publish to OrgPlus Plug-in" button 

• Include "Publish to HTML" button 

• Include "Publish to PDF" button 

HTML Options: 

• Enable Toolbar: Includes an OrgPlus toolbar when the chart is loaded in a 

web browser. 

• Enable Save: Allows users to save a local copy of the OrgPlus file. The 

OrgPlus file can be opened using OrgPlus Standard or Professional. The file 

can also be opened using OrgPlus Reader. 

• Enable Print: Allows users to print the chart. 

• Include Banner: Includes a banner above the chart in the HTML display. 

You can customize the banner with company information, etc. 

• Hide Panels: Hides any included panels (sub-charts, profiles, directories) 

when a chart is first displayed. The Show icon or the Hide icon on 

the toolbar can be used to show or hide the panels. 

10-4 Publishing


CHAPTER 10 

• Smaller, faster HTML Charts: Optimizes the HTML file size. Shadows and 

other non-essentials elements are removed from HTML output to enable 

Internet Explorer to load and display your chart faster. 

• Automatically Activate Active Control: Enables JavaScript elements in 

your published chart to launch without first requiring the user to permit it. 

• Disable Right Click Menu: Helps increase security of images and other 

data in the chart by preventing users from accessing the right click menu 

options. 

• Encoding: Specify either ANSI or Unicode encoding used to generate the 

HTML files. 

• Internet Explorer Compatibility: Specify the Internet Explorer version 

compatibility options: 

• Version 6.0 and Higher 

• Version 7.0 and Higher 

PDF Options: 

• Font Embedding: Select how fonts are to be embedded in the published 

document. 

• Select Descriptor only to store only Font names in the PDF file. If a 

user does not have the specified font installed, a substitute font is used. 

This creates smaller PDF files. 

• Select Outlines to include complete font descriptions in the PDF file. This 

ensures that the chart in displayed using the original font selections. This 

creates larger PDF files. 

• Include Navigation Arrows: Includes hyper-linked navigation arrows in 

the PDF file. 

• Image Compression: Compresses images and text in the PDF file. 

• GrayScale: Output the PDF file using only grayscales. 

• ASCII: Encodes binary data in an ASCII based-85 representation. 

• Maximize chart area: Maximizes the chart area in the published output. 

Printer Options: 

• Maximize chart area: Maximizes the chart area in the published output. 

• Include Navigation Arrows: Include sub-chart arrows in print output. 

3 Click Next. The Publish Setting Page is displayed. 

Note: Selecting the Wall mode outputs only the chart. The Publish Options 

Page is skipped. 

Publishing 10-5


Note: Clicking Next with Enable Security (OrgPlus Plug-in) selected displays 

the Specify Security Options page. See OrgPlus Plug-in Security Options on page 

10-12 for more information. 

4 If you are publishing to Power Point, you can select an existing PowerPoint 

template to be used when publishing. Select Use PowerPoint Template and 

then click the Browse… button to select a template. 

5 If you are publishing to PowerPoint, Word, PDF or Printer, make sure the Cover 

tab is selected. The Include Cover Page checkbox is selected by default. Enter 

the Cover page text and optionally use the Font button to set the format. 

Note: You can include AutoText elements in your cover page, such as author’s 

name or date last revised. Click the AutoText button to display a drop down 

menu of AutoText entries. 

10-6 Publishing


CHAPTER 10 

6 If you are publishing to PowerPoint, Word, PDF or Printer, select the Contents 

tab. Select Include Contents Page to include a Table of Contents and then 

optionally use the Font button to set the format. 

7 Select the Chart Contents tab. A list containing all the charts and sub-charts 

within the current project is displayed. By default all charts and sub-charts are 

included. Clear any sub-charts you do not want included in the published 

document. 

Publishing 10-7


Note: If you are publishing in PowerPoint, click the Options… button to display 

the Chart Contents Options dialog box. By default your PowerPoint will be 

published with links from Chart pages to the Contents page and to the Index 

page. You can enable or disable the links as needed. 

10-8 Publishing


CHAPTER 10 

8 If you are publishing to PowerPoint, Word, PDF or Printer, select the Index tab. 

Select Include Index Page to include the index page. 

Index formatting options include: 

• Select Field For Index: Select the field used to create the index. 

• Sort By: Select the field by which the index is sorted. You can then select to 

sort in Ascending or Descending order. 

• Columns: Define the number of columns per index page. 

• Levels up to: Select the number of chart levels to include in the index. 

• Click Font to change the format of the Index. 

• Index Order: Specify which way you want the index to flow. By default, the 

index flows down, then over. 

Publishing 10-9


9 When you are finished with the Publish Settings Page, click Next to display the 

Publish Output Page dialog box. 

• In the Output field, enter the full path and name of the output file, or click 

Browse to specify the name and path using standard Windows file browser. 

• Select the following options: 

• Launch PowerPoint/Word/Browser/PDF: To automatically launch 

PowerPoint, Word, Acrobat Reader, or your Browser when the publish 

operation is complete. 

• For PDF, OrgPlus Plug-in, and HTML, you can save to disk or upload to a 

server using FTP. 

• Disk: Saves the output file on disk according to the path and file name 

entered in the Output field. You can also click Browse to use the 

standard Windows browser. 

• FTP: Saves the output file to an FTP server according to the path and file 

name entered in the FTP Location field. You can also click FTP to open 

the Session Profile dialog box. The Session Profile dialog enables you 

to configure an FTP session. 

10-10 Publishing


CHAPTER 10 

• For OrgPlus Plug-in, an HTML… button is shown if you selected the HTML 

Container option. Select the HTML… to define the HTML container settings. 

For more information see the OrgPlus Plug-in Deployment article in the 

Support Center at www.orgplus.com/support/. 

• When you are publishing to a printer, select Show Print Dialog to display 

the standard Print Options dialog box before printing the document. 

• To send the published chart to one or more e-mail addresses, select the 

Send as E-mail checkbox. Then click the Send… button to display the Send 

as E-mail dialog box. 

Note: To use this feature you must define your e-mail field with the E-mail 

category. See Defining Field Properties in Chapter 4 for details. 

• E-mail Client – Select this option to use your default e-mail client. 

• SMTP – Select this option to use Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. This 

option sends the e-mail with the SMTP settings defined in OrgPlus. See 

Using the Options Panel in Chapter 6 for more information. 

10 Click OK to complete the publishing process. 

Note: Publishing (including e-mail distribution) can be automated. See Chapter 11, 

Automation for more information. 

Publishing 10-11


OrgPlus Plug-in Security Options 

When publishing your chart to the OrgPlus Plug-in, you can define security options to 

control end user access your published chart. 

➣ To define OrgPlus Plug-in Security Options 

1 Select the Enable Security checkbox on the Publishing Options page of the 

OrgPlus Plug-in Publishing Wizard. 

2 Click Next to display the Specify Security Options page. 

3 Click the radio button that identifies your security selection: 

• Use Password only – Enter a Password that users will need to access the 

chart. 

• Use the following User Name and Password – Enter a User Name and a 

Password that users will need to access the chart. 

• Browse for a flat file containing user accounts – Click the Browse 

button to locate an account file. 

10-12 Publishing


CHAPTER 10 

Note: The user account file must contain two columns, one for the user 

names and one for the passwords as in the example below: 

cphillips 

lbrewer 

lstevens 

cphillips123 

lbrewer123 

stevens123 

E-mailing a Chart File 

You can email an OrgPlus chart to anyone. They must have an installed copy of 

OrgPlus or the OrgPlus Plug-in to open the chart file. 

➣ To email an OrgPlus chart: 

1 With a project open, select Send as Mail from the File menu. The New Message 

dialog box in your email client is displayed. The OrgPlus project is included as an 

attachment. 

2 Complete the email and click Send. 

E-mailing a Chart File 10-13


10-14 E-mailing a Chart File

Chapter 11 

Automation 



Republishing Page 11-2 

Scheduling Tasks Page 11-3 

OrgPlus Page 11-9 

Overview 

OrgPlus allows you to automate distribution of your charts. Using the OrgPlus 

Scheduler, you can trigger OrgPlus to publish data to a network file server, your 

intranet, or to the web. 

The automation features of OrgPlus can also be used to export and push data fields 

from your charts to external systems. This is especially useful for OrgPlus Enterprise 

Hosted users. 

The automation features are available only in OrgPlus Professional. 

11-1


Republishing 

Each time you publish or push data, OrgPlus saves all the settings. OrgPlus lets you 

republish any previously published chart or re-push any exported data. 

➣ To republish or re-push: 

1 Select Publisher from the Tools menu to display the Publisher dialog box. 

2 Select Publish or Push using the drop-down list at the top of the dialog. A list of 

previously published/pushed files is shown. 

3 Select a file to republish or re-push. 

4 Select from the following options: 

• Run in quiet mode: If this option is selected, no user warnings or errors 

are displayed. 

• Refresh before publish/push: If this option is selected, a data refresh is 

performed before publishing/pushing. This option is only available if your 

chart was created from an external data source. 

• Launch Application: If this option is selected, the publish/push result is 

shown using the appropriate application (PowerPoint, Excel, etc…). 

5 Select Run. 

11-2 Republishing

Automation 

CHAPTER 11 

Scheduling Tasks 

The Scheduler enables you to automatically refresh, publish and push your charts 

according to a schedule. You can schedule tasks to run on a daily, weekly, monthly 

basis, or on a given date. 

There three types of tasks you can perform: 

• Refresh: A refresh task performs a data refresh on the selected project. 

• Publish: Each time you publish, OrgPlus saves all the publishing parameters. 

When you create a publish task, OrgPlus lets you pick from a list of previously 

published files. When the task is executed, the file is republished using the same 

parameters as when the file was originally published. 

Note: An automated publishing task can include sending an e-mail (with the 

published material attached) to a group of users. See Using Groups for E-mail 

Distribution in Chapter 5, Working with Charts: Visualization and Navigation for 

more details. 

• Push: Each time you push data, OrgPlus saves all the associated parameters. 

When you create a push task, OrgPlus lets you pick from a list of previous 

pushes. When the task is executed, an export file is generated and pushed using 

the same parameters that were using during the original push. 


Creating Tasks page 11-4 

Editing Tasks Page 11-7 

Deleting Tasks page 11-7 

Checking Task page 11-8 

Scheduling Tasks 11-3


Creating Tasks 

This section describes how to create tasks in the OrgPlus Scheduler. 

➣ To add a new task to the scheduler: 

1 Select Scheduler from the Tools menu to display the Scheduler Properties 

dialog box. 

2 Click New to display the New Scheduled Task dialog box. 

11-4 Scheduling Tasks

Automation 

CHAPTER 11 

Note: You can select how files are displayed in the New Scheduled Task dialog 

box as follows: 

Button 

Description 

Icons: Display an icon of each file with its name beneath. 

List: List the names of each file. 

Details: List detailed information for each file, including its size 

and the date it was last modified. 

3 Select the Task Type from the drop-down menu (Refresh, Publish or Push) 

you want to perform. 

4 Select a file for the task. 

• If you are creating a Refresh task, select a file from the Refresh Charts 

area. Use the Add button to browse for a file. 

• If you are creating a Publish task, select a file from the Publish Charts area. 

Only files that have been previously published are shown in the list. 

• If you are creating a Push task, select a file from the Pushed Data area. 

Only files that have been previously pushed are shown in the list. 

Note: Use button to remove unwanted files. Deleting an entry does 

not delete the underlying file. 

5 If you are creating a Publish or Push task, the following options are available: 

• Run in quiet mode: If this option is selected, no user warnings or errors 

are displayed when the task is executed. This option is intended for 

unattended usage (such as a computer in a server room). 

• Refresh before publish/push: If this option is selected, a data refresh is 

performed before publishing/pushing. This option is only available if your 

chart was created from an external data source. 



6 Click OK to display the AutoTask dialog box. 

Note: This guide only describes the scheduling options that are relevant to 

OrgPlus. The AutoTask dialog box is a component of Microsoft Windows. Refer to 

the Microsoft documentation for the options not covered. 

7 Select the Schedule tab. 

8 Click New to create a schedule for this task. 

9 Configure the schedule as follows: 

• Schedule Task: Sets the frequency of the scheduled task from the dropdown 

list. Additional options may become available depending on your 

selection, for example, if you want the scheduled task to run weekly, you 

also have the option of selecting how many times a week the task must run 

and on which days. 

• Start Time: Sets the start time for the scheduled task. 


Automation 

CHAPTER 11 

10 Click OK to display the Scheduler Properties dialog box. 

Editing Tasks 


Note: You can schedule any task to run immediately using the Run button. 

You can edit any defined task. 

➣ To edit a task: 

Deleting Tasks 

1 Select Scheduler from the Tools menu. The Automation Scheduler dialog box is 

displayed. 

2 Choose a task and click Edit to change task options or click the button to 

change the schedule for the task. 

You can delete any defined task. 

➣ To delete a task: 

1 Select Scheduler from the Tools menu. The Automation Scheduler dialog box is 

displayed. 

2 Choose the scheduled task you want to delete, and click Delete. 



Checking Tasks 

If a task does not execute successfully you can check the status of a task. 

➣ To check a task: 

1 Select Scheduler from the Tools menu. The Automation Scheduler dialog 

box is displayed. 

2 The Enable/Status column displays the results of the last execution of each task. 

You may need to resize the column to see the entire message. 


Automation 

CHAPTER 11 


OrgPlus Enterprise is a web-based solution for organizational charting. OrgPlus 

Enterprise can be hosted in your data center, or it can be hosted using the OrgPlus 

Enterprise Hosted service. OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted allows you to deploy OrgPlus 

Enterprise to your organization without the cost of installing, upgrading, and 

maintaining a server in-house. See http://www.orgplus.com for more details. 

The Scheduler and Publisher functionality (described above) can be used to 

automatically or manually push data to OrgPlus Enterprise. 

➣ To push to data to OrgPlus Enterprise: 

Note: After you sign up for OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted, HumanConcepts will 

setup your OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted account and your initial chart templates. 

HumanConcepts will also supply all necessary FTP (or secure FTP) parameters. 

FTP parameters are used to upload data to OrgPlus Enterprise Hosted. 

1 Select Push Data from the Data menu. The Push Data dialog box is displayed. 

2 Use the Select Fields… button to specify which fields to push to OrgPlus 

Enterprise. 

3 Select the FTP radio button. Use the FTP… button to enter FTP parameters. 

4 Click the Browse button. Enter the file name. Make sure the Microsoft Excel 

(.xls) file type is selected. 

5 Click OK. 

OrgPlus Enterprise 11-9


11-10 OrgPlus Enterprise

Appendix A 

Window Structure and Command Reference 

➣ In this appendix… 

Main Window page A-2 

Menu Bar page A-3 

Toolbars page A-15 

Panels page A-24 

Chart Selection Tabs page A-29 

Status Bar page A-31 

A-1


Main Window 

The OrgPlus window comprises the following elements, each of which is described in 

detail in this appendix. 

A-2 Main Window


APPENDIX A 

Menu Bar 


Overview page A-4 

OrgPlus Express page A-4 

File Menu page A-4 

Edit Menu page A-5 

View Menu page A-7 

Insert Menu page A-9 

Format Menu page A-10 

Tools Menu page A-11 

Data Menu page A-12 

Chart Menu page A-12 

Window Menu page A-13 

Help Menu page A-14 

Menu Bar A-3


Overview 

This section describes the various menu options available in OrgPlus. 


File Menu 

OrgPlus Express can only be used from within Microsoft Office applications and has a 

limited set of features. Sections that describe functionality available to OrgPlus 

Express users are marked with the following OrgPlus Express icon 

. Menu 

options that are available to OrgPlus Express users are indicated with a . 

The File menu contains the following commands that are used when working with 

projects and charts. 

File Menu/ Hot 

Key Description Icon 

New 

+N 

Create a new project. 

Open +O Open a previously saved project. 

Close 

+W 

Save 

+S 

Save As 

Send As Mail 

Import Data 

Send to Excel 

Consolidation 

Publish To 

PowerPoint 

Word 

Close the active project. 

Save the active project or update the embedded 

OLE object in another application. 

Save the active project using a different name 

and/or file type. 

Attach the active project to an email message. 

Launch the Import Wizard. 

Export the current chart to an Excel spreadsheet 

Combine one or more OrgPlus charts into a single 

chart. 

Publish the active chart to one of the following 

formats: 

Microsoft PowerPoint 

Microsoft Word 

A-4 Menu Bar


APPENDIX A 

File Menu/ Hot 


OrgPlus Plug-In OrgPlus web browser plug-in 

HTML 

PDF 

Printer 

Page Setup 

Print Preview 

Print 

+P 

HTML 

Adobe PDF 

Your printer 

Define the page settings for the current chart. 

Display a preview of the chart prior to printing. 

Print all or part of the active project. 

Protect Project 

Project 

Properties 

Password protects the current project. 

Display information about the current project. 

Recent Projects List the file names of recently opened projects. 

Selecting a recent project opens that project. 

Exit 

+Q 

Edit Menu 

Exit OrgPlus. 

The Edit menu contains commands that enable you to perform the editing functions 

detailed below. 

Edit Menu/ Hot 


Undo 

+Z 

Redo 

+Y 

Cut 

+X 

Copy 

+C 

Copy Contents 

Reverse the last operation. 

Reverse the last Undo action. 

Remove whatever is selected and place it on the 

Clipboard. 

Copy whatever is selected and places it on the 

Clipboard. 

Copy the contents of a selected chart box and 

places it on the Clipboard. 

Menu Bar A-5




Copy Format 

Copy the format of a selected chart box and places 

it on the Clipboard. 

Paste +V Paste the contents of the Clipboard into the active 

chart. 

Paste As New 

Document 

Delete 

 

Delete Chart 

Select 

All 

All Assistants 

All Comanagers 

All Managers 

All Nonmanagers 

Direct Reports 

Peers 

Branch 

Lowest Level 

All Connecting 

Lines 

All Hidden 

Connecting 

Lines 

All Free 

Floating 

Objects 

All Anchored 

Objects 

Paste the contents of the Clipboard into a new 

chart. 

Delete the current selection. 

Delete the active chart. 

Select objects as described below: 

All chart boxes and lines. 

All Assistant boxes. 

All Manager boxes that share the same 

subordinates. 

All boxes that have subordinates. 

All boxes that are subordinates or assistants. 

All boxes that are connected directly to the 

selected box. 

All boxes that report to the same manager as the 

selected box. 

Selected box and all descendent boxes. 

All boxes that are on the last shown level. 

All the connecting lines between boxes. 

All the hidden connecting lines. 

All free floating objects. 

All free floating objects that are anchored to boxes. 

A-6 Menu Bar


APPENDIX A 



All Multirecord 

Boxes 

Select Fields 

Select Level(s) 

Find 

+F 

Find Next 

Replace 

+R 

Find by Photo 

+E 

All boxes that are marked as multi-record boxes. 

Select a specific field(s) within boxes. 

Select all the boxes in a specified set of levels. 

Locate occurrences of a string. 

Find the next occurrence of a string. 

Replace occurrences of a string with another string. 

Find a box by selecting from a list of photos. 

View Menu 

The View menu contains commands that enable you to control how your chart is 

displayed in the OrgPlus window. 

View Menu/ 

Hot Key Description Icon 

Full Screen 

F11 

Normal 

Master Page 

Sub-charts 

Directory 

Profile 

Reports 

Templates 

Search 

Comments 

Toggle full screen mode. Use Full Screen 

mode when using OrgPlus to give a 

presentation. 

Switch to the normal view, which is the 

default view for most charting tasks. 

Display the Master Page. 

Show or hides the Sub-charts panel. 

Show or hides the Directory panel. 

Show or hides the Profile panel. 

Show or hides the Reports panel. 

Show or hide the Templates panel. 

Show or hide the Search panel 

Show or hide the Comments panel 

Menu Bar A-7


View Menu/ 

Hot Key Description Icon 

Tree 

Toolbars 

Grid 

Rulers 

Status Bar 

Show Levels 

Show 

Hidden Boxes 

Hidden Lines 

Symbols 

Hidden Fields 

Comments 

Page Lines 

Show 

Thumbnail 

+H 

Zoom 

Fit to Width 

Fit to Window 

Actual Size 

Zoom To 

Show or hide the Tree panel. 

Show or hides toolbars. 

Show or hide grid. 

Show or hide rulers. 

Show or hides the Status Bar. 

Define the number of levels to show, up to 

and including the level specified. 

The following hidden elements can be 

temporarily shown using the following 

options: 

Hidden boxes. 

Hidden lines between boxes. 

Symbols (such as expand or collapse). 

Hidden fields. 

Show Comments. 

Lines indicating page borders. 

Show a window containing a overview of 

your chart. 

Set the magnification factor for the active 

chart according to one of the following 

options: 

Scale the chart so that the width of the 

chart fits in the current window. 

Scale the chart so that the entire chart fits 

in the current window. 

Scale the chart so that boxes appear at 

actual size. 

Scale the chart based on the selected 

percentage. 

A-8 Menu Bar


APPENDIX A 

Insert Menu 

The Insert menu contains the following commands that enable you to insert 

elements into a chart or project. 

Insert Menu 

Option Description Icon 

Chart 

Position 

Manager 

Assistant 

Subordinate 

Peer – Left Coworker 

Peer – Right 

Co-worker 

Sub-chart 

Insert Subchart 

Break 

Remove Subchart 

Break 

Create Subcharts 

Remove All 

Breaks 

Up 

Line 

Horizontal or 

Vertical 

Diagonal 

Auxiliary 

Add a new chart to the current project. 

Enable you to select one of the following box insert 

modes: 

Insert manager mode. 

Insert assistant mode. 

Insert subordinate mode. 

Insert left co-worker mode. 

Insert right co-worker mode. 

Select one of the following sub-charting options: 

Insert sub-chart breaks at the selected box. 

Remove sub-chart breaks from selected boxes. 

Launch the sub-chart wizard. 

Remove all sub-chart breaks from the active chart. 

Navigate from a sub-chart to its parent sub-chart. 

Select one of the following line drawing modes: 

Add a horizontal or vertical line. 

Add an unconstrained line. 

Add a line connecting any two boxes in your chart. 

Menu Bar A-9


Insert Menu 


Shape 

Rectangle 

Rounded 

Rectangle 

Octagon 

Text Box 

Picture 

Legend 

Hyperlink 

Comment 

Autotext 

elements 

Anchor 

Unanchor 

Select one of the following shape drawing modes: 

Add a rectangle with squared corners. 

Add a rectangle with rounded corners. 

Add an octagonal box. 

Add a free text object. 

Add a picture. 

Add a legend. 

Create a hyperlink from the selected field. 

Insert a comment for the selected box. 

Add an autotext element. The available autotext 

elements are described on page A-17. 

Anchor a selected free-floating object to a selected 

box. Once anchored the free floating object 

remains positioned next to the selected box even if 

it is moved within the chart area. 

Unanchor selected free-floating objects. 

Format Menu 

The Format menu contains the following commands that enable you to format 

various chart elements: 

Format Menu 


Box Properties 

F12 

Format selected boxes, free floating objects and 

pictures. 

Line Properties Format selected lines. 

Font 

Format Fields 

Chart Style 

Modify the font properties for all selected objects. 

Modify the font properties for all occurrences of a 

field within a chart. 

Modify the branch style for selected boxes. 

A-10 Menu Bar


APPENDIX A 

Format Menu 


Chart 

Properties 

Chart Rules 

Spacing 

Conditional 

Formatting 

Order 

Bring to Front 

Send to Back 

Bring Forward 

Send 

Backwards 

Align 

Hide 

Show 

Modify chart properties such as background, border 

and border shadow. 

Modify the branch style for all boxes that meet a 

set of user defined criteria. 

Adjust the spacing between boxes. 

Set the format of boxes or fields based on a set of 

conditions. 

Change the relative order of the free floating 

objects as follows: 

Move the selected object to the top layer. 

Move the selected object to the bottom layer. 

Move the selected object forward one layer. 

Move the selected object back one layer. 

Move selected objects so that they are aligned with 

respect to each other. Objects can be aligned to 

the left, center, right, top, middle, or bottom. 

Hide selected boxes or connecting lines. 

Show selected boxes or connecting lines. 

Tools Menu 

The Tools menu enables you to customize OrgPlus settings, schedule automatic 

processes and perform spell checks. 

Tools Menu 


Spelling 

Customize 

Options 

Scheduler 

Publisher 

Perform a spell check. 

Customize the elements contained within each 

toolbar and create new custom toolbars. 

Configure OrgPlus application settings. 

Create, modify, or schedule Refresh and Publish 

tasks. 

Republish any previously published file. 

Menu Bar A-11


Data Menu 

The Data menu enables to manage or export data from your chart. 

Data Menu 


Sort 

Export Data 

Push Data 

Refresh Data 

Refresh 

Properties 

Define Fields 

Define 

Constants 

Photo Manager 

Auto 

Recalculation 

Recalculate 

Formulas 

Sort selected boxes. 

Export data from your chart to Excel or the 

Clipboard. 

Export data from your chart to an FTP site or a 

file server. 

Re-import data from the underlying data source. 

Modify parameters set during the import process. 

These parameters are used when you Refresh 

Data. 

Add, delete, or modify the fields in the current 

project. 

Add, delete, or modify constants that can be 

referenced throughout the project. 

Insert photos into boxes in your chart using a 

wizard. 

Automatically recalculate all formulas each time 

the chart is changed. 

If automatic recalculation is turned off, select this 

option to update all calculated fields. 

Chart Menu 

The Chart menu contains the following commands that affect the size and 

appearance of your chart. 

Chart Menu 


Optimize 

Branch Styles 

Center 

Up/Down 

Reformat the branches in your chart to optimize the 

distribution of boxes on a page. 

Center your chart vertically on the page. 

A-12 Menu Bar


APPENDIX A 

Chart Menu 


Center 

Left/Right 

Groups 

Apply Template 

File 

Compare 

Charts 

Chart List 

Center your chart horizontally on the page. 

Select a group to apply to your chart. Select Manage 

Groups to add, edit, or delete groups. 

Select a source file and then apply formatting elements 

from that file to your chart. You can also copy other 

definitions (reports, directories, and so on) from the 

source file to the current project. 

Create a report detailing the differences between two 

charts. 

Select a chart tab and then display the corresponding 

chart. 

Window Menu 

The Window menu contains the following commands for arranging and selecting 

Chart windows inside OrgPlus. 

Window Menu 


New Window 

Cascade 

Tile 

Stack 

Window List 

Create another window for the current chart. This allows 

you to see two parts of the same chart at the same time. 

Rearrange all open windows to overlap each other. 

Rearrange all open windows as a series of tiles. 

Rearrange all open windows each one on top of the next. 

Select from a list of all open windows. 

Menu Bar A-13


Help Menu 

The Help menu commands give you access to application help. 

Help Menu 


Index 

Keyboard 

Commands 

Using Help 

Welcome to 


Resource 

Center 

OrgPlus Guided 

Tour 


Tutorials 

Upgrade Your 


OrgPlus Online 

Support 

System Info 


Display the Help Index, where you can locate a 

subject for which you need help. 

Display a list of hot keys and their functions. 

Display information about menu commands and 

toolbar icons. 

Display instructions for using the Help. 

Display the Welcome panel. 

Access the online Resource Center. 

Access the online Guided Tour. 

Access the online Tutorials. 

Purchase an upgrade. 

Access the online Support Center. 

Display information about your version of OrgPlus 

and your computer system. 

Display the OrgPlus about box. 

A-14 Menu Bar


APPENDIX A 

Toolbars 



Standard Toolbar page A-16 

Autotext Toolbar page A-16 

Data Toolbar page A-18 

Extras Toolbar page A-18 

Format Toolbar page A-19 

Full Screen Toolbar page A-19 

Groups Toolbar page A-20 

Insert Toolbar page A-20 

Publish/Import Toolbar page A-21 

Text Toolbar page A-22 

Zoom Toolbar page A-23 

Toolbars A-15


Overview 

This section describes the standard toolbars that are provided with OrgPlus, and the 

actions that you can perform with them. Some toolbars and toolbar options are not 

available in OrgPlus Express (refer to the Menu Bar section on page A-3 for more 

information). 

All the toolbars are dockable, meaning they may be dragged and placed anywhere in 

the window that is convenient for you. They can also be left as floating toolbars 

anywhere in the window. 

Standard Toolbar 

The Standard toolbar has the following buttons. 

Icon Name 

Create Blank 

Project 

Open 

Save 

Email 

Send to Excel 

Print 

Print Preview 

Cut 

Copy 

Paste 

Copy Format 

Undo 

Redo 

Refresh 

Description 

Create a new project. 

Open a previously saved project. 

Save the active project. 

Attach the active project to an email message. 

Send the contents of the active chart to an Excel 

spreadsheet. 

Print all or part of the active project to the default 

printer. 

Preview a chart prior to printing. 

Delete whatever is selected and places it on the 

Clipboard. 

Copy whatever is selected and places it on the 

Clipboard. 

Paste whatever is on the Clipboard into your chart. 

Copy the format information from the selected chart 

box and place it on the Clipboard. 

Reverse the last operation. 

Reverse the last Undo action. 

Re-import data from the underlying data source. 

A-16 Toolbars


APPENDIX A 

Icon Name 

Help 

Description 

Access OrgPlus Help. 

Autotext Toolbar 

The Autotext toolbar has the following buttons. 

Icon Name 

Page Number 

Description 

Insert Autotext elements into your chart. 

Pages 

Sub-chart # 

Current Time 

Today 

Created 

Modified 

Last Printed 

Refreshed 

Author 

Author Email 

File Name 

Chart Name 

Sub-chart Name 

Group 

Path 

Sub-chart Path 

Toolbars A-17


Data Toolbar 

The Data toolbar has the following buttons. 

Icon Name 

Define Fields 

Box Layout 

Description 

Add, delete, or modify the fields in the current project. 

Format selected boxes. 

Extras Toolbar 

The Extras toolbar has the following buttons. 

Icon Name 

Description 

Show Welcome 

Panel 

Show Templates 

Panel 

Show Directory 

Panel 

Show Profile 

Panel 

Show Reports 

Panel 

Show Sub-charts 

Panel 

Show Search 

Panel 

Show Quick Chart 

Panel 

Show Comments 

Panel 

Show Tree Panel 

A-18 Toolbars


APPENDIX A 

Format Toolbar 

The Format toolbar has the following buttons. 

Icon Name 

Line Weight 

Dashed 

Line Color 

Shadow 

Arrows 

Box Shape 

Fill Color 

Box Shadow 

Box Border 

Box Dashes 

Box Border Colors 

Styles 

Chart Properties 

Description 

Set the thickness of selected lines. 

Set the style for selected lines. 

Set the color for selected lines. 

Add a shadow to selected lines. 

Set the arrowhead for selected lines. 

Set the box shape for selected boxes. 

Set the fill color for selected boxes. 

Add a shadow to selected boxes. 

Set the border style and color for selected boxes. 

Select a dashed-line style for box borderss. 

Set the color of the box border. 

Modify the branch style for selected boxes. 

Modify chart properties such as background, border 

and border shadow. 

Full Screen Toolbar 

The Full Screen toolbar button has the following button. 

Icon Name 

Full Screen 

Description 

Toggle full screen mode. Use Full Screen mode when 

using OrgPlus to give presentations. 

Toolbars A-19


Groups Toolbar 

The Groups toolbar has the following buttons. 

Icon Name Description 

Groups drop-down list 

Edit Group 

Manage Groups 

E-mail Group 

Select a group to apply to 

the chart. 

Edit the current group. 

Add, delete, or edit 

groups. 

E-mail the chart to a 

group. 

Insert Toolbar 

The Insert toolbar has the following buttons. 

Icon Name 

Select 

Select Fields 

Move Chart 

Free Form 

Add Subordinates 

Description 

Select chart boxes and lines as well as any other freefloating 

objects. 

Select fields within boxes. 

Move the active chart to a new position in the window. 

Position a chart box anywhere on the page. 

Add boxes to your chart. 

Add Left Coworker 

Add Right Coworker 

Add Manager 

Add Assistant 

Line 

Add free-floating objects to your chart. 

Horizontal or 

Vertical Line 

Auxiliary Line 

Rectangle 

A-20 Toolbars


APPENDIX A 

Icon Name 

Description 

Insert Rounded 

Rectangle 

Insert Octagon 

Insert Text 

Insert Picture 

Publish/Import Toolbar 

The Publish/Import toolbar has the following buttons. 

Icon Name 

PowerPoint 

Description 

Publish the active chart to the selected file format. 

Word 

OrgPlus Plug-In 

HTML 

PDF 

Printer 

Import Wizard 

Import data from an external data source. 

Toolbars A-21


Text Toolbar 

The Text toolbar has the following buttons. 


Font 

Font Size 

Bold 

Italic 

Underline 

Align Left 

Center 

Align Right 

Font Color 

Field Border 

Field Fill Color 

Change the font. 

Change the font size. 

Bold the selected text. 

Italicize the selected text. 

Underline the selected text. 

Left justify the selected text. 

Center the selected text. 

Right justify the selected text. 

Change the font color. 

Specify a border for selected 

fields. 

Specify a highlight color for 

selected fields. 

A-22 Toolbars


APPENDIX A 

Zoom Toolbar 

The Zoom toolbar has the following buttons. 


Zoom In 

Zoom Out 

Zoom Rectangle 

Zoom Wheel 

Pan 

Fit To Window 

Scale 

Thumbnail 

Show Level 

Show Branch 

Increase the magnification of your chart. 

Decrease the magnification of your chart. 

Magnify a rectangular segment of the chart to 

fill the entire screen. 

Increases and decreases magnification as you 

move the wheel of the mouse. 

Move the chart around on the screen in any 

direction by dragging. 

Resize the chart so that the entire content is 

visible in the current window. 

Display the percentage of the charts actual size. 

Show a miniature version of your entire chart 

that you can use for zooming to certain areas of 

the chart. 

Define the number of levels to show, up to and 

including the level specified. 

Display the selected branch only. 

Toolbars A-23


Panels 



Welcome Panel page A-25 

Templates Panel page A-26 

Directory Panel page A-26 

Profile Panel page A-27 

Reports Panel page A-27 

Sub-charts Panel page A-28 

Search Panel Page A-28 

Quick Chart Panel Page A-29 

Tree Panel Page A-29 

Comments Panel Page A-30 

Changing Panel Positions Page A-30 

A-24 Panels


APPENDIX A 

Overview 

The panel area in the main window gives you access to additional functionality 

including reports, templates, directories, and sub-charts 

Panels are dockable, meaning they may be dragged and placed anywhere on the 

screen. They can also be hidden or shown, at your discretion. 

Welcome Panel 

The Welcome panel is useful for new OrgPlus users. 

The Welcome panel provides links to 

our Web site and example files, and 

also enables you to create a new 

chart, open an existing chart or 

import chart data. 

Panels A-25


Templates Panel 

Templates simplify formatting charts by providing pre-defined box, branch and chart 

formats. 

The Templates panel includes a 

variety of chart design, box and 

branch templates. Templates are a 

timesaving way to create a 

professional looking chart. 

Directory Panel 

Directories provide a tabular view of chart data. Whenever a box is selected the 

directory updates to display data corresponding to the selected box and its 

descendants. 

Selecting a row in a directory 

locates the corresponding box in 

the chart. You can use the directory 

to send an email. When you edit 

chart information in the directory, 

the change is automatically 

reflected in the chart. 

A-26 Panels


APPENDIX A 

Profile Panel 

The information presented in a chart boxes is typically limited to a sub-set of 

available fields. 

The Profile panel enables you to 

show additional information about 

boxes (for example, the employee’s 

photo, physical location, email, 

phone, cell phone or pager). 

Reports Panel 

OrgPlus allows you to create both static and dynamic reports from your underlying 

data. 

Reports can include summaries and 

allow you to sort and group data as 

required. Navigating through the 

chart dynamically updates the 

report based on the selected box. 

Panels A-27


Sub-charts Panel 

Large charts can be subdivided into one or more sub-charts. 

For example, an organization with 

four divisions can be presented as 

five charts – one for the executive 

team, and one for each division. 

The sub-chart panel provides a convenient way to navigate through sub-charts and 

to perform actions on them. 

Search Panel 

The Search Panel displays a tabular list all records based on a user defined query. 

The search panel is useful for 

finding any set of employees, data 

mining and succession planning. 

The sub-chart panel provides a convenient way to navigate through sub-charts and 

to perform actions on them. 

A-28 Panels


APPENDIX A 

Quick Chart Panel 

The Quick Chart panel is the fastest way to create basic organizational charts. 

The Quick Chart panel provides all 

the controls you need to create 

basic organizational charts in one 

easy to use panel. The Quick Chart 

panel is intended for first time users 

and contains only a small sub-set of 

the features available in the 

OrgPlus application. 

Tree Panel 

The Tree panel enables you to view and edit a chart as an OrgTree. 

The Tree panel provides an OrgTree 

view of your chart information. You 

can move employees up or down in 

the hierarchy, or add and delete 

records within this view. You can 

also print your Tree panel or 

transfer it to an Excel spreadsheet. 

Panels A-29


Comments Panel 

The Comments panel 

provides a view of the 

comments that have been 

added to your chart. 

Changing Panel Positions 

By default, OrgPlus displays panels on the right side of the Windows desktop. You 

can place your panels anywhere you wish on the desktop simply by dragging the 

panel title bar. 

Chart Selection Tabs 

In OrgPlus, a project can contain multiple charts, similar to Microsoft Excel's 

workbook and worksheet relationship. 

You can select different charts in your project by clicking on one of the Chart 

Selection tabs at the bottom of a chart window. 

Creating charts in separate tabs within a single project allows you to present 

multiple views of your organizational data within the same project. 

You can right-click on a chart tab to: 

A-30 Chart Selection Tabs


APPENDIX A 

• Create a new chart tab 

• Delete a chart tab 

• Rename a chart tab 

Status Bar 

The Status bar, at the bottom of the OrgPlus window provides the following 

information: 

• The number of boxes defined in your chart, and how many of them are currently 

selected. 

• The lock status of your keyboard. 

• Additional information about the tool or button the mouse cursor is currently 

positioned over. 

• The number of boxes that will be added when using the add subordinate, add 

assistant or add co-worker tools. 

The following is an example of the Status Bar showing that: 

• The mouse is currently positioned over the Paste button. 

• The active chart has six boxes, none of which are selected. 

• The Num Lock key on the keyboard is selected. 

Status Bar A-31


A-32 Status Bar

Appendix B 

Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts 

OrgPlus has many keyboard and mouse shortcuts in addition to the 

combinations and function keys listed in the menus. 


Using Right-Click Menus page B-1 

Using Keyboard Shortcuts page B-2 

Using the Function and Control Keys page B-6 

Using Right-Click Menus 

The right button on your mouse can be used to display context sensitive menus. 

➣ To use a right-click menu: 

1 Position the mouse pointer over a chart element. 

2 Click the right mouse button. 

3 Select a menu item from the displayed menu. 

Note: Context menus are also available for most OrgPlus windows, toolbars, and 

panels. 

B-1


Using Keyboard Shortcuts 

This section describes how to use keyboard shortcuts to perform common 

operations. 


Creating Boxes page B-2 

Entering Information page B-2 

Viewing Your Chart page B-3 

Selecting Boxes page B-3 

Working with Files page B-4 

Editing Text page B-5 

Dragging Boxes page B-6 

Moving Free Floating Objects page B-6 

Creating Boxes 

You can add boxes to your chart using the keyboard. First select a box and then 

press one of the following keys: 

To do this… 

Create a subordinate 

Create a manager 

Create an assistant 

Create a left co-worker 

Create a right co-worker 

Press this… 

 

Shift + 

 

 

Shift + 

Note: You can also add a box by holding down the key while clicking on an 

insert tool ( , , , or ). 

Entering Information 

Use the following tips to speed up data entry: 

• To edit the first field in a box, select a box and start typing. 

• Use the or keys to move forward from field to field and from 

box to box. 

• Use keys to move backward from field to field within and across 

boxes. 

B-2 Using Keyboard Shortcuts


APPENDIX B 

• Use the key to finish editing a field and select the box. 

Viewing Your Chart 

The table below summarizes the keystrokes that enable you view your chart in 

different ways: 

To do this… 

Set the zoom factor to fit to window 

Set the zoom factor to 50% 

Enter or exit full screen mode 

View the part of your chart above the window 

View the part of your chart below the window 

View the topmost box in your chart 

View boxes at the bottom of your chart 

Show a thumbnail view of the chart 

Press this… 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

+ 

Selecting Boxes 

Use the following keystroke combinations to select boxes: 

To do this… 

Select all boxes and lines 

Select the branch containing the currently selected 

box and its descendants 

Select the top-most box of a sub chart 

Select all peers (group) for the selected box 

Select the box to the left 

Select the box to the right 

Select the box above 

Select the box below 

Extend the selection to include the box to the left 

Extend the selection to include the box to the right 

Press this… 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ B 

+ 

 

 

 

 

+ 

+ 

Using Keyboard Shortcuts B-3


To do this… 

Extend the selection to include the box above 

Extend the selection to include the box below 

Press this… 

+ 

+ 

Working with Files 

Use the following keys to work with files. 

To do this… 

Press this… 

Create a new project 

Open an existing project 

Close the current project 

Save the current project 

Print the current project 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

+ 

Display the Quick Chart panel + + 

 

Display the Directory panel + + 

 

Display the Profile panel + + 

 

Display the Impression panel + + 

 

Display the Search panel + + 

 

Display the Reports panel + + 

 

Display the Sub-Charts panel + + 

 

Display the Templates panel + + 

 

Display the Welcome panel + + 

 

Find by photo 

Display Photo Manager 

+ E 

+ M 

B-4 Using Keyboard Shortcuts


APPENDIX B 

To do this… 

Display Export Data dialog box 

Display Scheduler dialog box 

Press this… 

+ T 

+ U 

Editing Text 

Use the following keys to edit text: 

To do this… 

Delete the selected text or (if no text is selected) 

delete the character to the right of the insertion 

point 

Cut selected information and place it in the 

Clipboard 

Copy selected information to the Clipboard 

Paste selected information from the Clipboard to 

the insertion point 

Reverses (Undo) your last operation 

Redo the last Undo 

Move left one character 

Move right one character 

Extend the selection onto the character to the left 

Extend the selection onto the character to the right 

Move to the beginning of the line 

Move to the end of the line 

Extend selection to the beginning of the line 

Extend selection to the end of the line 

Press this… 

OR 

 

+ 

+ or 

+ 

+ or 

+ 

+ 

+ 

 

 

+ 

+ 

 

 

+ 

+ 

Using Keyboard Shortcuts B-5


Dragging Boxes 

You can use the and keys when dragging chart boxes, as follows: 

To do this... 

hold 

down... 

while you... 

Make a copy of the selected box Drag a box to its new 

location 

Change spacing between co-workers or 

between co-workers and their manager. 

(See Appendix C, Tips and Tricks) 

Moving Free Floating Objects 

 

Drag any co-worker or a 

group of peers to the new 

position 

You can select any free floating object (text, box, or picture) and use the arrow keys 

to reposition the object. 

Using the Function and Control Keys 

This section lists the available usages of the Function and Control key combinations in 

numerical/alphabetical order. 


Using Function Keys page B-6 

Using Control Keys page B-7 

Using Function Keys 

The following Function key combinations are available: 

Key 

Menu 

Equivalent 

Description 

F1 Help | Index Displays the Help index 

F2 Insert | 

Subordinate 

Shift-F2 Insert | 

Manager 

F3 Insert | 

Assistant 

Adds a subordinate below the selected box 

Adds a manager above the selected box 

Adds an assistant below the selected box 

F4 

Insert | Left 

Co-worker 

Adds an co-worker to the left of the 

selected box 

B-6 Using the Function and Control Keys


APPENDIX B 

Key 

Menu 

Equivalent 

Description 

Shift-F4 

F5 

Shift-F5 

Insert | Right 

Co-worker 

Data | Refresh 

Data 

Format | Chart 

Rules | Apply 

Chart Rules 

Adds an co-worker to the right of the 

selected box 

Re-imports data from the data source 

Reformat branch styles based on the 

current set of chart rules 

F6 Pan Enables you to click and drag to move your 

chart within the active window. 

F7 Tools | 

Spelling 

F9 Data | 

Recalculate 

Formulas 

Performs a spell check 

Performs a recalculation of the formula 

fields when the Auto Recalculation feature 

is turned off 

F10 Scale | 50% Sets the zoom factor to 50% 

F11 

F12 

View | Full 

Screen 

Format | Box 

Properties 

Using Control Keys 

Enter or exit full screen mode 

Enables defining the format or layout of 

selected boxes, objects and pictures 

The following Control key combinations are available: 

Key 

Menu 

Equivalent 

Description 

Ctrl-A 

Edit | Select 

All 

Ctrl-B Edit | Select | 

Branch 

Ctrl- 

Shift- B 

Edit | Select 

Levels 

Selects all chart boxes and lines 

Select the branch below the currently 

selected box 

Select top-most box of a sub-chart 

Ctrl-C Edit | Copy Copies the currently selected chart 

elements to the Clipboard 

Ctrl- 

Shift- C 

Edit |Copy 

Format 

Copy format 

Using the Function and Control Keys B-7


Key 

Menu 

Equivalent 

Description 

Ctrl-D 

Ctrl- 

Shift- D 

Ctrl-E 

There is no 

menu 

equivalent 

View | 

Directory 

Edit | Find by 

Photo 

Delete the box and add the person to the 

Directory orphan list 

Display the Directory panel 

Find by photo 

Ctrl-F Edit | Find Enables locating boxes containing the 

specified text 

Ctrl- 

Shift- F 

View | Profile 

Ctrl-G Edit | Select | 

Peers 

Shift- 

Ctrl-G 

Ctrl- 

Shift- G 

Ctrl-H 

Ctrl- 

Shift- H 

Ctrl-I 

Edit | Find 

Previous 

Edit | Find 

Previous 

Edit | Show 

Thumbnail 

View | Search 

File | Import 

Data 

Display the Profiles panel 

Select all the peers for the selected box 

Returns to the previously displayed 

instance of specified text 

Find previous 

Shows the entire chart in a Thumbnail 

window 

Display the Search panel 

Opens Import Data 

Ctrl-J Format | Font Open Font Properties 

Ctrl-K Format | 

Conditional 

Format 

Ctrl-L 

Ctrl-M 

Format | Line 

Properties 

Edit | Find by 

Photo… 

Open Conditional Formatting 

Open Line Properties 

Open Photo Manager 

Ctrl-N File | New Creates a new project based on your choice 

of template 

Ctrl-O File | Open Opens an existing project 



APPENDIX B 

Key 

Menu 

Equivalent 

Description 

Ctrl-P File | Print Prints the current chart 

Ctrl-Q File | Quit Exits from OrgPlus 

Ctrl- 

Shift-Q 

View | Quick 

Chart 

Display the Quick Chart panel 

Ctrl-R Edit | Replace Enables replacing specified box text with 

other text 

Ctrl- 

Shift- R 

View | Reports 

Display the Reports panel 

Ctrl-S File | Save Saves the current project 

Ctrl- 

Shift- S 

Ctrl-T 

Ctrl- 

Shift-T 

View | Sub 

Chart 

Data | Export 

Data 

View | 

Templates 

Ctrl-U Tool | 

Scheduler 

Display the Sub Charts panel 

Export Data 

Display the Templates panel 

Open Scheduler 

Ctrl-V Edit | Paste Pastes elements from the Clipboard 

Ctrl-W File | Close Closes the current project 

Ctrl-X Edit | Cut Cuts the currently selected chart elements 

and places them in the Clipboard 

Ctrl-Y Edit | Redo Reverses the last undo performed 

Ctrl-Z Edit | Undo Reverses the last action 

Using the Function and Control Keys B-9



Appendix C 

Tips and Tricks 

This appendix contains tips for creating special box styles 


Extra-Wide Manager Boxes page C-2 

Modified Co-manager Style page C-3 

Modified List Style page C-4 

Multiple Topmost Boxes page C-5 

Multiple People in a Box - Employees Listed by Function page C-6 

Multiple Charts on a Page page C-7 

Repositioning Boxes within the Same Level page C-8 

Staggering Boxes on the Same Level page C-8 

C-1


Extra-Wide Manager Boxes 

By default, the width of chart boxes adjusts to accommodate the widest text. You 

can specify a wider box width for selected positions. 

➣ To create extra-wide manager boxes: 

1 In your chart, select the boxes to widen. 

2 Select Box Properties from the Format menu and then select the Box Sizing 

tab. 

3 Clear AutoWidth and enter the appropriate width in the Default width field 

and click OK. 

C-2 Extra-Wide Manager Boxes


APPENDIX C 

Modified Co-manager Style 

Sometimes it is desirable that all second level managers including co-managers are 

displayed as follows: 

➣ To line up co-managers and managers: 

1 Select the boxes that you want to make co-managers. 

2 Select Chart Styles from the Format menu and select the Co-Manager Style 

option. The selected boxes are now represented as co-managers. 

3 Select all four subordinates and the manager. 

Modified Co-manager Style C-3


4 Select Spacing from the Format menu and set the Manager spacing distance 

to 0.00. 

Modified List Style 

You can stack names out of boxes below a box. 

➣ To stack names below a box: 

1 Select the subordinates and give them the list group style . 

 

C-4 Modified List Style


APPENDIX C 

2 Select the connecting lines and then select Hide from the Format menu. 

 

3 Select the manager, select Spacing from the Format menu and then set the 

Co-worker spacing distances to 0.00. 

 

Multiple Topmost Boxes 

A chart can have multiple topmost boxes, like these. 

Multiple Topmost Boxes C-5


➣ To create multiple topmost boxes: 

1 Add 2 co-workers to the topmost box. 

2 Select the 3 topmost boxes. 

3 Select Chart Styles from the Format menu and select the Co-Manager Style 

option. The selected boxes are now represented as co-managers. 

4 Select the topmost lines and select Hide from the Format menu. 

Multiple People in a Box - Employees Listed by Function 

You can represent a manager and all subordinates in one box. 

➣ To place multiple people in a box: 

1 Select the manager and the co-workers under the manager. 

C-6 Multiple People in a Box - Employees Listed by Function


APPENDIX C 

2 Select Chart Styles from the Format menu and select the following Co-worker 

style . 

3 The manager and subordinates are now represented in one box. 

In the above example only the people’s names are shown in the large box, as their 

box layout was changed to remove other information. See Defining Fields and Boxes 

and Modifying Box Layout in Chapter 4, Working with Charts: Basic Functions. 

Multiple Charts on a Page 

You can make it appear as if there are multiple charts on one page. 

➣ To create the appearance of multiple charts: 

1 Use the Co-worker box tool to add co-workers to the topmost box, then 

construct a hierarchy under each manager. 

2 Select the topmost connecting lines and then select Hide from the Format 

menu. 

Multiple Charts on a Page C-7


Repositioning Boxes within the Same Level 

Sometimes boxes within the same level need to be repositioned for business 

reasons. The free-form tool (described in the Free Dragging Boxes section of Chapter 

4) can also be used to reposition boxes within the same level. 

➣ To reposition a box: 


2 Select the box you want to reposition. 

3 Hold down the shift key while dragging the selected box. Release the mouse 

button when the box is in its new position. 

 

Staggering Boxes on the Same Level 

Sometimes boxes on the same level need to be staggered for business reasons. You 

can stagger boxes automatically or manually. The free form tool (described in the 

Free Dragging Boxes section of Chapter 4) can also be used to reposition boxes 

within the same level. 

➣ To automatically promote or demote a box: 


2 Right-click on the box that you want to promote or demote. 

3 Select Actions | Demote Right or Actions | Demote Left to demote a box 

one level. 

C-8 Repositioning Boxes within the Same Level


APPENDIX C 

Note: Any box that has been demoted can be promoted by right-clicking on that 

box and selecting Actions | Promote. 

➣ To manually stagger boxes: 

1 Choose the Select tool . The following is an example of a chart whose boxes 

you want to stagger. 

2 Select the boxes you want to stagger. 

3 Select Chart Styles from the Format menu and then select a chart style for the 

selected boxes. Notice that the selected boxes will now be grouped separately 

from their peers. 

4 Hold down the shift key while dragging the boxes. Release the mouse button 

when the box is in its new position. 

Staggering Boxes on the Same Level C-9


C-10 Staggering Boxes on the Same Level

Appendix D 

Troubleshooting 


Overview page D-1 

Installation page D-1 

Printing page D-2 

Using OrgPlus with Other Applications page D-5 

Calculations page D-6 

Disk Space page D-7 

Memory & Resources page D-7 

Overview 

We hope that you never have any problems while using OrgPlus, but sometimes 

things do go wrong. This appendix presents possible solutions to these difficulties. If 

you need further assistance, please visit our web site at www.orgplus.com. 

NOTE: If your system does not meet the system requirements for OrgPlus, we 

cannot guarantee that the program will function correctly. See System Requirements 

in Chapter 2, Installation and Registration. 

D-1


Installation 

Here are solutions to common problems you may have when installing OrgPlus. 

Problem 

I get a "can’t find/locate file" error message when I install OrgPlus. 

Possible Solution 

• The door on your CD drive may be open. Close it. 

• The CD may be damaged. Contact HumanConcepts Technical Support for 

assistance. 

Problem 

The following message is displayed: Not enough disk space to install. 


There is not enough free space on the destination drive. Delete unused files to make 

sure there is enough free space for installation. 

Problem 

I get a "file already exists" message when I install OrgPlus. 


Select Yes to All when the message is shown. 

Printing 

Here are solutions to common problems you may have when printing from OrgPlus. 

Problem 

Printing garbage characters. 


• Reset the printer by turning it off, then back on. 

• Make sure you are using the correct printer driver. 

See Also: Page Setup, page D-4. 

Problem 

Printing slowly. 

D-2 Installation


APPENDIX D 


Printing graphics can be slow. You can try printing at lower quality but the output 

won’t look as sharp. 

Problem 

Printing boxes without text. 


• Reset your printer by turning it off and then on. Then try printing again. 

• Make sure you can see the text on your screen. 


See Also: Page Setup, page D-4. 

• Your computer may be running low on memory or resources. Close any other 

open applications and try again. 

See Also: Memory and Resources Problems, page D-7. 

Problem 

Printing text without boxes. 


• Reset your printer by turning it off and then on. 

• If you have chosen not to have box borders, they will not print. See if box 

borders are visible on screen. 




Problem 

Text is printing outside boxes. 




• You may be using a font that is not scaling correctly. Try using a TrueType font 

such as Arial. 



Problem 

Letters are replaced with symbols. 

Printing D-3



• Reset your printing by turning it off and then on. 

• You may be using a symbol font, such as Fences or Wingdings. Try switching to a 

TrueType font such as Arial. 

Problem 

Nothing prints. 



• You may have incorrect settings in Print Setup. 

• Your computer may be running low on memory or resources. 

• If you are using a network printer, the spooler may not be releasing your print 

job. Be sure that a time-out is set. 

Page Setup 

Problem 

See previous printing-related problems. 


• Make sure that the printer defined in Page Setup from the File menu exactly 

matches the kind of printer you have. Contact your printer manufacturer or 

Microsoft for information on obtaining the correct printer driver. 

• Try printing from another Windows program, such as WordPad or Paintbrush. If 

you experience the same problems, then the cause lies in your printer or 

Windows setup. Contact Microsoft or your printer manufacturer for assistance. 

• Check your settings in the Windows Control Panel to verify that they match your 

system. 

• Make sure you’re using the most current driver available for your printer. You 

can check the version by selecting Page Setup from the File menu. Select the 

Options button and then Advanced button. This displays a screen specific to 

your printer. Check information about the driver, including the version. Check 

with your printer manufacturer to see if you have the latest driver. 

They can also tell you how to find out which version you have if you aren’t sure. 

Make sure that the printer driver is for the version of Windows that you are 

using. 

D-4 Printing


APPENDIX D 

Using OrgPlus with Other Applications 

Here are some common problems you may encounter when using OrgPlus with other 

applications, and the possible solutions. 

Problem 

A linked chart is not updated in the client application. 


• Your update option is set to Manual. Use the Links command in the client 

application to change your update option to Automatic. 

• You have embedded the chart or used the Paste command. Use the Links 

command in the client application to see if you linked the chart. 

• Paste Link is not selectable in the client application. 

• You did not save your chart in OrgPlus. Go back into OrgPlus and save your 

chart. 

• You did not copy your chart to the Clipboard. Select your chart in OrgPlus and 

use the Copy from the Edit menu. 

Problem 

You double-clicked a chart object in client application but nothing happened. 


Your application is not an OLE client. 

Problem 

Chart fonts look different in the client application than in OrgPlus. 


You specified a very small area in which to place your chart in your client document. 

At high magnification, fonts may look different. Scale or resize the object to see if 

this problem is corrected. Using a TrueType font may also improve the appearance of 

the chart. 

Problem 

Text appears outside of boxes. 


Resize your chart proportionally. For example, if you reduce the size of your chart, 

make sure you reduce the height and width by the same percentage. 

Using OrgPlus with Other Applications D-5


Problem 

Cannot import a TIFF image of the chart or the image quality is poor. 


Your application does not support a version of TIFF that is compatible with OrgPlus. 

Try another graphics file format, such as WMF, BMP, JPG, or PCX. 

Calculations 

Problem 

Computed amounts on your screen look incorrect. 


Hiding boxes and labels does not exclude them from computations even though you 

cannot see them. Excluding a label or box from calculations does not hide that box 

or label. Try the following: 

• Some boxes may be hidden. Show all the boxes that you want to include. 

• Select Box Properties from the Format menu. Use the Advanced tab to verify 

which fields are included in calculations and counts for each box. This is 

especially important for hidden boxes. 

• Make sure that Auto Recalculation from the Data menu is selected or press 

to recalculate formulas. 

Problem 

OrgPlus is extremely slow when manipulating a chart with over 5,000 boxes. 


Try the following: 

• Use the Sub-chart Wizard (Insert | Sub-chart | Create sub-charts…) to 

break your chart into sub-charts. 

• With large charts, dynamic recalculation of formulas may require to much 

computational power. Make sure that Auto Recalculation from the Data menu 

is turned off. When needed, you will need to press to recalculate formulas. 

D-6 Calculations


APPENDIX D 

Disk Space 

Problem 

Messages or problems related to a lack of disk space 


• Check the disk space available on the drive where OrgPlus saves your files. You 

generally need to have three times the size of your file available because of the 

way Windows programs save files. For example, if your file is 400,000 bytes, you 

actually need 1,200,000 bytes (1.2 MB) available to save it. 

Memory & Resources 

Problem 

Available memory or resources fall too low, and your computer behaves 

unpredictably. 


Check System Resources by choosing Start | My Computer | Control Panel | 

System on your Windows desktop. 

OrgPlus requires that you have at least 256 megabytes of physical memory (512 MB 

for newer Operating Systems) in your computer. You may be able to free memory by 

closing other programs. If all other programs are closed and you still don’t have 

enough memory available, exit and restart Windows. You may need to consider 

buying more memory for your computer 

Disk Space D-7


D-8 Memory & Resources

Appendix E 

Off-line Registration 

This appendix describes how to register OrgPlus by email, by fax or by phone. For 

information about online registration refer to Registration in Chapter 2, Installation 

and Registration. 

Once you have entered your product code and email address, OrgPlus tries to detect 

an Internet connection. If a connection cannot be established, OrgPlus displays the 

Registration Options dialog box. 

You can choose to register by email, by fax, or by phone. You can also choose to 

register later, in which case you will be given access to a limited version of OrgPlus. 

Select from: 

Registering by Email page E-2 

Registering by Fax page E-2 

Registering by Phone page E-3 

E-1


Registering by Email 

1 In the Registration Options dialog box select Register by email and click Next. 

2 You are then prompted to enter your registration information. 

The Registration Information dialog box consists of two pages. Enter the required 

information and click Next after each page is complete. Fields marked with a "*" 

must be completed. 

3 Click Send email. An email form is opened, containing your registration 

information. Send the email. 

HumanConcepts will email your Unlock Code to the email address that you 

entered. 

4 Click Next. 

5 Click Finish to close the dialog box. 

Your Unlock Code is sent to you by email from HumanConcepts. 

6 After you receive your Unlock Code, double-click the OrgPlus icon on your 

desktop. 

7 Select the Unlock radio button and then click Next. 

8 Enter the unlock code in the Unlock/Product Code field. 

9 Enter your unlock code and email address and then click Next. If you entered 

the code correctly, you are informed that you have successfully unlocked 

OrgPlus. Click Close to begin using OrgPlus. 

Registering by Fax 

1 In the Registration Options dialog box select Register by fax and click Next. 

2 You are then prompted to enter your registration information. The Registration 

Information dialog box consists of two pages. Enter the required information and 

click Next after each page is complete. Fields marked with an asterisk (*) must 

be completed. 

3 When you have finished, click Print and fax the printout to the indicated fax 

number. 

HumanConcepts will fax your Unlock Code to the fax number that you indicated. 

Note: Allow two business days for responses to fax registration requests. 

4 Click Next. 

E-2 Registering by Email

Off-line Registration 

APPENDIX E 

5 Click Finish to close the dialog box. 

Your Unlock Code is sent to you by fax from HumanConcepts. 

6 After you receive your Unlock Code, double-click the OrgPlus icon on your 

desktop. 

7 Select the Unlock radio button and then click Next. 

8 Enter the unlock code in the Unlock/Product Code field. 

9 Enter your unlock code and email address and then click Next. If you entered 

the code correctly, you are informed that you have successfully unlocked 

OrgPlus. Click Close to begin using OrgPlus. 

Registering by Phone 

1 In the Registration Options dialog box select Register by phone and click Next. 

A list of phone numbers is displayed. Call the phone number corresponding to 

your country or region. 

2 After reaching a telephone representative, click Next. 

3 Enter the Unlock Code which the telephone representative gives you and click 

Next. 

4 Click Close to begin using OrgPlus. 

Registering by Phone E-3


E-4 Registering by Phone

Command Line Reference 

APPENDIX F 

Appendix F 


Overview 

A variety of OrgPlus functionality can be executed from the command 

prompt. This is useful for automating data import, publish and refresh tasks. 

For simple automation tasks, we recommend using the Scheduler, built into 

OrgPlus. This section discusses how to use OrgPlus from the command 

prompt, which enables you to build scripts and complex automation tasks. 

The following commands can be performed from the command line: 

Open Command page F-2 

Import Command page F-2 

Print Command page F-3 

Publish Command page F-4 

Refresh Command page F-5 

Open Command F-1


Open Command 

This section describes the command to open a file. 

➣ To open a .opx file: 

Orgplus7.exe [-pass ] 

= Password for a protected input file 

[options]: 

-n Suppress any upgrade messages at launch. 

Import Command 

This section describes the command to import a file. 

➣ To start the Import Wizard: 

Orgplus7.exe [options] 

The import file must be of a valid type such as.xls or .txt. The chart file 

created by the imported is saved using the same file name. 

[options]: 

-q or -f Suppress the import wizard dialog box. 

-y Suppress the message “already exists. Do 

you want to replace it?" and replaces the file 

automatically. 

-c or -NoLaunch Close OrgPlus after import. 

-t[template 

flags] 

Specify to apply after 

import. Template flags are detailed in the 

next table. 

-s1 Insert sub-chart break every 

levels. 

-s2 Insert sub-chart breaks based on . 

-s3 

-ss 

Insert sub-chart breaks at levels , 

, etc. 

Set the minimum number of boxes for smart 

sub-chart breaks. See Sub-chart Wizard 

section in this chapter. 

-sn Name sub-charts using field specified in the 

parameter. 

F-2 Open Command


APPENDIX F 

Template Flags (Example: Orgplus7.exe “MyData.xls” -tdbo 

“MyTemplate.opxt”) 

a 

o 

n 

d 

b 

l 

i 

r 

g 

p 

f 

m 

h 

c 

s 

Print Command 

Copy all template elements. 

Overwrite existing elements. 

Add fields not defined in the current project. 

Apply design template. 

Apply branch template. 

Apply box template. 

Copy directories. 

Copy reports. 

Copy groups. 

Copy profiles. 

Copy conditional formats. 

Copy master page elements. 

Copy chart rules. 

Copy constants. 

Copy searches. 

This section describes the command to print an .opx file. 

➣ To print a .opx file: 

Orgplus7.exe –p 

Print Command F-3


Publish Command 

This section describes the command to publish a chart. 

➣ To publish a chart: 

Orgplus7.exe [output filename] 

[options] [-pass ] 

Where: 

can be one of the following: 

-po 

Publish to OrgViewer 

-ppp 

Publish to PowerPoint 

-pw 

Publish to Word 

-phtml 

Publish to HTML 

-ppdf 

Publish to PDF 

[input filename] = Name of input file 

[output filename] = Name of alternative output file 

[options]: 

-q or -f Suppress the publish wizard dialog box. 

-y Suppresses the message “already exists. Do 

you want to replace it?" and replaces the file 

automatically. 

-c or -NoLaunch Do not open the output file after publishing. 

-CloseOnError Close OrgPlus if an error occurs during publish. 

-u Uses previous publishing options if 

republishing to the same input/output file 

combination. 

-r Refresh before publishing. 

-RefreshToTemp Refresh the input file without updating the 

original. 

= Password for a protected input file 

F-4 Publish Command


APPENDIX F 

Refresh Command 

This section describes the refresh command. 

➣ To perform a data refresh: 

Orgplus7.exe -r [output file] [options] 

Where: 

[input filename] = Name of input file 

[output file] = Alternative output filename. Valid only if -RefreshToTemp 

is specified. 

[options]: 

-CloseOnError 

-RefreshToTemp 

Suppress error messages. 

Refresh the input file without updating the 

original. 

Refresh Command F-5


F-6 Refresh Command

Appendix G 

Glossary 

Anchoring 

Use anchoring to connect a free-floating object in your Chart to a Chart Box. 

When a free-floating object is anchored to a chart box, it moves each time 

the Chart Box moves. 

Arrowhead 

A directional pointer at the end of a line. Use arrowheads to highlight 

important information in your Chart or to indicate the flow of procedures or 

decisions. 

Assistant 

A box representing an individual who provides administrative assistance, 

advice, or managerial assistance to their Manager (sometimes referred to as 

a staff box). 

Different Assistant Styles are available to show the particular type of 

relationship between the assistant and Manager. 

Assistant Style 

A way to represent the relationship of a Manager to an Assistant. Assistant 

styles are available from the Styles menu. 

Banding 

Banding ensures that each box stays on its current row when other boxes 

are added or deleted. This is useful if rows are used to represent seniority. 

Bitmap (BMP) 

A standard graphics image file format. OrgPlus can copy BMP images to and 

from the Clipboard. It can also copy or cut any visible portion of your Chart 

to the Clipboard in this format. 

Branch 

A box and all its descendants. 

G-1


Branch Symbol 

A small square in the lower right corner of manager boxes. It indicates that 

the box has Subordinate boxes. Click the branch symbol to show or hide the 

branch. 

Chart 

A graphical representation of hierarchical information. 

Chart Box 

The building block of a Chart. OrgPlus automatically draws Connecting Lines 

between boxes. The arrangement of chart boxes and the connections 

between them form a chart. 

Chart Page Area 

The area occupied by the chart. This area consists of a single page or a 

number of pages placed side by side to produce a larger rectangular area. 

Dotted lines indicate the borders between two adjacent pages. For example: 

OrgPlus automatically adds and subtracts pages to and from the chart’s 

page area as needed to contain the chart. It preserves the basic page 

orientation specified in the Page Setup dialog box. 

Chart Style 

The particular arrangement of Subordinate boxes with respect to a Manager. 

Any Subordinate box can have its own chart style. Chart styles are located 

in the Chart Styles menu. 

Clipboard 

A temporary storage place in Windows. Use the cut and copy commands to 

place items on the Clipboard, and use the paste command to paste items 

from the Clipboard into your Chart. 

G-2 Branch Symbol

GLOSSARY 

Co-manager 

One or more boxes that share responsibility for a group of subordinates. The 

highlighted boxes in the figure below are co-managers. 

You can show this relationship using the Co-manager style. 

Connecting Lines 

The lines OrgPlus draws automatically to connect boxes in the Chart. 

Co-workers 

Boxes with the same Manager. Together, co-workers form a Group. 

Demote 

You can demote a box to a lower level within a multi-column chart style if 

the Maintain Banding option is selected. 

Dotted-line Relationship 

A special reporting relationship between two boxes in the Chart. A dotted 

line usually indicates that one box has some measure of authority over the 

other box. 

Embed 

You can embed an object in an OLE client document. When you embed an 

object in an OLE client document, you place a copy of the original object 

into the client document. It is then completely separate from the original 

chart. You can edit the embedded object independently from the original 

chart. 

Field 

An area in a Chart Box where you can type information such as a person’s 

name or salary. 

Field Layout 

The way Fields are arranged in your Chart Boxes. Different boxes can have 

different field layouts. 

Formula 

A field type used for performing calculations in your Chart. 

Co-manager G-3


Group 

All of the boxes reporting to the same Manager, excluding Assistant boxes. 

A group is also a set of boxes that all meet a specified condition. 

Level 

The Topmost Box in your chart is at level 1. The boxes reporting directly to 

it are at level 2. The boxes reporting to them are at level 3, and so on. The 

black boxes in the figure below are at level 4. 

Linking 

You can link an object to an OLE client document. When you link an object 

to an OLE client document, the object appears in the client document. The 

client document is automatically updated when you make a change to the 

original OrgPlus document. 

Manager 

A box that has subordinate boxes reporting to it. 

Metafile (WMF) 

A standard graphics image file format. Metafiles require less disk space than 

a regular Bitmap (BMP). 

G-4 Group

GLOSSARY 

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) 

OrgPlus supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), a feature that lets 

you create and edit a chart in OrgPlus, and automatically transfer a copy of 

it to another application. Other applications that support OLE include word 

processors and desktop presentation programs. Once your chart is linked to 

or 

Embedded in a Windows OLE client application, you can double-click to edit 

the chart from another application. 

OLE Client 

An application to which you can link or 

Embed an OLE Object created by a OLE Server application. OrgPlus 

functions as a server application. An OLE client application, such as 

Microsoft Word, contains a copy of the chart. 

OLE Object 

A chart or a portion of a chart you can place in another Windows application 

using Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). 

OLE Server 

An application that can create OLE Objects to link or embed in an OLE Client 

application. An OLE server application such as OrgPlus creates the chart; an 

OLE client application such as Microsoft Word contains the chart. 

Page Lines 

Pages lines demarcate header and footer areas, print margins, and page 

breaks. These lines do not print. 

Promote 

You can promote a box to a higher level within a multi-column chart style if 

the Maintain Banding option is selected. 

Secondary (or Right) Mouse Button 

When you click the secondary mouse button on an object or window, 

OrgPlus displays a context menu containing commands for that object or 

window. 

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) G-5


Subgroup 

A grouping of boxes within a larger group. In the figure below, a, b, and c 

belong to one subgroup, and d, e, and f belong to another subgroup. Both of 

these subgroups belong to the same Group because they have the same 

Manager. 

Subordinate 

Any box that reports to another box. 

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) 

A graphics image file format supported by many DOS, Windows, and 

Macintosh applications. 

Template 

A template defines all the formatting parameters for a chart. Applying a 

template sets the formats for chart elements, such as boxes and lines. Using 

templates saves you the effort of formatting each individual chart element. 

Using templates in OrgPlus is very similar to using templates in Microsoft 

PowerPoint or Word. 

Thumbnail Window 

A window containing a miniature of the entire Chart. You can click in the 

thumbnail window to navigate to any part of your chart. 

Topmost Box 

The box at the top of the Chart. 

Unicode 

The universal character encoding, maintained by the Unicode Consortium 

(http://www.unicode.org/). This encoding standard provides the basis for 

processing, storage and interchange of text data in any language in all 

modern software and information technology protocols. 

Wrapping 

Allowing a phrase or sentence to split – or wrap – from one line to the next, 

as opposed to requiring it to fit on a single line. (This paragraph is 

wrapped.) 

G-6 Subgroup

Index 

Index 

A 

about 

file formats used by OrgPlus, 4-3 

OrgPlus, 1-2 

projects and charts, 4-2 

templates, 4-2 

Adding 

fields, 4-17 

advanced charting, 7-2 

advanced data fields 

BranchStyle, 9-6 

BreakAt, 9-5 

CollapseAt, 9-5 

Exclude, 9-8, 9-9 

IsAssistant, 9-5 

Sequence, 9-7 

advanced features, 5-6 

Advanced Find, 6-10 

Advanced Find and Replace, 6-12 

advanced hierarchy options, 9-36 

advanced search, 1-16 

aligning free floating objects, 7-10 

analysis tool, 1-5 

anchoring, G-1 

boxes to free floating objects, 7-8 

arrowheads, G-1 

Assistant style, G-1 

assistants, G-1 

adding, 3-5 

automatic e-mail distribution, 1-22 

automation, 1-19, 11-1 

Autotext elements 

entering, 7-5 

auxiliary lines, 7-12 

Auxiliary toolbar, A-17 

B 

background objects. See free floating 

objects 

banding, G-1 

basic chart creation, 3-2 

binding 

free floating objects to a page, 7-9 

bitmap (BMP), G-1 

box layour 

using the quick chart panel, 4-62 

box layout, 1-7, See Also field layout 

adding labels to fields, 4-31, 4-33 

adding lines, 4-34 

adjusting margins, 4-35 

creating a column grid, 4-32 

editing, 4-31 

box layout tips 

extra-wide manager boxes, C-2 

modified co-manager style, C-3 

modified list style, C-4 

multiple charts on a page, C-7 

multiple people in a box, C-6 

multiple topmost boxes, C-5 

repositioning boxes within the same level, 

C-8 

staggering boxes on the same level, C-8 

box properties, 3-10 

Box templates, 7-20 

boxes, G-2 

Index I-1


adding, 3-5, 4-6 

adding and deleting, 4-6, 4-58 

adding fields in, 3-12, 4-28 

copying contents and format, 4-65 

creating using keyboard shortcuts, B-2 

deleting, 3-6, 4-7 

designing, 4-31 

displaying fields in, 3-13 

editing using the quick chart panel, 4-60 

fixed size, 4-37 

formatting, 3-10, 4-36 

formatting using the quick chart panel, 

4-60 

hiding, 5-6 

inserting pictures in, 4-30 

moving using the quick chart panel, 4-59 

removing fields from, 4-28 

selecting 

using keyboard shortcuts, B-3 

shadow style, 4-40 

shape, color, lines, 4-39 

showing (unhiding), 5-6, 5-7 

sorting, 6-8 

spacing between, 7-44 

branch styles 

changing using the quick chart panel, 

4-63 

new, 1-8 

Branch symbol, G-2 

Branch templates, 7-20 

branches, G-1 

showing selected, 5-4 

BranchStyle field, 9-6 

BreakAt field, 9-5 

C 

calculations, 7-27 

excluding fields from, 7-30 

problems and solutions, D-6 

using formulas, 7-29 

centering charts, 7-45 

chart boxes. See boxes 

chart layout enhancement 

auxiliary lines, 7-12 

centering, 7-45 

optimizing, 7-44 

spacing between boxes, 7-44 

Chart menu, A-12 

chart orientation. 

chart page area, G-2 

chart rules, 7-51 

creating, 7-51 

deleting rules, 7-53 

modifying, 7-52 

reordering chart rules, 7-53 

chart rules editing, 7-53 

chart selection tabs, A-30 

chart style rules, 1-12 

chart styles, G-2 

applying, 4-54 

changing, 4-54 

changing for a branch, 3-7 

chart title, 3-15 

charts, G-2 

about projects and charts, 4-2 

advanced techniques, 7-2 

combining, 9-52 

compare, 1-6 

comparing, 6-5 

formatting, 4-49 

opening, 3-16, 3-27, 3-38 

I-2

Index 

printing, 4-66 

utilities, 6-1 

viewing, 5-1 

working with basic functions, 4-1 

charts from external data. See importing 

chart data 

clients, G-5 

Clipboard, G-2 

closing a project, 4-6 

cnstants 

adding, 7-31 

CollapseAt field, 9-5 

co-managers, G-3 

combining charts, 9-52 

comments 

insert, 1-21 

inserting, 6-14 

comparing charts, 6-5 

compatibility problems and solutions, D-5 

complex hierarchies, 9-36 

conditional formats 

improved, 1-24 


conditional formatting, 1-12 

creating rules, 7-47 

deleting rules, 7-50 

editing rules, 7-49 

conditional formula, 1-13, 7-24 

conditions 

shared, 1-25 

configuring OrgPlus 

project properties, 6-19 

protecting projects, 6-18 

connecting lines. See lines (connecting) 

consolidation, 1-12, 9-51 

constants, 1-16 

deleting, 7-31 

referencing, 7-32 

using, 7-31 

Control key shortcuts, B-7 

copying box contents and format, 4-65 

co-workers, G-3 

creating 

chart rules, 7-51 

customer support, 2-13 

electronic support, 2-14 

no charge phone support, 2-14 

technical support checklist, 2-13 

cut, copy, paste, 4-65 

D 

Data Connection file, 9-11 

LDAP, 9-40 

ODBC DSN, 9-12 

Oracle, 9-13 

SQL Server, 9-13 

Table/View selection, 9-14 

Data Connection wizard, 9-11 

Data menu, A-12 

data refresh, 9-55 

excluding box contents, 9-46 

maintaining orphan placement, 8-39 

data settings in importing, 9-19 

data source for importing 

file requirements, 9-3 

file type selection, 9-16 

data source selection in importing 

Excel (XLS) spreadsheet, 9-16 

Text (txt) file, 9-17 

data synchronization, 1-15 

Date field formatting, 4-21 

deleting chart rules, 7-53 

Index I-3


demote, G-3 

Design templates, 7-19 

designing boxes 

adding labels to fields, 4-31, 4-33 

adding lines, 4-34 

adjusting margins, 4-35 

creating a column grid, 4-32 

editing box layout, 4-31 

directories, 1-17 

adding and deleteing orphans to, 8-20 

creating, 3-16, 8-15 


displaying, 3-18, 8-18 

editing, 8-17 

editing chart data using, 3-19, 8-19 

emailing chart data from, 8-19 

managing, 8-15 

working with, 8-12 

directory 

other functions, 8-18 

Directory panel, 8-13, A-26 

disk space 

problem and solutions, D-7 

dotted line reports, 9-25 

dotted-line relationships, G-3, See Also 

auxiliary lines 

dotted-line reporting, 1-13 

dragging boxes 


drawing 

lines, 7-7 

shapes (rectangles, octagons), 7-6 

duplicate records, 9-25 

handling, 4-24 

improved reporting, 1-24 

dynamic fields 

E 

defining, 7-22 

Edit menu, A-5 

editing chart rules, 7-53 

electronic support, 2-14 

e-mail 

automatic distribution, 1-22 

emailing chart data 

from directories, 8-19 

e-mailing your chart, 10-13 

embed, G-3 

entering information 

creating using keyboard shortcuts, B-2 

Excel spreadsheet 

data source requirements in importing, 

9-3 

data source selection in importing, 9-16 

exporting chart data to, 3-22, 9-47 

Exclude field, 9-8, 9-9 

exporting chart data, 9-47 

to Excel, 3-22, 9-47 

to other formats, 9-48 

Express (OrgPlus), 2-3 

Extras toolbar, A-18 

extra-wide manager boxes, C-2 

F 

features of OrgPlus, 1-6 

field layout, G-3 

fields, G-3 

adding and deleting, 4-17 

adding in boxes, 3-12 

adding labels to, 4-31, 4-33 

adding using the quick chart panel, 4-61 

defining, 4-17 

I-4

Index 

defining and displaying, 4-17 


displaying in boxes, 3-13, 4-28 

enhance formatting of numbers, 1-25 

entering field text in boxes, 3-4, 4-15 

excluding from calculations, 7-30 

formatting, 4-19, 4-47 

Date fields, 4-21 

Name fields, 4-19 

Number fields, 4-20 

in Hierarchy Mapper display, 9-24 

inserting pictures in, 4-30 

predefined, 4-23 

selecting, 4-9 

selecting in reports, 8-4 

showing (unhiding), 5-7 

file formats used by OrgPlus, 4-3 

File menu, A-4 

files 

operations on 


filtering 

report data, 8-7 

source data in Import process, 9-30, 9-34 

Find, 6-9 

Find and Replace, 6-11 

Advanced Find, 6-10 

Advanced Find and Replace, 6-12 

Find, 6-9 

Find and Replace, 6-11 

Find by Photo, 1-18 

locating a box using, 5-8 

fixed size boxes, 4-37 

Format menu, A-10 

Format toolbar, A-19 

formatting 

boxes, lines, text, fields, and pictures, 

4-35 

conditional formatting, 7-47 

connecting lines, 4-42 

free floating objects, 7-8 

pictures, 4-48 

text, 4-44 

using Box templates, 7-20 

using Branch templates, 7-20 

using Design templates, 7-19 

using Template filess, 7-20 

with templates, 3-36 

within reports, 8-8, 8-9 

formatting boxes, 3-10 

resizing, 4-36 

shadow style, 4-40 

shape, color, lines, 4-39 

formatting charts, 1-6, 3-9, 4-49 

formatting fields, 4-47 

Formula fields, 7-29, G-3 

excluding from calculations, 7-30 

formula options, 7-28 

formulas 

adding, 7-23 

available, 7-25 

recalculating automatically, 7-29 

free floating objects 

adding, 7-6 

aligning, 7-10 

anchoring to boxes, 7-8 

binding to a page, 7-9 

changing object order, 7-9 

drawing or inserting, 7-6 


lines (drawn), 7-7 

moving. See moving free floating objects 

Index I-5



free floating text, 7-4 

free form tool, 1-13 

frequently asked questions about 

registering and unlocking OrgPlus, 2-10 

Full Screen mode, 5-4 

Full Screen toolbar, A-19 

Function key shortcuts, B-6 

G 

grids, 1-25 

grids and rulers 

displaying, 6-2 

using, 6-2 

grouping report data, 8-5 

groups, 1-13, G-4 

applying group filters, 5-11 

creating new groups, 5-9 

enhanced, 1-25 


Groups toolbar, A-20 

H 

Help menu, A-14 

hiding 

boxes, 5-6 

levels, 5-8 

lines, 5-6 

page lines, 5-7 

symbols, 5-7 

hierarchy 

verifying in importing, 9-20 

Hierarchy Mapper 

assigning orphans, 9-22 

changing displayed fields, 9-24 

hotspots, 1-9 


HTML publishing options, 10-4 

hyperlinks 

adding to objects, 7-12 

I 

Import wizard, 3-32, 9-16 

data setting definition, 9-19 

data source selection, 9-16 

dotted line reports, 9-25 

filtering source data, 9-30, 9-34 

Hierarchy Mapper, 9-22 

Show Fields feature, 9-24 

verifying the hierarchy, 9-20 

importing chart data, 1-14, 3-31, 9-2 

advanced data fields, 9-4 

Data Connection wizard, 9-11 

Import wizard, 9-16 

refreshing a chart created by, 3-37, 9-42 

required source fields, 9-2 

required text file format, 9-3 

saving a chart created by, 3-37 

importing data 

complex hierarchies, 9-36 

Insert menu, A-9 

Insert toolbar, A-20 

installation 


installation options, 2-5 

installing OrgPlus, 2-1, 2-3 

from a CD, 2-4 

from a network, 2-4 

integration 

Web, 1-20 

with Microsoft Office, 1-19 

IsAssistant field, 9-5 

I-6

Index 

K 

keyboard shortcuts, B-2 

creating boxes, B-2 

dragging boxes, B-6 

entering information, B-2 

Function and Control keys, B-6 

moving free floating objects, B-6 

selecting boxes, B-3 

text editing, B-5 

viewing your chart, B-3 

working with files, B-4 

L 

launching OrgPlus. See starting OrgPlus 

LDAP Data Connection file, 9-40 

Learning OrgPlus, 2-11 

legends, 1-10, 7-13 

automatic, 1-24 

levels, G-4 


showing or hiding, 5-8 

lines (auxiliary), 7-12 

lines (connecting), G-3 


hiding, 5-6 


showing (unhiding), 5-6, 5-7 

lines (drawn), 7-7 

within boxes, 4-34 

lines (page lines), G-5 


linking, G-4 

localization, 1-19, 1-20 

M 

main window. See OrgPlus main window 

managers, G-4 

mapped fields, 4-27 

margins 

adjusting within boxes, 4-35 

in Page Setup, 4-67 

master page, 7-2 

Master Page, 1-6 

viewing, 7-3 

matrix reporting, 1-17 

memory/resource 

problem and solutions, D-7 

menus 

Chart, A-12 

Data, A-12 

Edit, A-5 

File, A-4 

Format, A-10 

Help, A-14 

Insert, A-9 

Tools, A-11 

View, A-7 

Window, A-13 

metafile (WMF), G-4 

Microsoft Vista, 1-21 

modified co-manager style, C-3 

modified list style, C-4 

modifying chart rules, 7-52 

moving boxes 

by cut and paste, 4-65 

by dragging and dropping, 4-12 

moving free floating objects 

by cut and paste, 4-65 

by dragging and dropping, 4-12, 4-13 


multi-column charts, 1-12 

multiple charts in a project, 1-17, 7-39 

Index I-7




navigating, 7-41 

renaming, 7-41 

multiple charts on a page, C-7 

multiple people in a box, C-6 

multiple topmost boxes, C-5 

multi-record boxes, 1-7, 7-45 

and templates, 7-18 

N 

Name field formatting, 4-19 

navigating charts 

advanced features, 5-6 

multiple charts in a project, 7-41 

showing hidden objects, symbols, page 

lines, 5-7 

sub-charts, 7-35 

new charts 

creatiing, 3-2 

New Person function, 8-20 

Number field formatting, 4-20 

number fields 

enhanced formatting, 1-25 

O 

object linking and embedding (OLE), G-5 

objects, G-5 

moving, 4-12 

selecting, 4-7, 4-9 

ODBC DSN Data Connection file, 9-12 

Office 2007, 1-21 

off-line registration. See registering OrgPlus 

off-line 

off-page references, 1-24 


OLE DB 

support, 1-14 

online help. See Help menu 

online store, 2-15 

opening an existing project, 3-10, 4-2 

optimizing chart layout, 1-11, 7-44 

optimizing files, 4-16 

options 

setting, 6-15 

options panel 

using, 6-15 

Oracle Data Connection file, 9-13 

order of free floating objects, 7-9 


about, 1-2 

approach to learning, 2-11 

customer support, 2-13 

Express, 2-3, A-4 

features, 1-6 

Help menu, 2-12 

how it works, 1-3 

installing, 2-3 

launching, 2-11 

registering, 2-6 

Standard vs Professional, 2-3 

starting, 2-11 

OrgPlus main window, A-2 

chart selection tabs, A-30 

menu bars, A-3 

panels, A-24 

status bar, A-32 

toolbars, A-15 

OrgPlus options 

setting, 6-15 

OrgPlus plug-in 

options, 10-3 

I-8

Index 

OrgPlus Plulgin 

security options, 10-12 

OrgPlus use with other applications, D-5 

OrgTree file 


OrgUnit charts, 1-10 

OrgViewer 

publishing to, 3-39 

orpan management 

data refresh, 8-39 

orphan management, 8-38 


orphans 

adding and deleting records to a 

directory, 8-20 

assigning with Hierarchy Mapper, 9-22 

improved handling, 1-25 

P 

page lines 


Page Setup for printing, 4-67 

page setup problems and solutions, D-4 

panels 

Directory, A-26 

Profile, A-27 

quick chart, 4-58 

Reports, A-27 

Sub-charts, A-28, A-29 

Templates, A-26 

Welcome, A-25 

panning, 5-1 

passwords. See protecting projects 

PDF 

page layout in publishing, 10-3 

publishing options, 10-5 

peers 

grouping, 1-26 

photo manager 


Photo Manager, 1-18, 6-2 

picture formatting 


pictures 


inserting as free floating objects, 7-8 

inserting manually in chart fields, 4-30 

inserting with Photo Manager, 6-2 

PowerPoint 



publishing to, 3-41 

predefined fields 

adding, 4-23 

Print Preview, 4-70 

Printer 


printing 

enhanced on OrgPlus 7, 1-23 

printing charts, 3-9, 3-15, 4-66 

Page Setup, 4-67 

Print Preview, 4-70 

printing, 4-71 


problems and solutions 

calculations, D-6 

disk space, D-7 

installation, D-2 

memory/resource, D-7 

page setup, D-4 

printing, D-2 

using OrgPlus with other applications, D-5 

Index I-9


Product Code, 2-8 

what is it?, 2-10 

where is it?, 2-10 

Professional (OrgPlus), 2-3 

Profile panel, 8-22, A-27 

profile view 

more powerful, 1-23 

profiles, 1-18 

copying, 8-29 


creating composite, 8-27 

creating HTML, 8-28, 8-29 

creating standard, 8-23 



editing, 8-29 

editing data using, 8-23 


using, 3-26 


projects 

about projects and charts, 4-2 

closing, 4-6 

creating, 4-2 

creating new, 4-3 

opening, 4-2 

protecting, 6-18 

saving your work, 4-4 

viewing project properties, 6-19 

promote, G-5 

protecting projects, 6-18 

Publish/Import toolbar, A-21 

publishing 

enhanced in OrgPlus 7, 1-21 

OrgPlus Plugin security options, 10-12 

publishing options 

HTML, 10-4 

PDF, 10-5 

PowerPoint, 10-3 

scheduling automatic publishing, 11-3 

Send as Mail, 10-13 

Word, 10-3 

publishing your chart, 3-38, 10-1, 10-2 

to Microsoft Office, 1-19 

to OrgViewer, 3-39 

to PowerPoint, 3-41 

Q 

Quick Chart creator, 1-9 

quick chart panel, 4-58 

adding fields using, 4-61 

applying templates using, 4-63 

box layout using, 4-62 

changing branch styles using, 4-63 

editing boxes using, 4-60 

formatting boxes using, 4-60 

moving boxes using, 4-59 

R 

refreshing chart data, 3-37, 9-42 

scheduling automatic refresh, 11-3 

registering OrgPlus, 2-1, 2-6 

frequently asked questions, 2-10 

if purchased from HumanConcepts, 2-6 

if purchased from other vendors, 2-8 

registering OrgPlus off-line 

by email, E-2 

by fax, E-2 

by phone, E-3 

reordering chart rules, 7-53 

report data 

filtering, 8-7 

I-10

Index 

formatting report elements, 8-8, 8-9 

grouping, 8-5 

selecting fields, 8-4 

sorting, 8-6 

reports, 1-16 

creating, 3-20, 8-3 


displaying, 3-22, 8-11 

editing, 8-10 

exporting to Excel, 3-22 

managing, 8-3 


Reports panel, 8-2, A-27 

reports, profiles, directories, and searches, 

8-1 

repositioning boxes within the same level, 

C-8 

resizing boxes, 4-36 

right-click menus, B-1 

rulers, 1-25 

rulers and grids 


using, 6-2 

S 

sample charts 

OrgPlus 7 enhancements, 1-23 

SAP 

direct access to, 1-14 

saving chart after importing, 3-37 

saving your project, 3-8, 4-4 

scenario analysis, 1-4 

scheduling Refresh or Publish tasks 

checking tasks, 11-8 

deleting tasks, 11-7 

editing tasks, 11-7 

search 

advanced, 1-16 

search panel 

using, 8-36 

search results 


searching charts, 8-34 

secondary mouse button, G-5 

security 

OrgPlus Plugin options, 10-12 

selecting 

connecting lines, 4-8 

fields, 4-9 

levels, 4-10 

objects - all of the same type, 4-9 

selecting objects, 4-7 

Sequence field, 9-7 

servers, G-5 


showing 

branches, 5-4 

levels, 5-8 

showing (unhiding) 

boxes, 5-6, 5-7 

comments, 5-7 

lines, 5-6, 5-7 

page lines, 5-7 

symbols, 5-7 

sorting 

report data, 8-6 

sorting boxes, 6-8 

source data 

requirements, 9-2 

spacing between boxes, 7-44 

spell checking, 6-13 

SQL Server Data Connection file, 9-13 

Index I-11


staggering boxes on the same level, C-8 

Standard toolbar, A-16 

starting OrgPlus, 2-11 

status bar, A-32 

styles 

applying chart, 4-54 

changing chart, 4-54 

sub-chart arrow labels, 1-24 

sub-charts, 1-13, 1-14, 3-27, 7-33 

creating with Sub-chart wizard, 3-28, 

7-35 

inserting breaks manually, 3-30, 7-34 

labeling breaks, 7-34 

navigating, 3-29, 7-35 

removing breaks, 3-30, 7-35 

Sub-charts panel, 7-37, A-28, A-29 

subgroups, G-6 

subordinates, G-6 

adding, 3-6 

support. See customer support 

symbols 


system requirements, 2-2 

T 

Table/View selection 

for Data Connection file, 9-14 

Tagged Image File format (TIFF), G-6 

tasks 


technical support 

checklist, 2-13 

no charge phone support, 2-14 

Template files, 7-20 

templates, 1-10, G-6 

about, 4-2 

and multi-record boxes, 7-18 

applying to a chart, 3-36 

applying using the quick chart panel, 

4-63 

based on existing charts, 7-17 

Box, 7-20 

Branch, 7-20 

creating and modifying, 7-17 

Design, 7-19 

files, 7-20 

learning about, 7-17 


OrgPlus 7 enhancements, 1-23 

using, 7-19 

Templates panel, 7-19, A-26 

text 

Autotext elements, 7-5 

editing using keyboard shortcuts, B-5 


free floating, 7-4 

text boxes 

inserting, 7-7 

Text file 

data source requirements in importing, 

9-3 

data source selection in importing, 9-17 

Text toolbar, A-22 

thumbnails, 5-3, G-6 

titles in charts, 3-15 

tool 

free form, 1-13 

toolbars 

Auxiliary, A-17 

Extras, A-18 

Format, A-19 

Full Screen, A-19 

I-12

Index 

Groups, A-20 

Insert, A-20 

Publish/Import, A-21 

Standard, A-16 

Text, A-22 

Zoom, A-23 

Tools menu, A-11 

topmost box, G-6 

Tree panel, 1-22, 8-31 

trees 

working with, 8-31, 8-40 

troubleshooting, D-1 

calculations, D-6 

disk space, D-7 

installation, D-2 

memory/resource, D-7 

page setup, D-4 

printing, D-2 

using OrgPlus with other applications, D-5 

tutorials, 3-2 

U 

unassigned positions. See orphans 

unhiding. See showing 

unicode, G-6 

Unlock Code, 2-6 

what is it?, 2-10 

where is it?, 2-10 

unlocking OrgPlus. See registering OrgPlus 

URI 

off-page references, 1-24 

utilities, 6-1 

V 

View menu, A-7 

viewing charts 

Full Screen mode, 5-4 

showing selected branches, 5-4 

thumbnails, 5-3 

zooming and panning, 5-1 

viewing your chart 


W 

Welcome panel, A-25 

what if scenario analysis, 1-4 

what-if analysis, 1-16 

Window menu, A-13 

Word 



word wrap 

enhancements, 1-25 

wrapping, G-6 

X 

XML support, 1-19 

Z 

Zoom toolbar, A-23 

zooming, 5-1 

Index I-13


I-14

OrgPlus 7 User Guide

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?